GEOMETRY OF MEASURES: PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES … · 2017. 5. 4. · GEOMETRY OF MEASURES: PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 2 map. From standard facts of di erential geometry we

Post on 18-Aug-2020

0 Views

Category:

Documents

0 Downloads

Preview:

Click to see full reader

Transcript

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES

ROMAN KARASEV

1 Introduction

In this course we start with several topological techniques that allow to partition sev-eral measures in a Euclidean space into equal parts or partition the space into parts ofprescribed measure These are classical results in discrete geometry and measure theoryand they find applications in a variety of problems

After that we give applications to point-line incidences and spanning trees with lowcrossing number following the excellent review of H Kaplan J Matousek and M Sharir [KMS12]The reader is also encouraged to read the review of L Guth on a similar topic [Guth13]

Then we discuss the monotone transportation and the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityfollowing the nice course of K Ball [Ball04] We also consider the PrekopandashLeindlerinequality for log-concave measures the Minkowski theorem on facet areas the needledecomposition and the isoperimetric inequality for the Gaussian measure following inparticular the blog post of T Tao [Tao11] and the nice paper of F Nazarov M Sodinand A Volrsquoberg [NSV02]

We touch the topic of the isoperimetric inequality and concentration on the roundsphere as well as another result about the Gaussian measure known as the Sidak lemmaThen we give some simple facts about volumes of sections of a cube facet and vertexnumbers of centrally symmetric polytopes and sketch a proof of the Dvoretzky theoremfollowing another brief course of K Ball [Ball97] We also discuss the topological approachto the Dvoretzky theorem and recent positive and negative results in this direction

2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem

One common tool to prove results about partitions of measures is the classical BorsukndashUlam theorem [Bor33]

Theorem 21 For any continuous map f Sn rarr Rn there exists a pair of antipodalpoints xminusx isin Sn such that f(x) = f(minusx)

Proof By putting g(x) = f(x)minus f(minusx) we reduce this theorem to the following For anodd map g Sn rarr Rn there exists a point x isin Sn such that g(x) = 0 A map g is calledodd if g(minusx) = minusg(x) for any x

Then we consider a simple map g0 defined as follows If Sn is the unit sphere in Rn+1then g0 is the projection to a coordinate subspace Rn sub Rn+1 It is easy to observe thatfor g0 there is a unique antipodal pair x0minusx0 isin Sn that is mapped to zero Moreover atthis x0 (and minusx0) the Jacobian matrix Dg0 is nondegenerate

Assume that g does not map any point to zero Now we connect g0 and g by thehomotopy ht(x) = (1minust)g0(x)+tg(x) For any t the map ht(x) remains an odd continuous

2000 Mathematics Subject Classification 52C35 60D05Key words and phrases ham sandwich theorem monotone maps log-concavity isoperimetry

polytopesSupported by the Dynasty Foundation the Presidentrsquos of Russian Federation grant MD-35220121

the Federal Program ldquoScientific and scientific-pedagogical staff of innovative Russiardquo 2009ndash2013 and theRussian government project 11G34310053

1

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 2

map From standard facts of differential geometry we may perturb the homotopy htslightly to obtain another homotopy ht(x) with the following properties

1) h0(x) is still equal to g0(x) 2) zero is a regular value for h Sn times I rarr Rn (I = [0 1]is the segment) and hminus1(0) is a one-dimensional submanifold Z sub Sntimes I with boundaryin Sn times partI 3) the map h1(x) may be not equal to g(x) but it still misses zero in Rn

Now starting from the unique pair (x0 0) (minusx0 0) isin partZ and trace this pair alongthe one-dimensional set Z This pair of point must finally arrive at some other pair(x1 t1) (minusx1 t1) sub Sntimes I but there is nowhere to arrive t1 = 1 is impossible becauseof the assumption (3) t1 = 0 would mean that the pair (x1minusx1) is the same as (x0minusx0)but with reversed order The latter is impossible because if (x0 0) and (minusx0 0) areconnected by a component of Z then the antipodal action (x t) 7rarr (minusx t) would have afixed point in this component which is wrong

Thus the assumption was wrong and we conclude that gminus1(0) is nonempty

Let us state another similar theorem

Theorem 22 Any odd map g Sn rarr Sn has odd degree

Proof The proof follows from taking quotient by the antipodal action RP n = SnZ2

and considering the induced map gprime RP n rarr RP n One may check that the mapgprimelowast H1(RP n) rarr H1(RP n) is an isomorphism Then from the explicit description of thecohomology Hlowast(RP nF2) = F2[w](wn+1) it follows that gprime induces an isomorphism inmodulo 2 cohomology and therefore its degree is odd

The above theorem has the following corollary due to H Hopf [Hopf44]

Theorem 23 Let M be a compact n-dimensional Riemannian manifold and δ gt 0 is apositive real number For any map f M rarr Rn there exist two points x y isinM connectedby a geodesic of length δ such that f(x) = f(y)

The proof is left to the reader Hint Consider the point x isin M such that f(x) isthe extremal point of the image f(M) Then for every direction ν isin TxM consider thegeodesic `(t ν) from x in the direction of ν and assuming the contrary construct twohomotopic maps from the set of directions (identified with Snminus1) to Snminus1 one of thembeing odd and the other being non-surjective (and therefore having zero degree)

For more information about the BorsukndashUlam theorem the reader is referred to thebook of Matousek [Mat03]

3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version

Now we are ready to prove the classical lsquoham sandwichrsquo theorem [ST42 Ste45]

Theorem 31 Let micro1 micron be probability measures in Rn that attain zero on everyhyperplane Then some hyperplane H partitions Rn into a pair of halfspaces H+ and Hminus

so that microi(H+) = microi(H

minus) = 12 for any i

Proof We put A = Rn to Rn+1 as the affine hyperplane defined by xn+1 = 1 Then forany unit vector ν isin Sn the inequality (ν y) ge 0 defines a halfspace H+

ν in A with thecomplement Hminusν For ν equal to (0 0plusmn1) those halfspaces become degenerate thatis coinciding with the empty set of with the whole A

Now we consider the map f Sn rarr Rn defined as follows

f(ν) = (micro1(H+ν ) micro1(H+

ν ))

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 3

Be Theorem 21 there exist a pair νminusν isin Sn with microi(H+ν ) = microi(H

+minusν) = microi(H

minusν ) for any i

Since the total measure of A is 1 with respect to each microi we obtain microi(H+ν ) = microi(H

minusν ) =

12 for any i

Now we are going to consider more general partitions of the space We start from thesimplest case of the line R and consider the space of univariate polynomials of degree atmost d which we denote by Pd(R) For every f isin Pd(R) it is natural to consider the sets

H+f = x f(x) ge 0 and Hminusf = x f(x) le 0

We claim that for any d absolute continuous probability measures micro1 microd in R thereexists a polynomial f isin Pd(R) that splits (with R = H+

f cup Hminusf ) every measure into two

equal halves This fact is established by considering the moment map vd1 R rarr Rd thattakes t isin R to the vector (t t2 td) The images of the measures microi are defined and itis important that they attain zero in every halfspace this follows from the fact that theoriginal microi attain zero on every finite set Now we apply the ham sandwich theorem tothese measures in Rd and obtain an equipartitioning halfspace in Rd with equation

λ(x) ge 0

where λ is a linear function with possible constant term The function λ(vd1) then becomesa polynomial of degree at most d in one variable A nontrivial generalization of this one-dimensional fact for splitting into a given proportion α (1minusα) is given in [SW85] in thiscase the partitioning set has to be twice more complex than in the simple case α = 12

As an exercise the reader may try to prove another result in the line

Theorem 32 Assume f1 fn are integrable functions on the segment [0 1] Thenthere exists another function g orthogonal to every fi that only takes values plusmn1 and hasat most n discontinuity points

The general case of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem follows by considering the

Veronese map vdn Rn rarr R(d+nn ) minus 1 that takes an n-tuple (x1 xn) to the set of

all possible nonconstant monomials in xirsquos of degree at most d After counting suchmonomials we obtain

Theorem 33 Let n and d be positive integers and r =(d+nn

)minus 1 Then any r absolutely

continuous measures micro1 micror in Rn may be partitioned into equal halves simultaneouslyby a partition Rn = H+

f cupHminusf where f is a polynomial of degree at most d

This theorem has a version for partitioning finite point sets which is frequently neededin different problems

Theorem 34 Let n and d be positive integers and r =(d+nn

)minus 1 Then for any r finite

sets X1 Xr in Rn there exists a partition Rn = H+f cupH

minusf where f is a polynomial of

degree at most d such that |Xi capH+f | |Xi capHminusf | ge 12|Xi| for any i

Proof Replace every point x isin Xi with a density distributed uniformly over a ball Bε(x)and sum those densities over all x isin Xi to obtain the density of the measure microi

Then apply Theorem 33 to microi and pass to the limit εrarr +0 It is easy to see that allpossible partitioning polynomials fε may be chosen to be contained in a bounded subsetof Pd(Rn) and therefore it is possible to select a limit polynomial f that will satisfy therequirements

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 4

4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts

In the review of Kaplan Matousek and Sharir [KMS12] the importance of the followingcorollary of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem is emphasized

Lemma 41 Let X be a finite set in Rn and r be a positive integer It is possible tofind a polynomial of degree at most Cnr

1n with the following property The set Z = x f(x) = 0 partitions Rn into connected components V1 VN so that |X cap Vi| le 1r|X|for every i

Proof We first use Theorem 34 to partition X into almost equal halves using the zero setZf1 of a linear function f1 Then we partition every part into equal halves with anotherzero set Zf2 of a function f2 which may be still chosen to be linear if n ge 2 Then we dothe same j times After that we have a collections of polynomials f1 fj and considertheir product f = f1f2 fj The zero set Zf partitions Rn into at least r = 2j connectedcomponents each containing at most 1r fraction of the set X

It remains to bound from above the degree of f On the i-th step we partitioned 2iminus1

sets and the required degree of the polynomials was at most (n2iminus1)1n The summationover i of this geometric progression gives the estimate

deg f le (nr)1n

1minus 2minus1n= Cnr

1n

We proved the result for r powers of two for other r we could choose 2j to be the leastpower of two not less than r

Following [KMS12] we make several comments on this lemma Seemingly we parti-tioned the space into 2j parts but some parts could actually split into several connectedcomponent in that process So we actually do not control the number of parts The otherissue is that some points of X (and actually many of them) can lie on the set Zf and needa separate treatment in most applications

One may consider a simpler approach that gives partition into convex parts with largerintersection with lines We may partition a measure into equal halves with a line inarbitrary direction Then we can partition both parts simultaneously into equal quartersby the ham sandwich theorem on this step the partitioning line is unique Therefore weobtain a partition into 4 equal parts such that any line intersects (essentially intersectsin the interior) at most 3 of them Iterating this procedure hierarchically in k steps wepartition a measure into N = 4k parts and it is easy to see that any line intersects at most3k = N log 3 log 4 of them This estimate is asymptotically worse than the one obtainedwith polynomial cuts but is has an advantage that the parts are convex

When trying to generalize the above example to higher dimensions and intersectionswith hyperplanes we see that it is not trivial to find a convex equipartition of a singlemeasure so that every hyperplane does not intersect at least one of them in the interiorThe corresponding result is known as the YaondashYao theorem [YY85]

Theorem 42 It is possible to partition an absolutely continuous finite measure in Rn

into 2n equal convex parts so that any hyperplane does not intersect the interior of at leastone of the parts

Sketch of the proof We are not going to make the full proof because it is quite technicaland hard to visualize we only sketch the main ideas instead

The two-dimensional case is already proved Then we make induction on the dimensionand try to find a partition which is a twisted (in some sense) partition into coordinateorthants We select the basis e1 en and partition the measure micro into equal halves

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 5

with a hyperplane H perpendicular to e1 Then we consider all possible unit vectors vsuch that (v e1) gt 0 and project both halves of the measure onto H along v For everyone of the halves we obtain an (nminus 1)-dimensional YaondashYao partition and it is possibleto prove by induction that it is unique once the basis e2 en in H is selected

Then a version of the Brouwer fixed point theorem (a similar fact is Lemma 92 below)helps to prove that for some v the centers of the YaondashYao partitions for the two halvescoincide and give the new center c

This gives the required partition because every hyperplane H prime is either parallel to Hin this case everything is clear or intersects H in an affine (nminus 2)-subspace One of therays c+ tvtgt0 and cminus tvtgt0 is not touched by H prime and we select the corresponding halfH+ or Hminus let it be H+ without loss of generality Applying the inductive assumption tothe projection of micro|H+ along v and the intersection H capH prime we find a part in H+ whoseinterior is not intersected by H prime

To finish the proof one has to prove that the YaondashYao center c is defined uniquely bymicro and e1 en We omit these details

Then it is easy to iterate and obtain a partition into N equal convex parts so that any

hyperplane intersects at most Nlog(2nminus1)

log 2n of them in interiors The polynomial partitioncan give a better result it is possible to partition a measure into N equal parts so thatany hyperplane intersects at most O(N

nminus1n ) of them see [KMS12] for the details But for

the polynomial partition the parts may be non-convex and even not connected so convexpartitions are still useful in some cases The reader is referred to the paper of Bukh andHubard [BH11] for an interesting application of the YaondashYao theorem

5 The SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

We are going to apply Lemma 41 and deduce the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem aboutthe number of incidences between points and lines We start from the definition

Definition 51 Let P be a set of points and L be a set of lines in the plane Denote byI(PL) their incidence number that is the number of pairs (p `) isin P timesL such that p isin `

Theorem 52 In the plane I(PL) le C(|P |23|L|23 + |P | + |L|) for a suitable absoluteconstant C

Remark 53 This theorem is also valid for pseudolines that is subsets of the place thatbehave like lines in terms of their intersection Such a generalization so far seems to beout of reach of algebraic methods

Proof We start from a much weaker estimate which we are going to apply to differentsets of points and lines

Lemma 54 I(PL) le |L|+ |P |2

This lemma is proved by splitting L into two families one for the lines intersecting atmost one point of P and all other lines The details are left to the reader

Now we put m = |P | and n = |L| Take some parameter r whose value we will definelater We choose an algebraic set Z of degree O(

radicr) (from now on we use the notation

O(middot) to avoid different constants) that partitions R2 into connected sets V1 VN Let P0 = P cap Z and Pi = P cap Vi for any i Also denote by L0 the lines in L that

lie entirely on Z and denote by Li the lines in L that intersect Vi Note that Lirsquos arenot disjoint and |L0| le degZ = O(

radicr) The crucial fact is that every line from L L0

intersects Z in at most O(radicr) points and intersects at most O(

radicr) of the regions Vi

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 6

First we obviously estimate

I(P0 L0) le m|L0| = O(mradicr)

sumi

I(P0 Li) = nO(radicr) I(Pi L0) = 0

Summing up those obvious estimates we obtain O((m+n)radicr) in total It remains to use

Lemma 54 and boundsumi

I(Pi Li) lesumi

|Li|+ |Pi|2 le nO(radicr) +m2r

Now we make several observations The projective duality allows us to interchangepoints and lines and assume m le n Then Lemma 54 allows us to concentrate on the

caseradicn le m le n After that putting r = m43

n23 we make all the estimates made so far to

be of the form O(n23m23)

An interesting application of the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem is the sum-product es-timates We quote the simplest of them due to G Elekes For a subset A of a ringput

A+ A = a1 + a2 a1 a2 isin A A middot A = a1a2 a1 a2 isin A

Theorem 55 For any finite subset A of R we have

|A+ A| middot |A middot A| ge C|A|52

for an absolute constant C

Proof Consider the set of points in R2

P = (b+ c ac) a b c isin A

and the set of lines

L = y = a(xminus b) a b isin AObviously |L| = |A|2 and every ` isin L contains at least |A| points of P with given a andb and variable c Hence

|I(PL)| ge |A|3Now by the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

|P | middot |L| ge C|I(PL)|32rArr |P | middot |A|2 ge C|A|92

and therefore |P | ge C|A|52 But P sube (A + A) times A middot A and we obtain the requiredinequality

Theorem 55 implies that at least one of the cardinalities |A + A| or |A middot A| is at leastradicC|A|54 The exponent 54 can be slightly improved through a more careful counting

see the details in [TaoVu10 Section 83] Actually P Erdos and E Szemeredi conjecturedthat it is possible to replace 54 with 2minus ε with arbitrarily small positive ε this remainsan open problem

6 Spanning trees with low crossing number

Sometimes it is important to estimate the number of parts for the partition in Lemma 41In order to do this we pass to the projective space and prove

Lemma 61 A hypersurface Z sub RP n of degree d partitions RP n into at most dn con-nected components

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

partfpartx1

(x) = 0

partfpartxn

(x) = 0

These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

(degZminus1

2

)+1 by the

Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

(degZminus1

2

)

Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

radic|P |

points

Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

Now we prove the following

Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

|P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

radic|P | so it is bounded

by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

Now we can prove

Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

(nd+1

)polynomials of degree d each we denote

the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

)and

nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

d

(n

d+ 1

))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

dnd22

such connected components and order types

The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

⋃iF

Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

⋃iF

Now we prove

Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

V =

a0 +

kminus1sumj=1

(aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

We have a natural map

I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

The system of 2k minus 2 equations

g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

pisinP

g(p)f(p) gt 0

that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

⋃iF

The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

9 Partition into prescribed parts

Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

y ge λ1(x) + w1

y ge λm(x) + wm

We are going to establish the following fact

Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

micro(Ri) = αi

Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

10 Monotone maps

Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

u(x) = sup1leilem

(λi(x) + wi)

has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

(101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

C(f) =

intRn

〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

V

u dmicro+

intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

u(k) = log

intK

e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

volK =

intV lowast

detDf dk

This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

of finite volume each then

vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

vol(A+B) geintA

detDg dx =

intA

det(id +Df(x)) dx

Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

det(id +Df(x)) ge

(1 +

(VBVA

)1n)n

and therefore

vol(A+B) ge

(1 +

(VBVA

)1n)n

VA =(V

1nA + V

1nB

)n

which is what we need

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

vol(A+Bh)minus volA

h

where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

volnminus1(partA)

snge(

volA

vn

)nminus1n

Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

nminus1n v1n

n

Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

(volA)nminus1n v1n

n

which is equivalent to the required inequality

Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

Proof Observe that

A capB supe 1

2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

vol(Aminus A) le(

2n

n

)volA

Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

A cap(A+

1

2(x1 + x2)

)supe 1

2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

Now integrate this over x to obtain

vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

intAminusA

vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

ge volA middotintAminusA

(1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

int (1minusx)n

0

1 dy dx =

= volA middotint 1

0

intxle1minusy1n

1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

0

(1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

= volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

0

(1minus y1n)n dy

Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

0

(1minus y1n)n dy =

int 1

0

(1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

Γ(2n+ 1)=

=nn(nminus 1)

(2n)=

(2n

n

)minus1

Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

12 Log-concavity

Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

(121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

ρ

(x1 + x2

2

)geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

(intRρ(x1 y) dy

)1minust

middot(int

Rρ(x2 y) dy

)tunder the assumption

ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

Put for brevity

f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

and also

F =

intRf(y) dy G =

intRg(y) dy H =

intRh(y) dy

Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

1

F

int y

minusinfinf(y) dy =

1

G

int ϕ(y)

minusinfing(y) dy

It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

H =

intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

intRh(ψ(y))

(1minus t+

tf(y)G

g(ϕ(y))F

)dy

Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

H ge F 1minustGt

intR

(f(y)G

Fg(ϕ(y))

)1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

G+ t

f(y)

F

)dy

and using the mean inequality(

(1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

+ tf(y)F

)ge(f(y)F

)tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

)1minustwe conclude

H ge F 1minustGt

intR

f(y)

Fdy = F 1minustGt

Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

volume we rewrite

vol(A+B) ge 1

(1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

If fact the inequality

(122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

Then intRn

h(x) ge(int

Rn

f(x) dx

)1minust

middot(int

Rn

g(y) dy

)t

Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

(123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

Since v is arbitrary the result follows

Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

(124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

d log f(t) =1

f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

(125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

)

is log-concave

Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

We have to prove the inequality

(126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

)2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

)

After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

(LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

The general form of (126) is

(127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

13 Mixed volumes

Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

ui(k) = log

intK

e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

xisinK〈p x〉

Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

h(p K) = h(pK)

Now we can calculate vol K = volK

(131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

intRn

det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

P (x) =sumk

ckxk

where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

Theorem 133 The system of equations

P1(x) = 0

P2(x) = 0

Pn(x) = 0

for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

Rn

f(x) dx middotintRn

g(y) dy le (2π)n

We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

f(x) dx middotintRn

g(y) dy le (2π)n

Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

Hence intRn

f(x) dx middotintRn

g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

g(y)e(zy) dy

Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

Rn

g(y) dy leintRn

g(y)e(zy) dy

which implies the required inequality

In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

0

f(x) dx middotint +infin

0

g(y) dy le π

2

Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

follows that for any s t isin R

w

(s+ t

2

)= eminuse

s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

radicu(s)v(t)

Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

0

f(x) dx middotint +infin

0

g(y) dy =

int +infin

minusinfinu(s) ds middot

int +infin

minusinfinv(t) dt le

le(int +infin

minusinfinw(r) dr

)2

=

(int +infin

0

eminusz22 dz

)2

2

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

implies int +infin

minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

minusinfinf(x) dx =

int +infin

0

f(x) dx = 12

we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

F (xprime) =

int +infin

0

f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

int +infin

0

g(Bxprime + ten) dt

From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

= eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

2eminus(xprimeyprime)

Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

H

F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

G(yprime) dyprime le π

2(2π)nminus1

SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

BH+

g(y) dy =

intH

G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

g(y) dy le (2π)n

Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

Rn

dist(xH)f(x) dx

By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

xf(x) dxminusintHminus

xf(x) dx perp H and

intH+

f(x) dxminusintHminus

f(x) dx = 0

which is exactly what we need

Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

+ Assume that

h(radicx1y1

radicxnyn) ge

radicf(x)g(y)

for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

Rn+

f(x) dx middotintRn+

g(y) dy le

(intRn+

h(z) dz

)2

Proof Substitute

f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

(s+ t

2

))2

ge f(s)g(t)

Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

f(s) ds middotintRn

g(t) dt le(int

Rn

h(r) dr

)2

that is equivalent to what we need

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

minusAig(y) dy le πn

It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

volK middot volK le v2n

where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

(x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

22

and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

Rn

f(x) dx =

intRn

int f(x)

0

1 dydx =

int 1

0

volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

for the constant cn =int 1

0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

Rn

g(y) dy = cn volK

It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

(2π)n2 =

intRn

eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

Hence

volK middot volK le (2π)n

c2n

= v2n

It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

volK middot volK ge 4n

n

which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

(141) volK middot volK ge πn

n

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

15 Needle decomposition

Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

The main result is the following theorem

Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

micro(Pi)

micro(Rn)=

ν(Pi)

ν(Rn)

and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

intRn e

minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

= micro(U) = micro(H)

The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

Now everything reduces to the following

Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

(ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

2 where

ν(U) =

int x

minusinfineminusπξ

2

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

radicn in particular the following estimate

holds

σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

2

In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

defined as follows

U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

volX le v cosn+1 ε

2= v

(1minus sin2 ε

2

)n+12 le veminus

(n+1) sin2 ε2

2

The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

22

which implies

σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

22

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

2

Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

18 More remarks on isoperimetry

There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

M

(ω∆ω)ν =

intM

|dω|2ν +

intM

|dlowastω|2ν

where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

M

f∆fν =

intM

|df |2ν

From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

L20(M) =

f isin L2(M)

intM

fν = 0

the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

M

|df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

|f |2ν for all f such that

intM

fν = 0

The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

|E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

(xy)isinE

f(x)

The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

Now we make the following definition

Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

19 Sidakrsquos lemma

Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

ν(A) ge micro(A)

Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

Rn

f dν geintRn

f dmicro

Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

f dν =

int f(x)

0

intRn

1 dνdy =

int f(x)

0

ν(Cy)dy

where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

f(x) =

inty(xy)isinA

1 dτ

is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

Now we observe that

ν times τ(A) =

intRn

f(x) dν geintRn

f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

by Lemma 193

And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

micro(S)

is more peaked than micro

Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

radic2 This result was extended to lower

values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

This can be decoded as

vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

ε

eminusπ|x|2

dx

where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

be defined (following Minkowski) to be

volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

|(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

cradic

nlogN

(for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

)n2eminusα|x|

2 An easy es-

timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

micro(Pi) geint 1

minus1

radicα

πeminusαx

2

dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

eminusα

It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

radicnα

By Theorem 191

micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

1minus 1radicπα

eminusα)N

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

cradic

nlogN

) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

παeminusα)Nge c2

or

(201) N log

(1minus 1radic

παeminusα)ge c3

for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

logN middot logM ge γn

for some absolute constant γ gt 0

Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

nlogN

and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

of radius rlowast = cradic

1logM

Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

cn

logN

)n2vn

(for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

volK

volKge(

cn

logN

)n

Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

volK

volK=

(volK)2

volK middot volKge (volK)2

v2n

ge(

cn

logN

)n

where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

(1 + t)n= 1

Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

|x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

dist(xX) le δ

In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

δkminus1

Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

|X| le kvk4kminus1

vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

δkminus1

here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

vk = πk2

Γ(k2+1)

Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

radic2

Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

radic2 such that

the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

E sube K suberadicnE

Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

1radicnle f(x) le 1

on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

c

radiclog n

n

with some absolute constant c

See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

n(this is the

DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

128

Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

128 If in total

2eminusc2ε2 logn

128 |X| lt 1

then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

k16kminus1

εkminus1eminus

c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

M equal 1

x le sumxiisinX

cixi leradic

2 maxxiisinXxi le

radic2(1 + ε8)

Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

(1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

2(1 + ε8)

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

radic2(1 + ε8)

For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

|x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

where x1 xn are the points of X

Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

)kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

(4δ

)kwe could rotate X

and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

Q = x21 + x2

2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

with n = k +(d+kminus1d

) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

(d+kminus1d

) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

(dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

)

A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

f(x) = f(minusx)

References

[Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

[ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

[Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

[Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

[Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

[Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

[BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

[Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

[Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

[Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

[Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

[BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

[DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

[Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

[GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

[Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

[GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

[GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

[Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

[Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

[Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

[Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

[Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

[KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

[KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

[Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

[NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

[Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

[ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

[Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

[Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

[Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

[ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

[SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

[ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

[Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

[TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

[Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

[Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

[Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

[YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

E-mail address r n karasevmailru

URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

  • 1 Introduction
  • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
  • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
  • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
  • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
  • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
  • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
  • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
  • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
  • 10 Monotone maps
  • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
  • 12 Log-concavity
  • 13 Mixed volumes
  • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
  • 15 Needle decomposition
  • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
  • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
  • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
  • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
  • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
  • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
  • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
  • References

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 2

    map From standard facts of differential geometry we may perturb the homotopy htslightly to obtain another homotopy ht(x) with the following properties

    1) h0(x) is still equal to g0(x) 2) zero is a regular value for h Sn times I rarr Rn (I = [0 1]is the segment) and hminus1(0) is a one-dimensional submanifold Z sub Sntimes I with boundaryin Sn times partI 3) the map h1(x) may be not equal to g(x) but it still misses zero in Rn

    Now starting from the unique pair (x0 0) (minusx0 0) isin partZ and trace this pair alongthe one-dimensional set Z This pair of point must finally arrive at some other pair(x1 t1) (minusx1 t1) sub Sntimes I but there is nowhere to arrive t1 = 1 is impossible becauseof the assumption (3) t1 = 0 would mean that the pair (x1minusx1) is the same as (x0minusx0)but with reversed order The latter is impossible because if (x0 0) and (minusx0 0) areconnected by a component of Z then the antipodal action (x t) 7rarr (minusx t) would have afixed point in this component which is wrong

    Thus the assumption was wrong and we conclude that gminus1(0) is nonempty

    Let us state another similar theorem

    Theorem 22 Any odd map g Sn rarr Sn has odd degree

    Proof The proof follows from taking quotient by the antipodal action RP n = SnZ2

    and considering the induced map gprime RP n rarr RP n One may check that the mapgprimelowast H1(RP n) rarr H1(RP n) is an isomorphism Then from the explicit description of thecohomology Hlowast(RP nF2) = F2[w](wn+1) it follows that gprime induces an isomorphism inmodulo 2 cohomology and therefore its degree is odd

    The above theorem has the following corollary due to H Hopf [Hopf44]

    Theorem 23 Let M be a compact n-dimensional Riemannian manifold and δ gt 0 is apositive real number For any map f M rarr Rn there exist two points x y isinM connectedby a geodesic of length δ such that f(x) = f(y)

    The proof is left to the reader Hint Consider the point x isin M such that f(x) isthe extremal point of the image f(M) Then for every direction ν isin TxM consider thegeodesic `(t ν) from x in the direction of ν and assuming the contrary construct twohomotopic maps from the set of directions (identified with Snminus1) to Snminus1 one of thembeing odd and the other being non-surjective (and therefore having zero degree)

    For more information about the BorsukndashUlam theorem the reader is referred to thebook of Matousek [Mat03]

    3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version

    Now we are ready to prove the classical lsquoham sandwichrsquo theorem [ST42 Ste45]

    Theorem 31 Let micro1 micron be probability measures in Rn that attain zero on everyhyperplane Then some hyperplane H partitions Rn into a pair of halfspaces H+ and Hminus

    so that microi(H+) = microi(H

    minus) = 12 for any i

    Proof We put A = Rn to Rn+1 as the affine hyperplane defined by xn+1 = 1 Then forany unit vector ν isin Sn the inequality (ν y) ge 0 defines a halfspace H+

    ν in A with thecomplement Hminusν For ν equal to (0 0plusmn1) those halfspaces become degenerate thatis coinciding with the empty set of with the whole A

    Now we consider the map f Sn rarr Rn defined as follows

    f(ν) = (micro1(H+ν ) micro1(H+

    ν ))

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 3

    Be Theorem 21 there exist a pair νminusν isin Sn with microi(H+ν ) = microi(H

    +minusν) = microi(H

    minusν ) for any i

    Since the total measure of A is 1 with respect to each microi we obtain microi(H+ν ) = microi(H

    minusν ) =

    12 for any i

    Now we are going to consider more general partitions of the space We start from thesimplest case of the line R and consider the space of univariate polynomials of degree atmost d which we denote by Pd(R) For every f isin Pd(R) it is natural to consider the sets

    H+f = x f(x) ge 0 and Hminusf = x f(x) le 0

    We claim that for any d absolute continuous probability measures micro1 microd in R thereexists a polynomial f isin Pd(R) that splits (with R = H+

    f cup Hminusf ) every measure into two

    equal halves This fact is established by considering the moment map vd1 R rarr Rd thattakes t isin R to the vector (t t2 td) The images of the measures microi are defined and itis important that they attain zero in every halfspace this follows from the fact that theoriginal microi attain zero on every finite set Now we apply the ham sandwich theorem tothese measures in Rd and obtain an equipartitioning halfspace in Rd with equation

    λ(x) ge 0

    where λ is a linear function with possible constant term The function λ(vd1) then becomesa polynomial of degree at most d in one variable A nontrivial generalization of this one-dimensional fact for splitting into a given proportion α (1minusα) is given in [SW85] in thiscase the partitioning set has to be twice more complex than in the simple case α = 12

    As an exercise the reader may try to prove another result in the line

    Theorem 32 Assume f1 fn are integrable functions on the segment [0 1] Thenthere exists another function g orthogonal to every fi that only takes values plusmn1 and hasat most n discontinuity points

    The general case of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem follows by considering the

    Veronese map vdn Rn rarr R(d+nn ) minus 1 that takes an n-tuple (x1 xn) to the set of

    all possible nonconstant monomials in xirsquos of degree at most d After counting suchmonomials we obtain

    Theorem 33 Let n and d be positive integers and r =(d+nn

    )minus 1 Then any r absolutely

    continuous measures micro1 micror in Rn may be partitioned into equal halves simultaneouslyby a partition Rn = H+

    f cupHminusf where f is a polynomial of degree at most d

    This theorem has a version for partitioning finite point sets which is frequently neededin different problems

    Theorem 34 Let n and d be positive integers and r =(d+nn

    )minus 1 Then for any r finite

    sets X1 Xr in Rn there exists a partition Rn = H+f cupH

    minusf where f is a polynomial of

    degree at most d such that |Xi capH+f | |Xi capHminusf | ge 12|Xi| for any i

    Proof Replace every point x isin Xi with a density distributed uniformly over a ball Bε(x)and sum those densities over all x isin Xi to obtain the density of the measure microi

    Then apply Theorem 33 to microi and pass to the limit εrarr +0 It is easy to see that allpossible partitioning polynomials fε may be chosen to be contained in a bounded subsetof Pd(Rn) and therefore it is possible to select a limit polynomial f that will satisfy therequirements

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 4

    4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts

    In the review of Kaplan Matousek and Sharir [KMS12] the importance of the followingcorollary of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem is emphasized

    Lemma 41 Let X be a finite set in Rn and r be a positive integer It is possible tofind a polynomial of degree at most Cnr

    1n with the following property The set Z = x f(x) = 0 partitions Rn into connected components V1 VN so that |X cap Vi| le 1r|X|for every i

    Proof We first use Theorem 34 to partition X into almost equal halves using the zero setZf1 of a linear function f1 Then we partition every part into equal halves with anotherzero set Zf2 of a function f2 which may be still chosen to be linear if n ge 2 Then we dothe same j times After that we have a collections of polynomials f1 fj and considertheir product f = f1f2 fj The zero set Zf partitions Rn into at least r = 2j connectedcomponents each containing at most 1r fraction of the set X

    It remains to bound from above the degree of f On the i-th step we partitioned 2iminus1

    sets and the required degree of the polynomials was at most (n2iminus1)1n The summationover i of this geometric progression gives the estimate

    deg f le (nr)1n

    1minus 2minus1n= Cnr

    1n

    We proved the result for r powers of two for other r we could choose 2j to be the leastpower of two not less than r

    Following [KMS12] we make several comments on this lemma Seemingly we parti-tioned the space into 2j parts but some parts could actually split into several connectedcomponent in that process So we actually do not control the number of parts The otherissue is that some points of X (and actually many of them) can lie on the set Zf and needa separate treatment in most applications

    One may consider a simpler approach that gives partition into convex parts with largerintersection with lines We may partition a measure into equal halves with a line inarbitrary direction Then we can partition both parts simultaneously into equal quartersby the ham sandwich theorem on this step the partitioning line is unique Therefore weobtain a partition into 4 equal parts such that any line intersects (essentially intersectsin the interior) at most 3 of them Iterating this procedure hierarchically in k steps wepartition a measure into N = 4k parts and it is easy to see that any line intersects at most3k = N log 3 log 4 of them This estimate is asymptotically worse than the one obtainedwith polynomial cuts but is has an advantage that the parts are convex

    When trying to generalize the above example to higher dimensions and intersectionswith hyperplanes we see that it is not trivial to find a convex equipartition of a singlemeasure so that every hyperplane does not intersect at least one of them in the interiorThe corresponding result is known as the YaondashYao theorem [YY85]

    Theorem 42 It is possible to partition an absolutely continuous finite measure in Rn

    into 2n equal convex parts so that any hyperplane does not intersect the interior of at leastone of the parts

    Sketch of the proof We are not going to make the full proof because it is quite technicaland hard to visualize we only sketch the main ideas instead

    The two-dimensional case is already proved Then we make induction on the dimensionand try to find a partition which is a twisted (in some sense) partition into coordinateorthants We select the basis e1 en and partition the measure micro into equal halves

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 5

    with a hyperplane H perpendicular to e1 Then we consider all possible unit vectors vsuch that (v e1) gt 0 and project both halves of the measure onto H along v For everyone of the halves we obtain an (nminus 1)-dimensional YaondashYao partition and it is possibleto prove by induction that it is unique once the basis e2 en in H is selected

    Then a version of the Brouwer fixed point theorem (a similar fact is Lemma 92 below)helps to prove that for some v the centers of the YaondashYao partitions for the two halvescoincide and give the new center c

    This gives the required partition because every hyperplane H prime is either parallel to Hin this case everything is clear or intersects H in an affine (nminus 2)-subspace One of therays c+ tvtgt0 and cminus tvtgt0 is not touched by H prime and we select the corresponding halfH+ or Hminus let it be H+ without loss of generality Applying the inductive assumption tothe projection of micro|H+ along v and the intersection H capH prime we find a part in H+ whoseinterior is not intersected by H prime

    To finish the proof one has to prove that the YaondashYao center c is defined uniquely bymicro and e1 en We omit these details

    Then it is easy to iterate and obtain a partition into N equal convex parts so that any

    hyperplane intersects at most Nlog(2nminus1)

    log 2n of them in interiors The polynomial partitioncan give a better result it is possible to partition a measure into N equal parts so thatany hyperplane intersects at most O(N

    nminus1n ) of them see [KMS12] for the details But for

    the polynomial partition the parts may be non-convex and even not connected so convexpartitions are still useful in some cases The reader is referred to the paper of Bukh andHubard [BH11] for an interesting application of the YaondashYao theorem

    5 The SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

    We are going to apply Lemma 41 and deduce the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem aboutthe number of incidences between points and lines We start from the definition

    Definition 51 Let P be a set of points and L be a set of lines in the plane Denote byI(PL) their incidence number that is the number of pairs (p `) isin P timesL such that p isin `

    Theorem 52 In the plane I(PL) le C(|P |23|L|23 + |P | + |L|) for a suitable absoluteconstant C

    Remark 53 This theorem is also valid for pseudolines that is subsets of the place thatbehave like lines in terms of their intersection Such a generalization so far seems to beout of reach of algebraic methods

    Proof We start from a much weaker estimate which we are going to apply to differentsets of points and lines

    Lemma 54 I(PL) le |L|+ |P |2

    This lemma is proved by splitting L into two families one for the lines intersecting atmost one point of P and all other lines The details are left to the reader

    Now we put m = |P | and n = |L| Take some parameter r whose value we will definelater We choose an algebraic set Z of degree O(

    radicr) (from now on we use the notation

    O(middot) to avoid different constants) that partitions R2 into connected sets V1 VN Let P0 = P cap Z and Pi = P cap Vi for any i Also denote by L0 the lines in L that

    lie entirely on Z and denote by Li the lines in L that intersect Vi Note that Lirsquos arenot disjoint and |L0| le degZ = O(

    radicr) The crucial fact is that every line from L L0

    intersects Z in at most O(radicr) points and intersects at most O(

    radicr) of the regions Vi

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 6

    First we obviously estimate

    I(P0 L0) le m|L0| = O(mradicr)

    sumi

    I(P0 Li) = nO(radicr) I(Pi L0) = 0

    Summing up those obvious estimates we obtain O((m+n)radicr) in total It remains to use

    Lemma 54 and boundsumi

    I(Pi Li) lesumi

    |Li|+ |Pi|2 le nO(radicr) +m2r

    Now we make several observations The projective duality allows us to interchangepoints and lines and assume m le n Then Lemma 54 allows us to concentrate on the

    caseradicn le m le n After that putting r = m43

    n23 we make all the estimates made so far to

    be of the form O(n23m23)

    An interesting application of the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem is the sum-product es-timates We quote the simplest of them due to G Elekes For a subset A of a ringput

    A+ A = a1 + a2 a1 a2 isin A A middot A = a1a2 a1 a2 isin A

    Theorem 55 For any finite subset A of R we have

    |A+ A| middot |A middot A| ge C|A|52

    for an absolute constant C

    Proof Consider the set of points in R2

    P = (b+ c ac) a b c isin A

    and the set of lines

    L = y = a(xminus b) a b isin AObviously |L| = |A|2 and every ` isin L contains at least |A| points of P with given a andb and variable c Hence

    |I(PL)| ge |A|3Now by the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

    |P | middot |L| ge C|I(PL)|32rArr |P | middot |A|2 ge C|A|92

    and therefore |P | ge C|A|52 But P sube (A + A) times A middot A and we obtain the requiredinequality

    Theorem 55 implies that at least one of the cardinalities |A + A| or |A middot A| is at leastradicC|A|54 The exponent 54 can be slightly improved through a more careful counting

    see the details in [TaoVu10 Section 83] Actually P Erdos and E Szemeredi conjecturedthat it is possible to replace 54 with 2minus ε with arbitrarily small positive ε this remainsan open problem

    6 Spanning trees with low crossing number

    Sometimes it is important to estimate the number of parts for the partition in Lemma 41In order to do this we pass to the projective space and prove

    Lemma 61 A hypersurface Z sub RP n of degree d partitions RP n into at most dn con-nected components

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

    Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

    By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

    partfpartx1

    (x) = 0

    partfpartxn

    (x) = 0

    These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

    Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

    For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

    components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

    For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

    (degZminus1

    2

    )+1 by the

    Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

    (degZminus1

    2

    )

    Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

    Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

    radic|P |

    points

    Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

    Now we prove the following

    Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

    and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

    The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

    algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

    radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

    C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

    number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

    |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

    with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

    obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

    radic|P | so it is bounded

    by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

    The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

    7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

    Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

    Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

    sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

    Now we can prove

    Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

    Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

    (nd+1

    )polynomials of degree d each we denote

    the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

    )and

    nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

    distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

    d

    (n

    d+ 1

    ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

    dnd22

    such connected components and order types

    The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

    In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

    8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

    A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

    Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

    Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

    A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

    Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

    ⋃iF

    Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

    product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

    Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

    middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

    Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

    ⋃iF

    Now we prove

    Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

    Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

    Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

    Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

    It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

    Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

    Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

    Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

    Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

    V =

    a0 +

    kminus1sumj=1

    (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

    We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

    We have a natural map

    I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

    As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

    Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

    Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

    The system of 2k minus 2 equations

    g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

    has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

    pisinP

    g(p)f(p) gt 0

    that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

    Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

    Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

    ⋃iF

    The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

    Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

    More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

    Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

    bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

    therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

    to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

    involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

    For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

    9 Partition into prescribed parts

    Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

    Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

    Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

    The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

    Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

    In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

    Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

    Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

    y ge λ1(x) + w1

    y ge λm(x) + wm

    We are going to establish the following fact

    Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

    micro(Ri) = αi

    Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

    Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

    Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

    Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

    0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

    we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

    Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

    It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

    Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

    Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

    Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

    If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

    f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

    which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

    first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

    Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

    Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

    ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

    Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

    10 Monotone maps

    Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

    u(x) = sup1leilem

    (λi(x) + wi)

    has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

    Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

    Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

    there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

    The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

    From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

    (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

    for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

    Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

    C(f) =

    intRn

    〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

    Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

    V

    u dmicro+

    intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

    In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

    u(k) = log

    intK

    e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

    It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

    volK =

    intV lowast

    detDf dk

    This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

    11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

    An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

    Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

    of finite volume each then

    vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

    where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

    Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

    Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

    vol(A+B) geintA

    detDg dx =

    intA

    det(id +Df(x)) dx

    Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

    det(id +Df(x)) ge

    (1 +

    (VBVA

    )1n)n

    and therefore

    vol(A+B) ge

    (1 +

    (VBVA

    )1n)n

    VA =(V

    1nA + V

    1nB

    )n

    which is what we need

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

    The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

    volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

    vol(A+Bh)minus volA

    h

    where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

    Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

    volnminus1(partA)

    snge(

    volA

    vn

    )nminus1n

    Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

    vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

    and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

    nminus1n v1n

    n

    Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

    volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

    (volA)nminus1n v1n

    n

    which is equivalent to the required inequality

    Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

    For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

    Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

    Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

    Proof Observe that

    A capB supe 1

    2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

    then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

    Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

    vol(Aminus A) le(

    2n

    n

    )volA

    Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

    When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

    A cap(A+

    1

    2(x1 + x2)

    )supe 1

    2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

    Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

    vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

    Now integrate this over x to obtain

    vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

    intAminusA

    vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

    ge volA middotintAminusA

    (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

    int (1minusx)n

    0

    1 dy dx =

    = volA middotint 1

    0

    intxle1minusy1n

    1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

    0

    (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

    = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

    0

    (1minus y1n)n dy

    Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

    0

    (1minus y1n)n dy =

    int 1

    0

    (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

    Γ(2n+ 1)=

    =nn(nminus 1)

    (2n)=

    (2n

    n

    )minus1

    Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

    12 Log-concavity

    Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

    The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

    (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

    Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

    ρ

    (x1 + x2

    2

    )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

    The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

    Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

    After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

    Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

    Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

    Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

    (intRρ(x1 y) dy

    )1minust

    middot(int

    Rρ(x2 y) dy

    )tunder the assumption

    ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

    Put for brevity

    f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

    and also

    F =

    intRf(y) dy G =

    intRg(y) dy H =

    intRh(y) dy

    Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

    1

    F

    int y

    minusinfinf(y) dy =

    1

    G

    int ϕ(y)

    minusinfing(y) dy

    It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

    As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

    therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

    H =

    intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

    intRh(ψ(y))

    (1minus t+

    tf(y)G

    g(ϕ(y))F

    )dy

    Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

    H ge F 1minustGt

    intR

    (f(y)G

    Fg(ϕ(y))

    )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

    G+ t

    f(y)

    F

    )dy

    and using the mean inequality(

    (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

    + tf(y)F

    )ge(f(y)F

    )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

    )1minustwe conclude

    H ge F 1minustGt

    intR

    f(y)

    Fdy = F 1minustGt

    Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

    Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

    vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

    this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

    1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

    volume we rewrite

    vol(A+B) ge 1

    (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

    The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

    If fact the inequality

    (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

    holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

    Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

    Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

    h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

    Then intRn

    h(x) ge(int

    Rn

    f(x) dx

    )1minust

    middot(int

    Rn

    g(y) dy

    )t

    Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

    Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

    Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

    Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

    (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

    Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

    A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

    Since v is arbitrary the result follows

    Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

    Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

    (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

    hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

    standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

    d log f(t) =1

    f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

    where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

    Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

    (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

    there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

    It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

    The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

    In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

    In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

    Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

    vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

    )

    is log-concave

    Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

    We have to prove the inequality

    (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

    )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

    ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

    )

    After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

    (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

    By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

    The general form of (126) is

    (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

    which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

    13 Mixed volumes

    Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

    Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

    vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

    for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

    Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

    ui(k) = log

    intK

    e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

    where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

    f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

    is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

    map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

    We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

    h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

    xisinK〈p x〉

    Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

    〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

    when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

    h(p K) = h(pK)

    Now we can calculate vol K = volK

    (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

    intRn

    det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

    Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

    Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

    Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

    MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

    It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

    It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

    P (x) =sumk

    ckxk

    where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

    N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

    Theorem 133 The system of equations

    P1(x) = 0

    P2(x) = 0

    Pn(x) = 0

    for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

    In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

    We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

    14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

    We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

    Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

    f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

    for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

    intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

    Rn

    f(x) dx middotintRn

    g(y) dy le (2π)n

    We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

    Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

    there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

    f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

    for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

    f(x) dx middotintRn

    g(y) dy le (2π)n

    Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

    Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

    f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

    Hence intRn

    f(x) dx middotintRn

    g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

    Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

    g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

    g(y)e(zy) dy

    Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

    Rn

    g(y) dy leintRn

    g(y)e(zy) dy

    which implies the required inequality

    In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

    Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

    0

    f(x) dx middotint +infin

    0

    g(y) dy le π

    2

    Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

    follows that for any s t isin R

    w

    (s+ t

    2

    )= eminuse

    s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

    radicu(s)v(t)

    Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

    0

    f(x) dx middotint +infin

    0

    g(y) dy =

    int +infin

    minusinfinu(s) ds middot

    int +infin

    minusinfinv(t) dt le

    le(int +infin

    minusinfinw(r) dr

    )2

    =

    (int +infin

    0

    eminusz22 dz

    )2

    2

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

    Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

    1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

    The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

    f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

    implies int +infin

    minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

    But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

    minusinfinf(x) dx =

    int +infin

    0

    f(x) dx = 12

    we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

    partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

    and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

    also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

    Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

    so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

    F (xprime) =

    int +infin

    0

    f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

    int +infin

    0

    g(Bxprime + ten) dt

    From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

    selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

    f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

    = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

    We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

    F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

    2eminus(xprimeyprime)

    Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

    intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

    H

    F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

    G(yprime) dyprime le π

    2(2π)nminus1

    SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

    BH+

    g(y) dy =

    intH

    G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

    Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

    g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

    and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

    g(y) dy le (2π)n

    Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

    Rn

    dist(xH)f(x) dx

    By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

    xf(x) dxminusintHminus

    xf(x) dx perp H and

    intH+

    f(x) dxminusintHminus

    f(x) dx = 0

    which is exactly what we need

    Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

    characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

    i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

    Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

    + Assume that

    h(radicx1y1

    radicxnyn) ge

    radicf(x)g(y)

    for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

    Rn+

    f(x) dx middotintRn+

    g(y) dy le

    (intRn+

    h(z) dz

    )2

    Proof Substitute

    f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

    g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

    h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

    It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

    (s+ t

    2

    ))2

    ge f(s)g(t)

    Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

    f(s) ds middotintRn

    g(t) dt le(int

    Rn

    h(r) dr

    )2

    that is equivalent to what we need

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

    Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

    minusAig(y) dy le πn

    It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

    Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

    K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

    volK middot volK le v2n

    where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

    Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

    The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

    (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

    f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

    22

    and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

    22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

    Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

    Rn

    f(x) dx =

    intRn

    int f(x)

    0

    1 dydx =

    int 1

    0

    volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

    for the constant cn =int 1

    0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

    Rn

    g(y) dy = cn volK

    It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

    (2π)n2 =

    intRn

    eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

    Hence

    volK middot volK le (2π)n

    c2n

    = v2n

    It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

    volK middot volK ge 4n

    n

    which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

    (141) volK middot volK ge πn

    n

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

    15 Needle decomposition

    Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

    The main result is the following theorem

    Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

    micro(Pi)

    micro(Rn)=

    ν(Pi)

    ν(Rn)

    and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

    A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

    Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

    The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

    Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

    Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

    The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

    appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

    There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

    16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

    Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

    2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

    intRn e

    minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

    Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

    Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

    micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

    Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

    So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

    Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

    micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

    = micro(U) = micro(H)

    The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

    ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

    It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

    Now everything reduces to the following

    Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

    and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

    ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

    The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

    primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

    into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

    (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

    2 where

    ν(U) =

    int x

    minusinfineminusπξ

    2

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

    17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

    It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

    Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

    σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

    This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

    Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

    2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

    nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

    the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

    centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

    Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

    radicn in particular the following estimate

    holds

    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

    2

    In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

    Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

    defined as follows

    U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

    volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

    Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

    with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

    volX le v cosn+1 ε

    2= v

    (1minus sin2 ε

    2

    )n+12 le veminus

    (n+1) sin2 ε2

    2

    The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

    vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

    22

    which implies

    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

    22

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

    A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

    Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

    σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

    2

    Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

    Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

    18 More remarks on isoperimetry

    There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

    First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

    ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

    where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

    M

    (ω∆ω)ν =

    intM

    |dω|2ν +

    intM

    |dlowastω|2ν

    where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

    M

    f∆fν =

    intM

    |df |2ν

    From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

    L20(M) =

    f isin L2(M)

    intM

    fν = 0

    the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

    0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

    0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

    M

    |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

    |f |2ν for all f such that

    intM

    fν = 0

    The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

    It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

    One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

    |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

    ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

    (xy)isinE

    f(x)

    The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

    Now we make the following definition

    Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

    Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

    First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

    Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

    19 Sidakrsquos lemma

    Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

    Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

    micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

    The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

    The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

    Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

    ν(A) ge micro(A)

    Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

    Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

    Rn

    f dν geintRn

    f dmicro

    Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

    f dν =

    int f(x)

    0

    intRn

    1 dνdy =

    int f(x)

    0

    ν(Cy)dy

    where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

    Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

    Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

    f(x) =

    inty(xy)isinA

    1 dτ

    is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

    Now we observe that

    ν times τ(A) =

    intRn

    f(x) dν geintRn

    f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

    by Lemma 193

    And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

    Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

    ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

    micro(S)

    is more peaked than micro

    Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

    Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

    Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

    Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

    Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

    radic2 This result was extended to lower

    values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

    Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

    2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

    one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

    Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

    ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

    This can be decoded as

    vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

    ε

    eminusπ|x|2

    dx

    where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

    asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

    be defined (following Minkowski) to be

    volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

    vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

    It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

    20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

    A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

    |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

    where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

    Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

    cradic

    nlogN

    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

    Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

    )n2eminusα|x|

    2 An easy es-

    timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

    micro(Pi) geint 1

    minus1

    radicα

    πeminusαx

    2

    dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

    eminusα

    It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

    radicnα

    By Theorem 191

    micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

    1minus 1radicπα

    eminusα)N

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

    so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

    cradic

    nlogN

    ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

    absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

    παeminusα)Nge c2

    or

    (201) N log

    (1minus 1radic

    παeminusα)ge c3

    for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

    Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

    Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

    logN middot logM ge γn

    for some absolute constant γ gt 0

    Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

    radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

    Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

    nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

    half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

    nlogN

    and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

    of radius rlowast = cradic

    1logM

    Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

    cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

    Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

    In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

    However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

    Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

    Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

    cn

    logN

    )n2vn

    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

    Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

    Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

    volK

    volKge(

    cn

    logN

    )n

    Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

    volK

    volK=

    (volK)2

    volK middot volKge (volK)2

    v2n

    ge(

    cn

    logN

    )n

    where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

    The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

    Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

    h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

    (1 + t)n= 1

    Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

    21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

    We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

    Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

    The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

    Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

    dist(xX) le δ

    In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

    Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

    δkminus1

    Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

    Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

    |X| le kvk4kminus1

    vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

    δkminus1

    here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

    vk = πk2

    Γ(k2+1)

    Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

    radic2

    Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

    2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

    radic2 such that

    the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

    has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

    So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

    2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

    Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

    E sube K suberadicnE

    Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

    radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

    E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

    Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

    1radicnle f(x) le 1

    on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

    Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

    c

    radiclog n

    n

    with some absolute constant c

    See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

    n(this is the

    DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

    Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

    C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

    σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

    128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

    128

    Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

    the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

    128 If in total

    2eminusc2ε2 logn

    128 |X| lt 1

    then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

    k16kminus1

    εkminus1eminus

    c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

    which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

    M equal 1

    x le sumxiisinX

    cixi leradic

    2 maxxiisinXxi le

    radic2(1 + ε8)

    Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

    radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

    (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

    2(1 + ε8)

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

    and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

    radic2(1 + ε8)

    For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

    22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

    It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

    Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

    where x1 xn are the points of X

    Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

    Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

    )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

    (4δ

    )kwe could rotate X

    and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

    This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

    Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

    About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

    Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

    Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

    Q = x21 + x2

    2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

    This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

    On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

    with n = k +(d+kminus1d

    ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

    by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

    d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

    Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

    is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

    (d+kminus1d

    ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

    Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

    minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

    (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

    )

    A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

    Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

    f(x) = f(minusx)

    References

    [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

    [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

    [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

    [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

    [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

    [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

    [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

    [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

    [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

    [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

    [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

    [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

    Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

    Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

    Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

    [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

    [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

    [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

    [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

    [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

    [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

    [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

    [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

    [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

    [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

    [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

    [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

    [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

    [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

    18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

    347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

    2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

    ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

    and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

    bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

    Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

    Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

    dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

    [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

    [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

    [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

    [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

    [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

    [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

    [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

    [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

    [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

    [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

    [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

    [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

    [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

    [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

    [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

    Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

    Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

    Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

    E-mail address r n karasevmailru

    URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

    • 1 Introduction
    • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
    • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
    • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
    • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
    • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
    • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
    • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
    • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
    • 10 Monotone maps
    • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
    • 12 Log-concavity
    • 13 Mixed volumes
    • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
    • 15 Needle decomposition
    • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
    • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
    • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
    • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
    • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
    • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
    • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
    • References

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 3

      Be Theorem 21 there exist a pair νminusν isin Sn with microi(H+ν ) = microi(H

      +minusν) = microi(H

      minusν ) for any i

      Since the total measure of A is 1 with respect to each microi we obtain microi(H+ν ) = microi(H

      minusν ) =

      12 for any i

      Now we are going to consider more general partitions of the space We start from thesimplest case of the line R and consider the space of univariate polynomials of degree atmost d which we denote by Pd(R) For every f isin Pd(R) it is natural to consider the sets

      H+f = x f(x) ge 0 and Hminusf = x f(x) le 0

      We claim that for any d absolute continuous probability measures micro1 microd in R thereexists a polynomial f isin Pd(R) that splits (with R = H+

      f cup Hminusf ) every measure into two

      equal halves This fact is established by considering the moment map vd1 R rarr Rd thattakes t isin R to the vector (t t2 td) The images of the measures microi are defined and itis important that they attain zero in every halfspace this follows from the fact that theoriginal microi attain zero on every finite set Now we apply the ham sandwich theorem tothese measures in Rd and obtain an equipartitioning halfspace in Rd with equation

      λ(x) ge 0

      where λ is a linear function with possible constant term The function λ(vd1) then becomesa polynomial of degree at most d in one variable A nontrivial generalization of this one-dimensional fact for splitting into a given proportion α (1minusα) is given in [SW85] in thiscase the partitioning set has to be twice more complex than in the simple case α = 12

      As an exercise the reader may try to prove another result in the line

      Theorem 32 Assume f1 fn are integrable functions on the segment [0 1] Thenthere exists another function g orthogonal to every fi that only takes values plusmn1 and hasat most n discontinuity points

      The general case of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem follows by considering the

      Veronese map vdn Rn rarr R(d+nn ) minus 1 that takes an n-tuple (x1 xn) to the set of

      all possible nonconstant monomials in xirsquos of degree at most d After counting suchmonomials we obtain

      Theorem 33 Let n and d be positive integers and r =(d+nn

      )minus 1 Then any r absolutely

      continuous measures micro1 micror in Rn may be partitioned into equal halves simultaneouslyby a partition Rn = H+

      f cupHminusf where f is a polynomial of degree at most d

      This theorem has a version for partitioning finite point sets which is frequently neededin different problems

      Theorem 34 Let n and d be positive integers and r =(d+nn

      )minus 1 Then for any r finite

      sets X1 Xr in Rn there exists a partition Rn = H+f cupH

      minusf where f is a polynomial of

      degree at most d such that |Xi capH+f | |Xi capHminusf | ge 12|Xi| for any i

      Proof Replace every point x isin Xi with a density distributed uniformly over a ball Bε(x)and sum those densities over all x isin Xi to obtain the density of the measure microi

      Then apply Theorem 33 to microi and pass to the limit εrarr +0 It is easy to see that allpossible partitioning polynomials fε may be chosen to be contained in a bounded subsetof Pd(Rn) and therefore it is possible to select a limit polynomial f that will satisfy therequirements

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 4

      4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts

      In the review of Kaplan Matousek and Sharir [KMS12] the importance of the followingcorollary of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem is emphasized

      Lemma 41 Let X be a finite set in Rn and r be a positive integer It is possible tofind a polynomial of degree at most Cnr

      1n with the following property The set Z = x f(x) = 0 partitions Rn into connected components V1 VN so that |X cap Vi| le 1r|X|for every i

      Proof We first use Theorem 34 to partition X into almost equal halves using the zero setZf1 of a linear function f1 Then we partition every part into equal halves with anotherzero set Zf2 of a function f2 which may be still chosen to be linear if n ge 2 Then we dothe same j times After that we have a collections of polynomials f1 fj and considertheir product f = f1f2 fj The zero set Zf partitions Rn into at least r = 2j connectedcomponents each containing at most 1r fraction of the set X

      It remains to bound from above the degree of f On the i-th step we partitioned 2iminus1

      sets and the required degree of the polynomials was at most (n2iminus1)1n The summationover i of this geometric progression gives the estimate

      deg f le (nr)1n

      1minus 2minus1n= Cnr

      1n

      We proved the result for r powers of two for other r we could choose 2j to be the leastpower of two not less than r

      Following [KMS12] we make several comments on this lemma Seemingly we parti-tioned the space into 2j parts but some parts could actually split into several connectedcomponent in that process So we actually do not control the number of parts The otherissue is that some points of X (and actually many of them) can lie on the set Zf and needa separate treatment in most applications

      One may consider a simpler approach that gives partition into convex parts with largerintersection with lines We may partition a measure into equal halves with a line inarbitrary direction Then we can partition both parts simultaneously into equal quartersby the ham sandwich theorem on this step the partitioning line is unique Therefore weobtain a partition into 4 equal parts such that any line intersects (essentially intersectsin the interior) at most 3 of them Iterating this procedure hierarchically in k steps wepartition a measure into N = 4k parts and it is easy to see that any line intersects at most3k = N log 3 log 4 of them This estimate is asymptotically worse than the one obtainedwith polynomial cuts but is has an advantage that the parts are convex

      When trying to generalize the above example to higher dimensions and intersectionswith hyperplanes we see that it is not trivial to find a convex equipartition of a singlemeasure so that every hyperplane does not intersect at least one of them in the interiorThe corresponding result is known as the YaondashYao theorem [YY85]

      Theorem 42 It is possible to partition an absolutely continuous finite measure in Rn

      into 2n equal convex parts so that any hyperplane does not intersect the interior of at leastone of the parts

      Sketch of the proof We are not going to make the full proof because it is quite technicaland hard to visualize we only sketch the main ideas instead

      The two-dimensional case is already proved Then we make induction on the dimensionand try to find a partition which is a twisted (in some sense) partition into coordinateorthants We select the basis e1 en and partition the measure micro into equal halves

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 5

      with a hyperplane H perpendicular to e1 Then we consider all possible unit vectors vsuch that (v e1) gt 0 and project both halves of the measure onto H along v For everyone of the halves we obtain an (nminus 1)-dimensional YaondashYao partition and it is possibleto prove by induction that it is unique once the basis e2 en in H is selected

      Then a version of the Brouwer fixed point theorem (a similar fact is Lemma 92 below)helps to prove that for some v the centers of the YaondashYao partitions for the two halvescoincide and give the new center c

      This gives the required partition because every hyperplane H prime is either parallel to Hin this case everything is clear or intersects H in an affine (nminus 2)-subspace One of therays c+ tvtgt0 and cminus tvtgt0 is not touched by H prime and we select the corresponding halfH+ or Hminus let it be H+ without loss of generality Applying the inductive assumption tothe projection of micro|H+ along v and the intersection H capH prime we find a part in H+ whoseinterior is not intersected by H prime

      To finish the proof one has to prove that the YaondashYao center c is defined uniquely bymicro and e1 en We omit these details

      Then it is easy to iterate and obtain a partition into N equal convex parts so that any

      hyperplane intersects at most Nlog(2nminus1)

      log 2n of them in interiors The polynomial partitioncan give a better result it is possible to partition a measure into N equal parts so thatany hyperplane intersects at most O(N

      nminus1n ) of them see [KMS12] for the details But for

      the polynomial partition the parts may be non-convex and even not connected so convexpartitions are still useful in some cases The reader is referred to the paper of Bukh andHubard [BH11] for an interesting application of the YaondashYao theorem

      5 The SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

      We are going to apply Lemma 41 and deduce the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem aboutthe number of incidences between points and lines We start from the definition

      Definition 51 Let P be a set of points and L be a set of lines in the plane Denote byI(PL) their incidence number that is the number of pairs (p `) isin P timesL such that p isin `

      Theorem 52 In the plane I(PL) le C(|P |23|L|23 + |P | + |L|) for a suitable absoluteconstant C

      Remark 53 This theorem is also valid for pseudolines that is subsets of the place thatbehave like lines in terms of their intersection Such a generalization so far seems to beout of reach of algebraic methods

      Proof We start from a much weaker estimate which we are going to apply to differentsets of points and lines

      Lemma 54 I(PL) le |L|+ |P |2

      This lemma is proved by splitting L into two families one for the lines intersecting atmost one point of P and all other lines The details are left to the reader

      Now we put m = |P | and n = |L| Take some parameter r whose value we will definelater We choose an algebraic set Z of degree O(

      radicr) (from now on we use the notation

      O(middot) to avoid different constants) that partitions R2 into connected sets V1 VN Let P0 = P cap Z and Pi = P cap Vi for any i Also denote by L0 the lines in L that

      lie entirely on Z and denote by Li the lines in L that intersect Vi Note that Lirsquos arenot disjoint and |L0| le degZ = O(

      radicr) The crucial fact is that every line from L L0

      intersects Z in at most O(radicr) points and intersects at most O(

      radicr) of the regions Vi

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 6

      First we obviously estimate

      I(P0 L0) le m|L0| = O(mradicr)

      sumi

      I(P0 Li) = nO(radicr) I(Pi L0) = 0

      Summing up those obvious estimates we obtain O((m+n)radicr) in total It remains to use

      Lemma 54 and boundsumi

      I(Pi Li) lesumi

      |Li|+ |Pi|2 le nO(radicr) +m2r

      Now we make several observations The projective duality allows us to interchangepoints and lines and assume m le n Then Lemma 54 allows us to concentrate on the

      caseradicn le m le n After that putting r = m43

      n23 we make all the estimates made so far to

      be of the form O(n23m23)

      An interesting application of the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem is the sum-product es-timates We quote the simplest of them due to G Elekes For a subset A of a ringput

      A+ A = a1 + a2 a1 a2 isin A A middot A = a1a2 a1 a2 isin A

      Theorem 55 For any finite subset A of R we have

      |A+ A| middot |A middot A| ge C|A|52

      for an absolute constant C

      Proof Consider the set of points in R2

      P = (b+ c ac) a b c isin A

      and the set of lines

      L = y = a(xminus b) a b isin AObviously |L| = |A|2 and every ` isin L contains at least |A| points of P with given a andb and variable c Hence

      |I(PL)| ge |A|3Now by the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

      |P | middot |L| ge C|I(PL)|32rArr |P | middot |A|2 ge C|A|92

      and therefore |P | ge C|A|52 But P sube (A + A) times A middot A and we obtain the requiredinequality

      Theorem 55 implies that at least one of the cardinalities |A + A| or |A middot A| is at leastradicC|A|54 The exponent 54 can be slightly improved through a more careful counting

      see the details in [TaoVu10 Section 83] Actually P Erdos and E Szemeredi conjecturedthat it is possible to replace 54 with 2minus ε with arbitrarily small positive ε this remainsan open problem

      6 Spanning trees with low crossing number

      Sometimes it is important to estimate the number of parts for the partition in Lemma 41In order to do this we pass to the projective space and prove

      Lemma 61 A hypersurface Z sub RP n of degree d partitions RP n into at most dn con-nected components

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

      Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

      By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

      partfpartx1

      (x) = 0

      partfpartxn

      (x) = 0

      These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

      Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

      For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

      components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

      For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

      (degZminus1

      2

      )+1 by the

      Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

      (degZminus1

      2

      )

      Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

      Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

      radic|P |

      points

      Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

      Now we prove the following

      Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

      and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

      The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

      algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

      radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

      C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

      number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

      |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

      with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

      obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

      radic|P | so it is bounded

      by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

      The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

      7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

      Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

      Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

      sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

      Now we can prove

      Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

      Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

      (nd+1

      )polynomials of degree d each we denote

      the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

      )and

      nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

      distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

      d

      (n

      d+ 1

      ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

      dnd22

      such connected components and order types

      The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

      In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

      8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

      A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

      Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

      Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

      A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

      Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

      ⋃iF

      Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

      product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

      Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

      middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

      Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

      ⋃iF

      Now we prove

      Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

      Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

      Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

      Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

      It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

      Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

      Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

      Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

      Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

      V =

      a0 +

      kminus1sumj=1

      (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

      We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

      We have a natural map

      I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

      As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

      Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

      Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

      The system of 2k minus 2 equations

      g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

      has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

      pisinP

      g(p)f(p) gt 0

      that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

      Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

      Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

      ⋃iF

      The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

      Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

      More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

      Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

      bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

      therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

      to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

      involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

      For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

      9 Partition into prescribed parts

      Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

      Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

      Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

      The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

      Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

      In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

      Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

      Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

      y ge λ1(x) + w1

      y ge λm(x) + wm

      We are going to establish the following fact

      Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

      micro(Ri) = αi

      Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

      Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

      Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

      Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

      0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

      we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

      Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

      It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

      Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

      Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

      Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

      If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

      f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

      which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

      first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

      Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

      Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

      ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

      Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

      10 Monotone maps

      Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

      u(x) = sup1leilem

      (λi(x) + wi)

      has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

      Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

      Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

      there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

      The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

      From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

      (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

      for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

      Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

      C(f) =

      intRn

      〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

      Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

      V

      u dmicro+

      intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

      In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

      u(k) = log

      intK

      e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

      It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

      volK =

      intV lowast

      detDf dk

      This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

      11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

      An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

      Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

      of finite volume each then

      vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

      where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

      Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

      Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

      vol(A+B) geintA

      detDg dx =

      intA

      det(id +Df(x)) dx

      Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

      det(id +Df(x)) ge

      (1 +

      (VBVA

      )1n)n

      and therefore

      vol(A+B) ge

      (1 +

      (VBVA

      )1n)n

      VA =(V

      1nA + V

      1nB

      )n

      which is what we need

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

      The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

      volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

      vol(A+Bh)minus volA

      h

      where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

      Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

      volnminus1(partA)

      snge(

      volA

      vn

      )nminus1n

      Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

      vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

      and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

      nminus1n v1n

      n

      Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

      volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

      (volA)nminus1n v1n

      n

      which is equivalent to the required inequality

      Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

      For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

      Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

      Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

      Proof Observe that

      A capB supe 1

      2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

      then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

      Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

      vol(Aminus A) le(

      2n

      n

      )volA

      Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

      When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

      A cap(A+

      1

      2(x1 + x2)

      )supe 1

      2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

      Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

      vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

      Now integrate this over x to obtain

      vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

      intAminusA

      vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

      ge volA middotintAminusA

      (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

      int (1minusx)n

      0

      1 dy dx =

      = volA middotint 1

      0

      intxle1minusy1n

      1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

      0

      (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

      = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

      0

      (1minus y1n)n dy

      Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

      0

      (1minus y1n)n dy =

      int 1

      0

      (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

      Γ(2n+ 1)=

      =nn(nminus 1)

      (2n)=

      (2n

      n

      )minus1

      Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

      12 Log-concavity

      Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

      The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

      (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

      Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

      ρ

      (x1 + x2

      2

      )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

      The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

      Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

      After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

      Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

      Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

      Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

      (intRρ(x1 y) dy

      )1minust

      middot(int

      Rρ(x2 y) dy

      )tunder the assumption

      ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

      Put for brevity

      f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

      and also

      F =

      intRf(y) dy G =

      intRg(y) dy H =

      intRh(y) dy

      Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

      1

      F

      int y

      minusinfinf(y) dy =

      1

      G

      int ϕ(y)

      minusinfing(y) dy

      It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

      As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

      therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

      H =

      intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

      intRh(ψ(y))

      (1minus t+

      tf(y)G

      g(ϕ(y))F

      )dy

      Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

      H ge F 1minustGt

      intR

      (f(y)G

      Fg(ϕ(y))

      )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

      G+ t

      f(y)

      F

      )dy

      and using the mean inequality(

      (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

      + tf(y)F

      )ge(f(y)F

      )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

      )1minustwe conclude

      H ge F 1minustGt

      intR

      f(y)

      Fdy = F 1minustGt

      Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

      Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

      vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

      this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

      1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

      volume we rewrite

      vol(A+B) ge 1

      (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

      The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

      If fact the inequality

      (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

      holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

      Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

      Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

      h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

      Then intRn

      h(x) ge(int

      Rn

      f(x) dx

      )1minust

      middot(int

      Rn

      g(y) dy

      )t

      Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

      Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

      Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

      Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

      (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

      Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

      A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

      Since v is arbitrary the result follows

      Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

      Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

      (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

      hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

      standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

      d log f(t) =1

      f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

      where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

      Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

      (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

      there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

      It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

      The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

      In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

      In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

      Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

      vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

      )

      is log-concave

      Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

      We have to prove the inequality

      (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

      )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

      ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

      )

      After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

      (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

      By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

      The general form of (126) is

      (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

      which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

      13 Mixed volumes

      Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

      Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

      vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

      for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

      Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

      ui(k) = log

      intK

      e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

      where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

      f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

      is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

      map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

      We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

      h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

      xisinK〈p x〉

      Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

      〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

      when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

      h(p K) = h(pK)

      Now we can calculate vol K = volK

      (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

      intRn

      det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

      Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

      Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

      Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

      MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

      It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

      It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

      P (x) =sumk

      ckxk

      where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

      N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

      Theorem 133 The system of equations

      P1(x) = 0

      P2(x) = 0

      Pn(x) = 0

      for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

      In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

      We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

      14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

      We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

      Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

      f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

      for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

      intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

      Rn

      f(x) dx middotintRn

      g(y) dy le (2π)n

      We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

      Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

      there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

      f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

      for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

      f(x) dx middotintRn

      g(y) dy le (2π)n

      Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

      Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

      f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

      Hence intRn

      f(x) dx middotintRn

      g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

      Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

      g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

      g(y)e(zy) dy

      Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

      Rn

      g(y) dy leintRn

      g(y)e(zy) dy

      which implies the required inequality

      In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

      Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

      0

      f(x) dx middotint +infin

      0

      g(y) dy le π

      2

      Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

      follows that for any s t isin R

      w

      (s+ t

      2

      )= eminuse

      s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

      radicu(s)v(t)

      Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

      0

      f(x) dx middotint +infin

      0

      g(y) dy =

      int +infin

      minusinfinu(s) ds middot

      int +infin

      minusinfinv(t) dt le

      le(int +infin

      minusinfinw(r) dr

      )2

      =

      (int +infin

      0

      eminusz22 dz

      )2

      2

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

      Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

      1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

      The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

      f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

      implies int +infin

      minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

      But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

      minusinfinf(x) dx =

      int +infin

      0

      f(x) dx = 12

      we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

      partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

      and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

      also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

      Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

      so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

      F (xprime) =

      int +infin

      0

      f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

      int +infin

      0

      g(Bxprime + ten) dt

      From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

      selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

      f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

      = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

      We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

      F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

      2eminus(xprimeyprime)

      Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

      intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

      H

      F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

      G(yprime) dyprime le π

      2(2π)nminus1

      SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

      BH+

      g(y) dy =

      intH

      G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

      Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

      g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

      and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

      g(y) dy le (2π)n

      Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

      Rn

      dist(xH)f(x) dx

      By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

      xf(x) dxminusintHminus

      xf(x) dx perp H and

      intH+

      f(x) dxminusintHminus

      f(x) dx = 0

      which is exactly what we need

      Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

      characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

      i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

      Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

      + Assume that

      h(radicx1y1

      radicxnyn) ge

      radicf(x)g(y)

      for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

      Rn+

      f(x) dx middotintRn+

      g(y) dy le

      (intRn+

      h(z) dz

      )2

      Proof Substitute

      f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

      g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

      h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

      It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

      (s+ t

      2

      ))2

      ge f(s)g(t)

      Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

      f(s) ds middotintRn

      g(t) dt le(int

      Rn

      h(r) dr

      )2

      that is equivalent to what we need

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

      Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

      minusAig(y) dy le πn

      It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

      Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

      K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

      volK middot volK le v2n

      where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

      Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

      The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

      (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

      f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

      22

      and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

      22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

      Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

      Rn

      f(x) dx =

      intRn

      int f(x)

      0

      1 dydx =

      int 1

      0

      volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

      for the constant cn =int 1

      0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

      Rn

      g(y) dy = cn volK

      It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

      (2π)n2 =

      intRn

      eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

      Hence

      volK middot volK le (2π)n

      c2n

      = v2n

      It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

      volK middot volK ge 4n

      n

      which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

      (141) volK middot volK ge πn

      n

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

      15 Needle decomposition

      Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

      The main result is the following theorem

      Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

      micro(Pi)

      micro(Rn)=

      ν(Pi)

      ν(Rn)

      and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

      A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

      Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

      The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

      Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

      Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

      The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

      appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

      There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

      16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

      Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

      2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

      intRn e

      minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

      Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

      Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

      micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

      Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

      So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

      Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

      micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

      = micro(U) = micro(H)

      The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

      ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

      It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

      Now everything reduces to the following

      Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

      and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

      ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

      The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

      primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

      into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

      (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

      2 where

      ν(U) =

      int x

      minusinfineminusπξ

      2

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

      17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

      It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

      Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

      σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

      This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

      Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

      2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

      nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

      the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

      centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

      Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

      radicn in particular the following estimate

      holds

      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

      2

      In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

      Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

      defined as follows

      U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

      volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

      Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

      with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

      volX le v cosn+1 ε

      2= v

      (1minus sin2 ε

      2

      )n+12 le veminus

      (n+1) sin2 ε2

      2

      The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

      vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

      22

      which implies

      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

      22

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

      A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

      Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

      σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

      2

      Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

      Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

      18 More remarks on isoperimetry

      There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

      First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

      ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

      where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

      M

      (ω∆ω)ν =

      intM

      |dω|2ν +

      intM

      |dlowastω|2ν

      where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

      M

      f∆fν =

      intM

      |df |2ν

      From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

      L20(M) =

      f isin L2(M)

      intM

      fν = 0

      the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

      0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

      0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

      M

      |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

      |f |2ν for all f such that

      intM

      fν = 0

      The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

      It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

      One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

      |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

      ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

      (xy)isinE

      f(x)

      The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

      Now we make the following definition

      Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

      Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

      First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

      Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

      19 Sidakrsquos lemma

      Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

      Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

      micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

      The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

      The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

      Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

      ν(A) ge micro(A)

      Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

      Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

      Rn

      f dν geintRn

      f dmicro

      Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

      f dν =

      int f(x)

      0

      intRn

      1 dνdy =

      int f(x)

      0

      ν(Cy)dy

      where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

      Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

      Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

      f(x) =

      inty(xy)isinA

      1 dτ

      is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

      Now we observe that

      ν times τ(A) =

      intRn

      f(x) dν geintRn

      f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

      by Lemma 193

      And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

      Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

      ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

      micro(S)

      is more peaked than micro

      Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

      Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

      Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

      Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

      Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

      radic2 This result was extended to lower

      values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

      Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

      2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

      one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

      Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

      ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

      This can be decoded as

      vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

      ε

      eminusπ|x|2

      dx

      where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

      asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

      be defined (following Minkowski) to be

      volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

      vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

      It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

      20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

      A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

      |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

      where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

      Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

      cradic

      nlogN

      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

      Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

      )n2eminusα|x|

      2 An easy es-

      timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

      micro(Pi) geint 1

      minus1

      radicα

      πeminusαx

      2

      dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

      eminusα

      It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

      radicnα

      By Theorem 191

      micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

      1minus 1radicπα

      eminusα)N

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

      so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

      cradic

      nlogN

      ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

      absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

      παeminusα)Nge c2

      or

      (201) N log

      (1minus 1radic

      παeminusα)ge c3

      for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

      Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

      Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

      logN middot logM ge γn

      for some absolute constant γ gt 0

      Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

      radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

      Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

      nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

      half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

      nlogN

      and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

      of radius rlowast = cradic

      1logM

      Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

      cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

      Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

      In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

      However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

      Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

      Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

      cn

      logN

      )n2vn

      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

      Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

      Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

      volK

      volKge(

      cn

      logN

      )n

      Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

      volK

      volK=

      (volK)2

      volK middot volKge (volK)2

      v2n

      ge(

      cn

      logN

      )n

      where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

      The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

      Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

      h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

      (1 + t)n= 1

      Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

      21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

      We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

      Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

      The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

      Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

      dist(xX) le δ

      In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

      Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

      δkminus1

      Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

      Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

      |X| le kvk4kminus1

      vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

      δkminus1

      here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

      vk = πk2

      Γ(k2+1)

      Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

      radic2

      Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

      2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

      radic2 such that

      the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

      has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

      So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

      2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

      Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

      E sube K suberadicnE

      Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

      radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

      E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

      Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

      1radicnle f(x) le 1

      on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

      Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

      c

      radiclog n

      n

      with some absolute constant c

      See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

      n(this is the

      DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

      Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

      C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

      σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

      128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

      128

      Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

      the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

      128 If in total

      2eminusc2ε2 logn

      128 |X| lt 1

      then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

      k16kminus1

      εkminus1eminus

      c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

      which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

      M equal 1

      x le sumxiisinX

      cixi leradic

      2 maxxiisinXxi le

      radic2(1 + ε8)

      Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

      radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

      (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

      2(1 + ε8)

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

      and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

      radic2(1 + ε8)

      For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

      22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

      It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

      Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

      where x1 xn are the points of X

      Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

      Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

      )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

      (4δ

      )kwe could rotate X

      and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

      This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

      Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

      About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

      Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

      Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

      Q = x21 + x2

      2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

      This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

      On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

      with n = k +(d+kminus1d

      ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

      by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

      d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

      Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

      is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

      (d+kminus1d

      ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

      Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

      minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

      (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

      )

      A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

      Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

      f(x) = f(minusx)

      References

      [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

      [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

      [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

      [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

      [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

      [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

      [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

      [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

      [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

      [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

      [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

      [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

      Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

      Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

      Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

      [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

      [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

      [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

      [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

      [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

      [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

      [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

      [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

      [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

      [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

      [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

      [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

      [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

      [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

      18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

      347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

      2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

      ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

      and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

      bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

      Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

      Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

      dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

      [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

      [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

      [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

      [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

      [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

      [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

      [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

      [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

      [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

      [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

      [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

      [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

      [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

      [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

      [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

      Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

      Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

      Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

      E-mail address r n karasevmailru

      URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

      • 1 Introduction
      • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
      • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
      • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
      • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
      • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
      • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
      • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
      • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
      • 10 Monotone maps
      • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
      • 12 Log-concavity
      • 13 Mixed volumes
      • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
      • 15 Needle decomposition
      • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
      • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
      • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
      • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
      • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
      • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
      • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
      • References

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 4

        4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts

        In the review of Kaplan Matousek and Sharir [KMS12] the importance of the followingcorollary of the polynomial ham sandwich theorem is emphasized

        Lemma 41 Let X be a finite set in Rn and r be a positive integer It is possible tofind a polynomial of degree at most Cnr

        1n with the following property The set Z = x f(x) = 0 partitions Rn into connected components V1 VN so that |X cap Vi| le 1r|X|for every i

        Proof We first use Theorem 34 to partition X into almost equal halves using the zero setZf1 of a linear function f1 Then we partition every part into equal halves with anotherzero set Zf2 of a function f2 which may be still chosen to be linear if n ge 2 Then we dothe same j times After that we have a collections of polynomials f1 fj and considertheir product f = f1f2 fj The zero set Zf partitions Rn into at least r = 2j connectedcomponents each containing at most 1r fraction of the set X

        It remains to bound from above the degree of f On the i-th step we partitioned 2iminus1

        sets and the required degree of the polynomials was at most (n2iminus1)1n The summationover i of this geometric progression gives the estimate

        deg f le (nr)1n

        1minus 2minus1n= Cnr

        1n

        We proved the result for r powers of two for other r we could choose 2j to be the leastpower of two not less than r

        Following [KMS12] we make several comments on this lemma Seemingly we parti-tioned the space into 2j parts but some parts could actually split into several connectedcomponent in that process So we actually do not control the number of parts The otherissue is that some points of X (and actually many of them) can lie on the set Zf and needa separate treatment in most applications

        One may consider a simpler approach that gives partition into convex parts with largerintersection with lines We may partition a measure into equal halves with a line inarbitrary direction Then we can partition both parts simultaneously into equal quartersby the ham sandwich theorem on this step the partitioning line is unique Therefore weobtain a partition into 4 equal parts such that any line intersects (essentially intersectsin the interior) at most 3 of them Iterating this procedure hierarchically in k steps wepartition a measure into N = 4k parts and it is easy to see that any line intersects at most3k = N log 3 log 4 of them This estimate is asymptotically worse than the one obtainedwith polynomial cuts but is has an advantage that the parts are convex

        When trying to generalize the above example to higher dimensions and intersectionswith hyperplanes we see that it is not trivial to find a convex equipartition of a singlemeasure so that every hyperplane does not intersect at least one of them in the interiorThe corresponding result is known as the YaondashYao theorem [YY85]

        Theorem 42 It is possible to partition an absolutely continuous finite measure in Rn

        into 2n equal convex parts so that any hyperplane does not intersect the interior of at leastone of the parts

        Sketch of the proof We are not going to make the full proof because it is quite technicaland hard to visualize we only sketch the main ideas instead

        The two-dimensional case is already proved Then we make induction on the dimensionand try to find a partition which is a twisted (in some sense) partition into coordinateorthants We select the basis e1 en and partition the measure micro into equal halves

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 5

        with a hyperplane H perpendicular to e1 Then we consider all possible unit vectors vsuch that (v e1) gt 0 and project both halves of the measure onto H along v For everyone of the halves we obtain an (nminus 1)-dimensional YaondashYao partition and it is possibleto prove by induction that it is unique once the basis e2 en in H is selected

        Then a version of the Brouwer fixed point theorem (a similar fact is Lemma 92 below)helps to prove that for some v the centers of the YaondashYao partitions for the two halvescoincide and give the new center c

        This gives the required partition because every hyperplane H prime is either parallel to Hin this case everything is clear or intersects H in an affine (nminus 2)-subspace One of therays c+ tvtgt0 and cminus tvtgt0 is not touched by H prime and we select the corresponding halfH+ or Hminus let it be H+ without loss of generality Applying the inductive assumption tothe projection of micro|H+ along v and the intersection H capH prime we find a part in H+ whoseinterior is not intersected by H prime

        To finish the proof one has to prove that the YaondashYao center c is defined uniquely bymicro and e1 en We omit these details

        Then it is easy to iterate and obtain a partition into N equal convex parts so that any

        hyperplane intersects at most Nlog(2nminus1)

        log 2n of them in interiors The polynomial partitioncan give a better result it is possible to partition a measure into N equal parts so thatany hyperplane intersects at most O(N

        nminus1n ) of them see [KMS12] for the details But for

        the polynomial partition the parts may be non-convex and even not connected so convexpartitions are still useful in some cases The reader is referred to the paper of Bukh andHubard [BH11] for an interesting application of the YaondashYao theorem

        5 The SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

        We are going to apply Lemma 41 and deduce the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem aboutthe number of incidences between points and lines We start from the definition

        Definition 51 Let P be a set of points and L be a set of lines in the plane Denote byI(PL) their incidence number that is the number of pairs (p `) isin P timesL such that p isin `

        Theorem 52 In the plane I(PL) le C(|P |23|L|23 + |P | + |L|) for a suitable absoluteconstant C

        Remark 53 This theorem is also valid for pseudolines that is subsets of the place thatbehave like lines in terms of their intersection Such a generalization so far seems to beout of reach of algebraic methods

        Proof We start from a much weaker estimate which we are going to apply to differentsets of points and lines

        Lemma 54 I(PL) le |L|+ |P |2

        This lemma is proved by splitting L into two families one for the lines intersecting atmost one point of P and all other lines The details are left to the reader

        Now we put m = |P | and n = |L| Take some parameter r whose value we will definelater We choose an algebraic set Z of degree O(

        radicr) (from now on we use the notation

        O(middot) to avoid different constants) that partitions R2 into connected sets V1 VN Let P0 = P cap Z and Pi = P cap Vi for any i Also denote by L0 the lines in L that

        lie entirely on Z and denote by Li the lines in L that intersect Vi Note that Lirsquos arenot disjoint and |L0| le degZ = O(

        radicr) The crucial fact is that every line from L L0

        intersects Z in at most O(radicr) points and intersects at most O(

        radicr) of the regions Vi

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 6

        First we obviously estimate

        I(P0 L0) le m|L0| = O(mradicr)

        sumi

        I(P0 Li) = nO(radicr) I(Pi L0) = 0

        Summing up those obvious estimates we obtain O((m+n)radicr) in total It remains to use

        Lemma 54 and boundsumi

        I(Pi Li) lesumi

        |Li|+ |Pi|2 le nO(radicr) +m2r

        Now we make several observations The projective duality allows us to interchangepoints and lines and assume m le n Then Lemma 54 allows us to concentrate on the

        caseradicn le m le n After that putting r = m43

        n23 we make all the estimates made so far to

        be of the form O(n23m23)

        An interesting application of the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem is the sum-product es-timates We quote the simplest of them due to G Elekes For a subset A of a ringput

        A+ A = a1 + a2 a1 a2 isin A A middot A = a1a2 a1 a2 isin A

        Theorem 55 For any finite subset A of R we have

        |A+ A| middot |A middot A| ge C|A|52

        for an absolute constant C

        Proof Consider the set of points in R2

        P = (b+ c ac) a b c isin A

        and the set of lines

        L = y = a(xminus b) a b isin AObviously |L| = |A|2 and every ` isin L contains at least |A| points of P with given a andb and variable c Hence

        |I(PL)| ge |A|3Now by the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

        |P | middot |L| ge C|I(PL)|32rArr |P | middot |A|2 ge C|A|92

        and therefore |P | ge C|A|52 But P sube (A + A) times A middot A and we obtain the requiredinequality

        Theorem 55 implies that at least one of the cardinalities |A + A| or |A middot A| is at leastradicC|A|54 The exponent 54 can be slightly improved through a more careful counting

        see the details in [TaoVu10 Section 83] Actually P Erdos and E Szemeredi conjecturedthat it is possible to replace 54 with 2minus ε with arbitrarily small positive ε this remainsan open problem

        6 Spanning trees with low crossing number

        Sometimes it is important to estimate the number of parts for the partition in Lemma 41In order to do this we pass to the projective space and prove

        Lemma 61 A hypersurface Z sub RP n of degree d partitions RP n into at most dn con-nected components

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

        Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

        By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

        partfpartx1

        (x) = 0

        partfpartxn

        (x) = 0

        These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

        Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

        For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

        components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

        For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

        (degZminus1

        2

        )+1 by the

        Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

        (degZminus1

        2

        )

        Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

        Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

        radic|P |

        points

        Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

        Now we prove the following

        Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

        and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

        The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

        algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

        radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

        C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

        number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

        |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

        with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

        obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

        radic|P | so it is bounded

        by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

        The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

        7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

        Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

        Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

        sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

        Now we can prove

        Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

        Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

        (nd+1

        )polynomials of degree d each we denote

        the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

        )and

        nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

        distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

        d

        (n

        d+ 1

        ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

        dnd22

        such connected components and order types

        The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

        In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

        8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

        A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

        Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

        Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

        A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

        Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

        ⋃iF

        Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

        product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

        Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

        middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

        Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

        ⋃iF

        Now we prove

        Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

        Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

        Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

        Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

        It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

        Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

        Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

        Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

        Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

        V =

        a0 +

        kminus1sumj=1

        (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

        We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

        We have a natural map

        I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

        As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

        Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

        Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

        The system of 2k minus 2 equations

        g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

        has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

        pisinP

        g(p)f(p) gt 0

        that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

        Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

        Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

        ⋃iF

        The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

        Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

        More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

        Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

        bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

        therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

        to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

        involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

        For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

        9 Partition into prescribed parts

        Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

        Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

        Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

        The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

        Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

        In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

        Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

        Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

        y ge λ1(x) + w1

        y ge λm(x) + wm

        We are going to establish the following fact

        Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

        micro(Ri) = αi

        Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

        Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

        Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

        Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

        0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

        we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

        Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

        It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

        Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

        Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

        Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

        If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

        f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

        which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

        first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

        Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

        Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

        ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

        Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

        10 Monotone maps

        Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

        u(x) = sup1leilem

        (λi(x) + wi)

        has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

        Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

        Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

        there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

        The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

        From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

        (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

        for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

        Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

        C(f) =

        intRn

        〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

        Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

        V

        u dmicro+

        intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

        In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

        u(k) = log

        intK

        e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

        It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

        volK =

        intV lowast

        detDf dk

        This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

        11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

        An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

        Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

        of finite volume each then

        vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

        where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

        Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

        Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

        vol(A+B) geintA

        detDg dx =

        intA

        det(id +Df(x)) dx

        Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

        det(id +Df(x)) ge

        (1 +

        (VBVA

        )1n)n

        and therefore

        vol(A+B) ge

        (1 +

        (VBVA

        )1n)n

        VA =(V

        1nA + V

        1nB

        )n

        which is what we need

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

        The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

        volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

        vol(A+Bh)minus volA

        h

        where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

        Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

        volnminus1(partA)

        snge(

        volA

        vn

        )nminus1n

        Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

        vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

        and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

        nminus1n v1n

        n

        Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

        volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

        (volA)nminus1n v1n

        n

        which is equivalent to the required inequality

        Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

        For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

        Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

        Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

        Proof Observe that

        A capB supe 1

        2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

        then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

        Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

        vol(Aminus A) le(

        2n

        n

        )volA

        Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

        When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

        A cap(A+

        1

        2(x1 + x2)

        )supe 1

        2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

        Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

        vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

        Now integrate this over x to obtain

        vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

        intAminusA

        vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

        ge volA middotintAminusA

        (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

        int (1minusx)n

        0

        1 dy dx =

        = volA middotint 1

        0

        intxle1minusy1n

        1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

        0

        (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

        = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

        0

        (1minus y1n)n dy

        Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

        0

        (1minus y1n)n dy =

        int 1

        0

        (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

        Γ(2n+ 1)=

        =nn(nminus 1)

        (2n)=

        (2n

        n

        )minus1

        Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

        12 Log-concavity

        Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

        The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

        (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

        Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

        ρ

        (x1 + x2

        2

        )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

        The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

        Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

        After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

        Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

        Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

        Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

        (intRρ(x1 y) dy

        )1minust

        middot(int

        Rρ(x2 y) dy

        )tunder the assumption

        ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

        Put for brevity

        f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

        and also

        F =

        intRf(y) dy G =

        intRg(y) dy H =

        intRh(y) dy

        Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

        1

        F

        int y

        minusinfinf(y) dy =

        1

        G

        int ϕ(y)

        minusinfing(y) dy

        It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

        As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

        therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

        H =

        intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

        intRh(ψ(y))

        (1minus t+

        tf(y)G

        g(ϕ(y))F

        )dy

        Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

        H ge F 1minustGt

        intR

        (f(y)G

        Fg(ϕ(y))

        )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

        G+ t

        f(y)

        F

        )dy

        and using the mean inequality(

        (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

        + tf(y)F

        )ge(f(y)F

        )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

        )1minustwe conclude

        H ge F 1minustGt

        intR

        f(y)

        Fdy = F 1minustGt

        Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

        Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

        vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

        this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

        1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

        volume we rewrite

        vol(A+B) ge 1

        (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

        The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

        If fact the inequality

        (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

        holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

        Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

        Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

        h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

        Then intRn

        h(x) ge(int

        Rn

        f(x) dx

        )1minust

        middot(int

        Rn

        g(y) dy

        )t

        Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

        Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

        Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

        Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

        (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

        Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

        A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

        Since v is arbitrary the result follows

        Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

        Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

        (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

        hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

        standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

        d log f(t) =1

        f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

        where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

        Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

        (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

        there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

        It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

        The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

        In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

        In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

        Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

        vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

        )

        is log-concave

        Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

        We have to prove the inequality

        (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

        )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

        ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

        )

        After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

        (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

        By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

        The general form of (126) is

        (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

        which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

        13 Mixed volumes

        Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

        Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

        vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

        for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

        Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

        ui(k) = log

        intK

        e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

        where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

        f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

        is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

        map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

        We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

        h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

        xisinK〈p x〉

        Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

        〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

        when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

        h(p K) = h(pK)

        Now we can calculate vol K = volK

        (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

        intRn

        det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

        Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

        Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

        Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

        MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

        It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

        It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

        P (x) =sumk

        ckxk

        where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

        N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

        Theorem 133 The system of equations

        P1(x) = 0

        P2(x) = 0

        Pn(x) = 0

        for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

        In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

        We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

        14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

        We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

        Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

        f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

        for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

        intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

        Rn

        f(x) dx middotintRn

        g(y) dy le (2π)n

        We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

        Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

        there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

        f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

        for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

        f(x) dx middotintRn

        g(y) dy le (2π)n

        Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

        Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

        f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

        Hence intRn

        f(x) dx middotintRn

        g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

        Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

        g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

        g(y)e(zy) dy

        Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

        Rn

        g(y) dy leintRn

        g(y)e(zy) dy

        which implies the required inequality

        In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

        Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

        0

        f(x) dx middotint +infin

        0

        g(y) dy le π

        2

        Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

        follows that for any s t isin R

        w

        (s+ t

        2

        )= eminuse

        s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

        radicu(s)v(t)

        Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

        0

        f(x) dx middotint +infin

        0

        g(y) dy =

        int +infin

        minusinfinu(s) ds middot

        int +infin

        minusinfinv(t) dt le

        le(int +infin

        minusinfinw(r) dr

        )2

        =

        (int +infin

        0

        eminusz22 dz

        )2

        2

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

        Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

        1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

        The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

        f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

        implies int +infin

        minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

        But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

        minusinfinf(x) dx =

        int +infin

        0

        f(x) dx = 12

        we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

        partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

        and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

        also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

        Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

        so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

        F (xprime) =

        int +infin

        0

        f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

        int +infin

        0

        g(Bxprime + ten) dt

        From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

        selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

        f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

        = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

        We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

        F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

        2eminus(xprimeyprime)

        Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

        intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

        H

        F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

        G(yprime) dyprime le π

        2(2π)nminus1

        SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

        BH+

        g(y) dy =

        intH

        G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

        Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

        g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

        and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

        g(y) dy le (2π)n

        Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

        Rn

        dist(xH)f(x) dx

        By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

        xf(x) dxminusintHminus

        xf(x) dx perp H and

        intH+

        f(x) dxminusintHminus

        f(x) dx = 0

        which is exactly what we need

        Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

        characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

        i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

        Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

        + Assume that

        h(radicx1y1

        radicxnyn) ge

        radicf(x)g(y)

        for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

        Rn+

        f(x) dx middotintRn+

        g(y) dy le

        (intRn+

        h(z) dz

        )2

        Proof Substitute

        f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

        g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

        h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

        It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

        (s+ t

        2

        ))2

        ge f(s)g(t)

        Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

        f(s) ds middotintRn

        g(t) dt le(int

        Rn

        h(r) dr

        )2

        that is equivalent to what we need

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

        Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

        minusAig(y) dy le πn

        It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

        Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

        K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

        volK middot volK le v2n

        where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

        Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

        The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

        (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

        f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

        22

        and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

        22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

        Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

        Rn

        f(x) dx =

        intRn

        int f(x)

        0

        1 dydx =

        int 1

        0

        volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

        for the constant cn =int 1

        0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

        Rn

        g(y) dy = cn volK

        It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

        (2π)n2 =

        intRn

        eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

        Hence

        volK middot volK le (2π)n

        c2n

        = v2n

        It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

        volK middot volK ge 4n

        n

        which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

        (141) volK middot volK ge πn

        n

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

        15 Needle decomposition

        Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

        The main result is the following theorem

        Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

        micro(Pi)

        micro(Rn)=

        ν(Pi)

        ν(Rn)

        and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

        A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

        Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

        The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

        Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

        Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

        The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

        appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

        There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

        16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

        Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

        2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

        intRn e

        minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

        Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

        Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

        micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

        Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

        So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

        Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

        micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

        = micro(U) = micro(H)

        The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

        ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

        It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

        Now everything reduces to the following

        Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

        and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

        ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

        The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

        primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

        into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

        (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

        2 where

        ν(U) =

        int x

        minusinfineminusπξ

        2

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

        17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

        It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

        Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

        σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

        This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

        Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

        2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

        nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

        the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

        centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

        Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

        radicn in particular the following estimate

        holds

        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

        2

        In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

        Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

        defined as follows

        U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

        volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

        Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

        with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

        volX le v cosn+1 ε

        2= v

        (1minus sin2 ε

        2

        )n+12 le veminus

        (n+1) sin2 ε2

        2

        The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

        vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

        22

        which implies

        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

        22

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

        A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

        Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

        σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

        2

        Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

        Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

        18 More remarks on isoperimetry

        There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

        First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

        ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

        where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

        M

        (ω∆ω)ν =

        intM

        |dω|2ν +

        intM

        |dlowastω|2ν

        where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

        M

        f∆fν =

        intM

        |df |2ν

        From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

        L20(M) =

        f isin L2(M)

        intM

        fν = 0

        the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

        0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

        0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

        M

        |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

        |f |2ν for all f such that

        intM

        fν = 0

        The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

        It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

        One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

        |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

        ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

        (xy)isinE

        f(x)

        The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

        Now we make the following definition

        Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

        Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

        First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

        Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

        19 Sidakrsquos lemma

        Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

        Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

        micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

        The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

        The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

        Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

        ν(A) ge micro(A)

        Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

        Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

        Rn

        f dν geintRn

        f dmicro

        Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

        f dν =

        int f(x)

        0

        intRn

        1 dνdy =

        int f(x)

        0

        ν(Cy)dy

        where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

        Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

        Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

        f(x) =

        inty(xy)isinA

        1 dτ

        is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

        Now we observe that

        ν times τ(A) =

        intRn

        f(x) dν geintRn

        f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

        by Lemma 193

        And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

        Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

        ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

        micro(S)

        is more peaked than micro

        Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

        Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

        Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

        Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

        Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

        radic2 This result was extended to lower

        values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

        Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

        2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

        one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

        Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

        ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

        This can be decoded as

        vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

        ε

        eminusπ|x|2

        dx

        where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

        asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

        be defined (following Minkowski) to be

        volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

        vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

        It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

        20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

        A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

        |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

        where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

        Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

        cradic

        nlogN

        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

        Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

        )n2eminusα|x|

        2 An easy es-

        timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

        micro(Pi) geint 1

        minus1

        radicα

        πeminusαx

        2

        dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

        eminusα

        It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

        radicnα

        By Theorem 191

        micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

        1minus 1radicπα

        eminusα)N

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

        so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

        cradic

        nlogN

        ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

        absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

        παeminusα)Nge c2

        or

        (201) N log

        (1minus 1radic

        παeminusα)ge c3

        for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

        Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

        Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

        logN middot logM ge γn

        for some absolute constant γ gt 0

        Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

        radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

        Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

        nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

        half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

        nlogN

        and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

        of radius rlowast = cradic

        1logM

        Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

        cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

        Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

        In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

        However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

        Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

        Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

        cn

        logN

        )n2vn

        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

        Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

        Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

        volK

        volKge(

        cn

        logN

        )n

        Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

        volK

        volK=

        (volK)2

        volK middot volKge (volK)2

        v2n

        ge(

        cn

        logN

        )n

        where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

        The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

        Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

        h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

        (1 + t)n= 1

        Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

        21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

        We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

        Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

        The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

        Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

        dist(xX) le δ

        In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

        Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

        δkminus1

        Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

        Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

        |X| le kvk4kminus1

        vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

        δkminus1

        here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

        vk = πk2

        Γ(k2+1)

        Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

        radic2

        Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

        2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

        radic2 such that

        the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

        has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

        So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

        2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

        Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

        E sube K suberadicnE

        Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

        radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

        E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

        Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

        1radicnle f(x) le 1

        on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

        Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

        c

        radiclog n

        n

        with some absolute constant c

        See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

        n(this is the

        DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

        Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

        C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

        σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

        128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

        128

        Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

        the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

        128 If in total

        2eminusc2ε2 logn

        128 |X| lt 1

        then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

        k16kminus1

        εkminus1eminus

        c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

        which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

        M equal 1

        x le sumxiisinX

        cixi leradic

        2 maxxiisinXxi le

        radic2(1 + ε8)

        Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

        radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

        (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

        2(1 + ε8)

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

        and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

        radic2(1 + ε8)

        For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

        22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

        It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

        Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

        where x1 xn are the points of X

        Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

        Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

        )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

        (4δ

        )kwe could rotate X

        and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

        This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

        Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

        About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

        Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

        Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

        Q = x21 + x2

        2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

        This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

        On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

        with n = k +(d+kminus1d

        ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

        by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

        d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

        Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

        is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

        (d+kminus1d

        ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

        Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

        minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

        (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

        )

        A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

        Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

        f(x) = f(minusx)

        References

        [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

        [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

        [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

        [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

        [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

        [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

        [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

        [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

        [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

        [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

        [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

        [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

        Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

        Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

        Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

        [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

        [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

        [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

        [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

        [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

        [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

        [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

        [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

        [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

        [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

        [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

        [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

        [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

        [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

        18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

        347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

        2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

        ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

        and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

        bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

        Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

        Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

        dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

        [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

        [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

        [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

        [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

        [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

        [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

        [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

        [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

        [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

        [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

        [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

        [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

        [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

        [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

        [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

        Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

        Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

        Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

        E-mail address r n karasevmailru

        URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

        • 1 Introduction
        • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
        • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
        • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
        • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
        • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
        • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
        • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
        • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
        • 10 Monotone maps
        • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
        • 12 Log-concavity
        • 13 Mixed volumes
        • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
        • 15 Needle decomposition
        • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
        • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
        • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
        • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
        • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
        • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
        • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
        • References

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 5

          with a hyperplane H perpendicular to e1 Then we consider all possible unit vectors vsuch that (v e1) gt 0 and project both halves of the measure onto H along v For everyone of the halves we obtain an (nminus 1)-dimensional YaondashYao partition and it is possibleto prove by induction that it is unique once the basis e2 en in H is selected

          Then a version of the Brouwer fixed point theorem (a similar fact is Lemma 92 below)helps to prove that for some v the centers of the YaondashYao partitions for the two halvescoincide and give the new center c

          This gives the required partition because every hyperplane H prime is either parallel to Hin this case everything is clear or intersects H in an affine (nminus 2)-subspace One of therays c+ tvtgt0 and cminus tvtgt0 is not touched by H prime and we select the corresponding halfH+ or Hminus let it be H+ without loss of generality Applying the inductive assumption tothe projection of micro|H+ along v and the intersection H capH prime we find a part in H+ whoseinterior is not intersected by H prime

          To finish the proof one has to prove that the YaondashYao center c is defined uniquely bymicro and e1 en We omit these details

          Then it is easy to iterate and obtain a partition into N equal convex parts so that any

          hyperplane intersects at most Nlog(2nminus1)

          log 2n of them in interiors The polynomial partitioncan give a better result it is possible to partition a measure into N equal parts so thatany hyperplane intersects at most O(N

          nminus1n ) of them see [KMS12] for the details But for

          the polynomial partition the parts may be non-convex and even not connected so convexpartitions are still useful in some cases The reader is referred to the paper of Bukh andHubard [BH11] for an interesting application of the YaondashYao theorem

          5 The SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

          We are going to apply Lemma 41 and deduce the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem aboutthe number of incidences between points and lines We start from the definition

          Definition 51 Let P be a set of points and L be a set of lines in the plane Denote byI(PL) their incidence number that is the number of pairs (p `) isin P timesL such that p isin `

          Theorem 52 In the plane I(PL) le C(|P |23|L|23 + |P | + |L|) for a suitable absoluteconstant C

          Remark 53 This theorem is also valid for pseudolines that is subsets of the place thatbehave like lines in terms of their intersection Such a generalization so far seems to beout of reach of algebraic methods

          Proof We start from a much weaker estimate which we are going to apply to differentsets of points and lines

          Lemma 54 I(PL) le |L|+ |P |2

          This lemma is proved by splitting L into two families one for the lines intersecting atmost one point of P and all other lines The details are left to the reader

          Now we put m = |P | and n = |L| Take some parameter r whose value we will definelater We choose an algebraic set Z of degree O(

          radicr) (from now on we use the notation

          O(middot) to avoid different constants) that partitions R2 into connected sets V1 VN Let P0 = P cap Z and Pi = P cap Vi for any i Also denote by L0 the lines in L that

          lie entirely on Z and denote by Li the lines in L that intersect Vi Note that Lirsquos arenot disjoint and |L0| le degZ = O(

          radicr) The crucial fact is that every line from L L0

          intersects Z in at most O(radicr) points and intersects at most O(

          radicr) of the regions Vi

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 6

          First we obviously estimate

          I(P0 L0) le m|L0| = O(mradicr)

          sumi

          I(P0 Li) = nO(radicr) I(Pi L0) = 0

          Summing up those obvious estimates we obtain O((m+n)radicr) in total It remains to use

          Lemma 54 and boundsumi

          I(Pi Li) lesumi

          |Li|+ |Pi|2 le nO(radicr) +m2r

          Now we make several observations The projective duality allows us to interchangepoints and lines and assume m le n Then Lemma 54 allows us to concentrate on the

          caseradicn le m le n After that putting r = m43

          n23 we make all the estimates made so far to

          be of the form O(n23m23)

          An interesting application of the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem is the sum-product es-timates We quote the simplest of them due to G Elekes For a subset A of a ringput

          A+ A = a1 + a2 a1 a2 isin A A middot A = a1a2 a1 a2 isin A

          Theorem 55 For any finite subset A of R we have

          |A+ A| middot |A middot A| ge C|A|52

          for an absolute constant C

          Proof Consider the set of points in R2

          P = (b+ c ac) a b c isin A

          and the set of lines

          L = y = a(xminus b) a b isin AObviously |L| = |A|2 and every ` isin L contains at least |A| points of P with given a andb and variable c Hence

          |I(PL)| ge |A|3Now by the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

          |P | middot |L| ge C|I(PL)|32rArr |P | middot |A|2 ge C|A|92

          and therefore |P | ge C|A|52 But P sube (A + A) times A middot A and we obtain the requiredinequality

          Theorem 55 implies that at least one of the cardinalities |A + A| or |A middot A| is at leastradicC|A|54 The exponent 54 can be slightly improved through a more careful counting

          see the details in [TaoVu10 Section 83] Actually P Erdos and E Szemeredi conjecturedthat it is possible to replace 54 with 2minus ε with arbitrarily small positive ε this remainsan open problem

          6 Spanning trees with low crossing number

          Sometimes it is important to estimate the number of parts for the partition in Lemma 41In order to do this we pass to the projective space and prove

          Lemma 61 A hypersurface Z sub RP n of degree d partitions RP n into at most dn con-nected components

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

          Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

          By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

          partfpartx1

          (x) = 0

          partfpartxn

          (x) = 0

          These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

          Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

          For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

          components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

          For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

          (degZminus1

          2

          )+1 by the

          Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

          (degZminus1

          2

          )

          Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

          Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

          radic|P |

          points

          Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

          Now we prove the following

          Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

          and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

          The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

          algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

          radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

          C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

          number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

          |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

          with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

          obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

          radic|P | so it is bounded

          by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

          The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

          7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

          Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

          Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

          sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

          Now we can prove

          Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

          Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

          (nd+1

          )polynomials of degree d each we denote

          the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

          )and

          nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

          distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

          d

          (n

          d+ 1

          ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

          dnd22

          such connected components and order types

          The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

          In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

          8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

          A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

          Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

          Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

          A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

          Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

          ⋃iF

          Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

          product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

          Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

          middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

          Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

          ⋃iF

          Now we prove

          Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

          Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

          Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

          Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

          It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

          Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

          Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

          Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

          Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

          V =

          a0 +

          kminus1sumj=1

          (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

          We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

          We have a natural map

          I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

          As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

          Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

          Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

          The system of 2k minus 2 equations

          g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

          has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

          pisinP

          g(p)f(p) gt 0

          that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

          Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

          Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

          ⋃iF

          The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

          Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

          More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

          Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

          bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

          therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

          to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

          involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

          For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

          9 Partition into prescribed parts

          Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

          Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

          Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

          The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

          Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

          In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

          Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

          Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

          y ge λ1(x) + w1

          y ge λm(x) + wm

          We are going to establish the following fact

          Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

          micro(Ri) = αi

          Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

          Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

          Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

          Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

          0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

          we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

          Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

          It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

          Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

          Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

          Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

          If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

          f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

          which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

          first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

          Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

          Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

          ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

          Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

          10 Monotone maps

          Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

          u(x) = sup1leilem

          (λi(x) + wi)

          has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

          Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

          Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

          there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

          The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

          From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

          (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

          for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

          Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

          C(f) =

          intRn

          〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

          Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

          V

          u dmicro+

          intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

          In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

          u(k) = log

          intK

          e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

          It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

          volK =

          intV lowast

          detDf dk

          This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

          11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

          An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

          Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

          of finite volume each then

          vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

          where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

          Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

          Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

          vol(A+B) geintA

          detDg dx =

          intA

          det(id +Df(x)) dx

          Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

          det(id +Df(x)) ge

          (1 +

          (VBVA

          )1n)n

          and therefore

          vol(A+B) ge

          (1 +

          (VBVA

          )1n)n

          VA =(V

          1nA + V

          1nB

          )n

          which is what we need

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

          The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

          volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

          vol(A+Bh)minus volA

          h

          where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

          Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

          volnminus1(partA)

          snge(

          volA

          vn

          )nminus1n

          Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

          vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

          and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

          nminus1n v1n

          n

          Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

          volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

          (volA)nminus1n v1n

          n

          which is equivalent to the required inequality

          Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

          For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

          Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

          Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

          Proof Observe that

          A capB supe 1

          2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

          then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

          Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

          vol(Aminus A) le(

          2n

          n

          )volA

          Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

          When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

          A cap(A+

          1

          2(x1 + x2)

          )supe 1

          2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

          Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

          vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

          Now integrate this over x to obtain

          vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

          intAminusA

          vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

          ge volA middotintAminusA

          (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

          int (1minusx)n

          0

          1 dy dx =

          = volA middotint 1

          0

          intxle1minusy1n

          1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

          0

          (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

          = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

          0

          (1minus y1n)n dy

          Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

          0

          (1minus y1n)n dy =

          int 1

          0

          (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

          Γ(2n+ 1)=

          =nn(nminus 1)

          (2n)=

          (2n

          n

          )minus1

          Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

          12 Log-concavity

          Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

          The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

          (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

          Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

          ρ

          (x1 + x2

          2

          )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

          The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

          Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

          After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

          Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

          Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

          Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

          (intRρ(x1 y) dy

          )1minust

          middot(int

          Rρ(x2 y) dy

          )tunder the assumption

          ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

          Put for brevity

          f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

          and also

          F =

          intRf(y) dy G =

          intRg(y) dy H =

          intRh(y) dy

          Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

          1

          F

          int y

          minusinfinf(y) dy =

          1

          G

          int ϕ(y)

          minusinfing(y) dy

          It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

          As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

          therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

          H =

          intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

          intRh(ψ(y))

          (1minus t+

          tf(y)G

          g(ϕ(y))F

          )dy

          Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

          H ge F 1minustGt

          intR

          (f(y)G

          Fg(ϕ(y))

          )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

          G+ t

          f(y)

          F

          )dy

          and using the mean inequality(

          (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

          + tf(y)F

          )ge(f(y)F

          )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

          )1minustwe conclude

          H ge F 1minustGt

          intR

          f(y)

          Fdy = F 1minustGt

          Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

          Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

          vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

          this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

          1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

          volume we rewrite

          vol(A+B) ge 1

          (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

          The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

          If fact the inequality

          (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

          holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

          Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

          Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

          h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

          Then intRn

          h(x) ge(int

          Rn

          f(x) dx

          )1minust

          middot(int

          Rn

          g(y) dy

          )t

          Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

          Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

          Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

          Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

          (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

          Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

          A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

          Since v is arbitrary the result follows

          Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

          Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

          (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

          hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

          standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

          d log f(t) =1

          f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

          where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

          Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

          (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

          there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

          It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

          The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

          In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

          In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

          Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

          vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

          )

          is log-concave

          Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

          We have to prove the inequality

          (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

          )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

          ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

          )

          After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

          (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

          By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

          The general form of (126) is

          (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

          which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

          13 Mixed volumes

          Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

          Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

          vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

          for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

          Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

          ui(k) = log

          intK

          e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

          where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

          f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

          is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

          map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

          We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

          h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

          xisinK〈p x〉

          Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

          〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

          when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

          h(p K) = h(pK)

          Now we can calculate vol K = volK

          (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

          intRn

          det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

          Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

          Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

          Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

          MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

          It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

          It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

          P (x) =sumk

          ckxk

          where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

          N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

          Theorem 133 The system of equations

          P1(x) = 0

          P2(x) = 0

          Pn(x) = 0

          for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

          In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

          We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

          14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

          We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

          Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

          f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

          for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

          intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

          Rn

          f(x) dx middotintRn

          g(y) dy le (2π)n

          We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

          Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

          there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

          f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

          for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

          f(x) dx middotintRn

          g(y) dy le (2π)n

          Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

          Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

          f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

          Hence intRn

          f(x) dx middotintRn

          g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

          Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

          g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

          g(y)e(zy) dy

          Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

          Rn

          g(y) dy leintRn

          g(y)e(zy) dy

          which implies the required inequality

          In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

          Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

          0

          f(x) dx middotint +infin

          0

          g(y) dy le π

          2

          Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

          follows that for any s t isin R

          w

          (s+ t

          2

          )= eminuse

          s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

          radicu(s)v(t)

          Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

          0

          f(x) dx middotint +infin

          0

          g(y) dy =

          int +infin

          minusinfinu(s) ds middot

          int +infin

          minusinfinv(t) dt le

          le(int +infin

          minusinfinw(r) dr

          )2

          =

          (int +infin

          0

          eminusz22 dz

          )2

          2

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

          Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

          1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

          The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

          f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

          implies int +infin

          minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

          But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

          minusinfinf(x) dx =

          int +infin

          0

          f(x) dx = 12

          we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

          partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

          and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

          also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

          Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

          so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

          F (xprime) =

          int +infin

          0

          f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

          int +infin

          0

          g(Bxprime + ten) dt

          From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

          selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

          f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

          = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

          We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

          F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

          2eminus(xprimeyprime)

          Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

          intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

          H

          F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

          G(yprime) dyprime le π

          2(2π)nminus1

          SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

          BH+

          g(y) dy =

          intH

          G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

          Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

          g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

          and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

          g(y) dy le (2π)n

          Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

          Rn

          dist(xH)f(x) dx

          By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

          xf(x) dxminusintHminus

          xf(x) dx perp H and

          intH+

          f(x) dxminusintHminus

          f(x) dx = 0

          which is exactly what we need

          Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

          characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

          i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

          Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

          + Assume that

          h(radicx1y1

          radicxnyn) ge

          radicf(x)g(y)

          for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

          Rn+

          f(x) dx middotintRn+

          g(y) dy le

          (intRn+

          h(z) dz

          )2

          Proof Substitute

          f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

          g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

          h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

          It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

          (s+ t

          2

          ))2

          ge f(s)g(t)

          Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

          f(s) ds middotintRn

          g(t) dt le(int

          Rn

          h(r) dr

          )2

          that is equivalent to what we need

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

          Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

          minusAig(y) dy le πn

          It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

          Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

          K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

          volK middot volK le v2n

          where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

          Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

          The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

          (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

          f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

          22

          and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

          22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

          Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

          Rn

          f(x) dx =

          intRn

          int f(x)

          0

          1 dydx =

          int 1

          0

          volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

          for the constant cn =int 1

          0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

          Rn

          g(y) dy = cn volK

          It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

          (2π)n2 =

          intRn

          eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

          Hence

          volK middot volK le (2π)n

          c2n

          = v2n

          It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

          volK middot volK ge 4n

          n

          which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

          (141) volK middot volK ge πn

          n

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

          15 Needle decomposition

          Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

          The main result is the following theorem

          Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

          micro(Pi)

          micro(Rn)=

          ν(Pi)

          ν(Rn)

          and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

          A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

          Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

          The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

          Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

          Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

          The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

          appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

          There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

          16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

          Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

          2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

          intRn e

          minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

          Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

          Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

          micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

          Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

          So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

          Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

          micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

          = micro(U) = micro(H)

          The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

          ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

          It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

          Now everything reduces to the following

          Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

          and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

          ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

          The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

          primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

          into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

          (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

          2 where

          ν(U) =

          int x

          minusinfineminusπξ

          2

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

          17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

          It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

          Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

          σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

          This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

          Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

          2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

          nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

          the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

          centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

          Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

          radicn in particular the following estimate

          holds

          σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

          2

          In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

          Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

          defined as follows

          U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

          volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

          Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

          with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

          volX le v cosn+1 ε

          2= v

          (1minus sin2 ε

          2

          )n+12 le veminus

          (n+1) sin2 ε2

          2

          The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

          vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

          22

          which implies

          σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

          22

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

          A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

          Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

          σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

          2

          Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

          Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

          18 More remarks on isoperimetry

          There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

          First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

          ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

          where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

          M

          (ω∆ω)ν =

          intM

          |dω|2ν +

          intM

          |dlowastω|2ν

          where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

          M

          f∆fν =

          intM

          |df |2ν

          From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

          L20(M) =

          f isin L2(M)

          intM

          fν = 0

          the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

          0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

          0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

          M

          |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

          |f |2ν for all f such that

          intM

          fν = 0

          The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

          It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

          One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

          |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

          ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

          (xy)isinE

          f(x)

          The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

          Now we make the following definition

          Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

          Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

          First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

          Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

          19 Sidakrsquos lemma

          Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

          Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

          micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

          The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

          The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

          Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

          ν(A) ge micro(A)

          Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

          Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

          Rn

          f dν geintRn

          f dmicro

          Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

          f dν =

          int f(x)

          0

          intRn

          1 dνdy =

          int f(x)

          0

          ν(Cy)dy

          where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

          Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

          Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

          f(x) =

          inty(xy)isinA

          1 dτ

          is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

          Now we observe that

          ν times τ(A) =

          intRn

          f(x) dν geintRn

          f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

          by Lemma 193

          And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

          Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

          ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

          micro(S)

          is more peaked than micro

          Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

          Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

          Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

          Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

          Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

          radic2 This result was extended to lower

          values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

          Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

          2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

          one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

          Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

          ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

          This can be decoded as

          vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

          ε

          eminusπ|x|2

          dx

          where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

          asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

          be defined (following Minkowski) to be

          volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

          vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

          It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

          20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

          A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

          |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

          where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

          Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

          cradic

          nlogN

          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

          Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

          )n2eminusα|x|

          2 An easy es-

          timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

          micro(Pi) geint 1

          minus1

          radicα

          πeminusαx

          2

          dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

          eminusα

          It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

          radicnα

          By Theorem 191

          micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

          1minus 1radicπα

          eminusα)N

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

          so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

          cradic

          nlogN

          ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

          absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

          παeminusα)Nge c2

          or

          (201) N log

          (1minus 1radic

          παeminusα)ge c3

          for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

          Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

          Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

          logN middot logM ge γn

          for some absolute constant γ gt 0

          Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

          radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

          Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

          nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

          half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

          nlogN

          and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

          of radius rlowast = cradic

          1logM

          Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

          cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

          Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

          In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

          However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

          Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

          Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

          cn

          logN

          )n2vn

          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

          Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

          Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

          volK

          volKge(

          cn

          logN

          )n

          Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

          volK

          volK=

          (volK)2

          volK middot volKge (volK)2

          v2n

          ge(

          cn

          logN

          )n

          where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

          The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

          Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

          h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

          (1 + t)n= 1

          Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

          21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

          We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

          Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

          The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

          Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

          dist(xX) le δ

          In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

          Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

          δkminus1

          Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

          Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

          |X| le kvk4kminus1

          vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

          δkminus1

          here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

          vk = πk2

          Γ(k2+1)

          Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

          radic2

          Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

          2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

          radic2 such that

          the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

          has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

          So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

          2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

          Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

          E sube K suberadicnE

          Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

          radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

          E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

          Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

          1radicnle f(x) le 1

          on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

          Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

          c

          radiclog n

          n

          with some absolute constant c

          See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

          n(this is the

          DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

          Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

          C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

          σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

          128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

          128

          Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

          the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

          128 If in total

          2eminusc2ε2 logn

          128 |X| lt 1

          then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

          k16kminus1

          εkminus1eminus

          c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

          which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

          M equal 1

          x le sumxiisinX

          cixi leradic

          2 maxxiisinXxi le

          radic2(1 + ε8)

          Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

          radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

          (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

          2(1 + ε8)

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

          and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

          radic2(1 + ε8)

          For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

          22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

          It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

          Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

          where x1 xn are the points of X

          Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

          Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

          )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

          (4δ

          )kwe could rotate X

          and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

          This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

          Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

          About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

          Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

          Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

          Q = x21 + x2

          2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

          This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

          On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

          with n = k +(d+kminus1d

          ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

          by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

          d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

          Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

          is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

          (d+kminus1d

          ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

          Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

          minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

          (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

          )

          A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

          Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

          f(x) = f(minusx)

          References

          [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

          [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

          [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

          [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

          [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

          [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

          [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

          [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

          [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

          [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

          [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

          [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

          Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

          Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

          Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

          [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

          [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

          [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

          [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

          [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

          [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

          [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

          [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

          [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

          [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

          [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

          [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

          [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

          [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

          18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

          347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

          2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

          ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

          and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

          bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

          Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

          Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

          dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

          [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

          [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

          [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

          [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

          [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

          [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

          [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

          [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

          [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

          [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

          [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

          [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

          [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

          [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

          [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

          Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

          Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

          Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

          E-mail address r n karasevmailru

          URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

          • 1 Introduction
          • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
          • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
          • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
          • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
          • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
          • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
          • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
          • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
          • 10 Monotone maps
          • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
          • 12 Log-concavity
          • 13 Mixed volumes
          • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
          • 15 Needle decomposition
          • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
          • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
          • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
          • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
          • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
          • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
          • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
          • References

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 6

            First we obviously estimate

            I(P0 L0) le m|L0| = O(mradicr)

            sumi

            I(P0 Li) = nO(radicr) I(Pi L0) = 0

            Summing up those obvious estimates we obtain O((m+n)radicr) in total It remains to use

            Lemma 54 and boundsumi

            I(Pi Li) lesumi

            |Li|+ |Pi|2 le nO(radicr) +m2r

            Now we make several observations The projective duality allows us to interchangepoints and lines and assume m le n Then Lemma 54 allows us to concentrate on the

            caseradicn le m le n After that putting r = m43

            n23 we make all the estimates made so far to

            be of the form O(n23m23)

            An interesting application of the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem is the sum-product es-timates We quote the simplest of them due to G Elekes For a subset A of a ringput

            A+ A = a1 + a2 a1 a2 isin A A middot A = a1a2 a1 a2 isin A

            Theorem 55 For any finite subset A of R we have

            |A+ A| middot |A middot A| ge C|A|52

            for an absolute constant C

            Proof Consider the set of points in R2

            P = (b+ c ac) a b c isin A

            and the set of lines

            L = y = a(xminus b) a b isin AObviously |L| = |A|2 and every ` isin L contains at least |A| points of P with given a andb and variable c Hence

            |I(PL)| ge |A|3Now by the SzemeredindashTrotter theorem

            |P | middot |L| ge C|I(PL)|32rArr |P | middot |A|2 ge C|A|92

            and therefore |P | ge C|A|52 But P sube (A + A) times A middot A and we obtain the requiredinequality

            Theorem 55 implies that at least one of the cardinalities |A + A| or |A middot A| is at leastradicC|A|54 The exponent 54 can be slightly improved through a more careful counting

            see the details in [TaoVu10 Section 83] Actually P Erdos and E Szemeredi conjecturedthat it is possible to replace 54 with 2minus ε with arbitrarily small positive ε this remainsan open problem

            6 Spanning trees with low crossing number

            Sometimes it is important to estimate the number of parts for the partition in Lemma 41In order to do this we pass to the projective space and prove

            Lemma 61 A hypersurface Z sub RP n of degree d partitions RP n into at most dn con-nected components

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

            Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

            By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

            partfpartx1

            (x) = 0

            partfpartxn

            (x) = 0

            These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

            Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

            For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

            components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

            For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

            (degZminus1

            2

            )+1 by the

            Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

            (degZminus1

            2

            )

            Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

            Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

            radic|P |

            points

            Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

            Now we prove the following

            Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

            and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

            The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

            algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

            radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

            C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

            number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

            |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

            with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

            obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

            radic|P | so it is bounded

            by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

            The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

            7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

            Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

            Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

            sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

            Now we can prove

            Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

            Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

            (nd+1

            )polynomials of degree d each we denote

            the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

            )and

            nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

            distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

            d

            (n

            d+ 1

            ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

            dnd22

            such connected components and order types

            The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

            In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

            8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

            A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

            Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

            Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

            A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

            Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

            ⋃iF

            Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

            product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

            Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

            middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

            Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

            ⋃iF

            Now we prove

            Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

            Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

            Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

            Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

            It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

            Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

            Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

            Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

            Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

            V =

            a0 +

            kminus1sumj=1

            (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

            We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

            We have a natural map

            I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

            As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

            Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

            Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

            The system of 2k minus 2 equations

            g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

            has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

            pisinP

            g(p)f(p) gt 0

            that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

            Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

            Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

            ⋃iF

            The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

            Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

            More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

            Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

            bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

            therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

            to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

            involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

            For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

            9 Partition into prescribed parts

            Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

            Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

            Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

            The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

            Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

            In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

            Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

            Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

            y ge λ1(x) + w1

            y ge λm(x) + wm

            We are going to establish the following fact

            Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

            micro(Ri) = αi

            Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

            Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

            Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

            Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

            0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

            we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

            Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

            It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

            Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

            Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

            Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

            If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

            f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

            which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

            first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

            Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

            Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

            ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

            Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

            10 Monotone maps

            Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

            u(x) = sup1leilem

            (λi(x) + wi)

            has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

            Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

            Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

            there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

            The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

            From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

            (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

            for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

            Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

            C(f) =

            intRn

            〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

            Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

            V

            u dmicro+

            intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

            In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

            u(k) = log

            intK

            e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

            It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

            volK =

            intV lowast

            detDf dk

            This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

            11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

            An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

            Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

            of finite volume each then

            vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

            where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

            Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

            Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

            vol(A+B) geintA

            detDg dx =

            intA

            det(id +Df(x)) dx

            Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

            det(id +Df(x)) ge

            (1 +

            (VBVA

            )1n)n

            and therefore

            vol(A+B) ge

            (1 +

            (VBVA

            )1n)n

            VA =(V

            1nA + V

            1nB

            )n

            which is what we need

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

            The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

            volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

            vol(A+Bh)minus volA

            h

            where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

            Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

            volnminus1(partA)

            snge(

            volA

            vn

            )nminus1n

            Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

            vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

            and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

            nminus1n v1n

            n

            Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

            volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

            (volA)nminus1n v1n

            n

            which is equivalent to the required inequality

            Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

            For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

            Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

            Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

            Proof Observe that

            A capB supe 1

            2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

            then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

            Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

            vol(Aminus A) le(

            2n

            n

            )volA

            Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

            When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

            A cap(A+

            1

            2(x1 + x2)

            )supe 1

            2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

            Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

            vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

            Now integrate this over x to obtain

            vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

            intAminusA

            vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

            ge volA middotintAminusA

            (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

            int (1minusx)n

            0

            1 dy dx =

            = volA middotint 1

            0

            intxle1minusy1n

            1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

            0

            (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

            = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

            0

            (1minus y1n)n dy

            Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

            0

            (1minus y1n)n dy =

            int 1

            0

            (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

            Γ(2n+ 1)=

            =nn(nminus 1)

            (2n)=

            (2n

            n

            )minus1

            Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

            12 Log-concavity

            Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

            The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

            (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

            Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

            ρ

            (x1 + x2

            2

            )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

            The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

            Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

            After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

            Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

            Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

            Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

            (intRρ(x1 y) dy

            )1minust

            middot(int

            Rρ(x2 y) dy

            )tunder the assumption

            ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

            Put for brevity

            f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

            and also

            F =

            intRf(y) dy G =

            intRg(y) dy H =

            intRh(y) dy

            Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

            1

            F

            int y

            minusinfinf(y) dy =

            1

            G

            int ϕ(y)

            minusinfing(y) dy

            It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

            As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

            therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

            H =

            intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

            intRh(ψ(y))

            (1minus t+

            tf(y)G

            g(ϕ(y))F

            )dy

            Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

            H ge F 1minustGt

            intR

            (f(y)G

            Fg(ϕ(y))

            )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

            G+ t

            f(y)

            F

            )dy

            and using the mean inequality(

            (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

            + tf(y)F

            )ge(f(y)F

            )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

            )1minustwe conclude

            H ge F 1minustGt

            intR

            f(y)

            Fdy = F 1minustGt

            Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

            Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

            vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

            this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

            1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

            volume we rewrite

            vol(A+B) ge 1

            (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

            The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

            If fact the inequality

            (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

            holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

            Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

            Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

            h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

            Then intRn

            h(x) ge(int

            Rn

            f(x) dx

            )1minust

            middot(int

            Rn

            g(y) dy

            )t

            Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

            Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

            Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

            Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

            (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

            Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

            A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

            Since v is arbitrary the result follows

            Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

            Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

            (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

            hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

            standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

            d log f(t) =1

            f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

            where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

            Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

            (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

            there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

            It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

            The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

            In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

            In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

            Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

            vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

            )

            is log-concave

            Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

            We have to prove the inequality

            (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

            )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

            ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

            )

            After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

            (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

            By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

            The general form of (126) is

            (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

            which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

            13 Mixed volumes

            Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

            Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

            vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

            for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

            Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

            ui(k) = log

            intK

            e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

            where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

            f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

            is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

            map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

            We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

            h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

            xisinK〈p x〉

            Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

            〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

            when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

            h(p K) = h(pK)

            Now we can calculate vol K = volK

            (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

            intRn

            det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

            Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

            Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

            Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

            MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

            It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

            It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

            P (x) =sumk

            ckxk

            where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

            N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

            Theorem 133 The system of equations

            P1(x) = 0

            P2(x) = 0

            Pn(x) = 0

            for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

            In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

            We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

            14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

            We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

            Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

            f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

            for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

            intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

            Rn

            f(x) dx middotintRn

            g(y) dy le (2π)n

            We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

            Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

            there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

            f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

            for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

            f(x) dx middotintRn

            g(y) dy le (2π)n

            Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

            Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

            f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

            Hence intRn

            f(x) dx middotintRn

            g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

            Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

            g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

            g(y)e(zy) dy

            Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

            Rn

            g(y) dy leintRn

            g(y)e(zy) dy

            which implies the required inequality

            In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

            Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

            0

            f(x) dx middotint +infin

            0

            g(y) dy le π

            2

            Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

            follows that for any s t isin R

            w

            (s+ t

            2

            )= eminuse

            s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

            radicu(s)v(t)

            Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

            0

            f(x) dx middotint +infin

            0

            g(y) dy =

            int +infin

            minusinfinu(s) ds middot

            int +infin

            minusinfinv(t) dt le

            le(int +infin

            minusinfinw(r) dr

            )2

            =

            (int +infin

            0

            eminusz22 dz

            )2

            2

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

            Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

            1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

            The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

            f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

            implies int +infin

            minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

            But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

            minusinfinf(x) dx =

            int +infin

            0

            f(x) dx = 12

            we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

            partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

            and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

            also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

            Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

            so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

            F (xprime) =

            int +infin

            0

            f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

            int +infin

            0

            g(Bxprime + ten) dt

            From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

            selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

            f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

            = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

            We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

            F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

            2eminus(xprimeyprime)

            Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

            intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

            H

            F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

            G(yprime) dyprime le π

            2(2π)nminus1

            SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

            BH+

            g(y) dy =

            intH

            G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

            Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

            g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

            and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

            g(y) dy le (2π)n

            Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

            Rn

            dist(xH)f(x) dx

            By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

            xf(x) dxminusintHminus

            xf(x) dx perp H and

            intH+

            f(x) dxminusintHminus

            f(x) dx = 0

            which is exactly what we need

            Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

            characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

            i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

            Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

            + Assume that

            h(radicx1y1

            radicxnyn) ge

            radicf(x)g(y)

            for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

            Rn+

            f(x) dx middotintRn+

            g(y) dy le

            (intRn+

            h(z) dz

            )2

            Proof Substitute

            f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

            g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

            h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

            It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

            (s+ t

            2

            ))2

            ge f(s)g(t)

            Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

            f(s) ds middotintRn

            g(t) dt le(int

            Rn

            h(r) dr

            )2

            that is equivalent to what we need

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

            Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

            minusAig(y) dy le πn

            It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

            Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

            K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

            volK middot volK le v2n

            where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

            Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

            The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

            (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

            f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

            22

            and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

            22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

            Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

            Rn

            f(x) dx =

            intRn

            int f(x)

            0

            1 dydx =

            int 1

            0

            volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

            for the constant cn =int 1

            0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

            Rn

            g(y) dy = cn volK

            It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

            (2π)n2 =

            intRn

            eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

            Hence

            volK middot volK le (2π)n

            c2n

            = v2n

            It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

            volK middot volK ge 4n

            n

            which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

            (141) volK middot volK ge πn

            n

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

            15 Needle decomposition

            Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

            The main result is the following theorem

            Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

            micro(Pi)

            micro(Rn)=

            ν(Pi)

            ν(Rn)

            and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

            A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

            Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

            The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

            Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

            Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

            The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

            appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

            There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

            16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

            Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

            2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

            intRn e

            minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

            Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

            Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

            micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

            Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

            So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

            Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

            micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

            = micro(U) = micro(H)

            The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

            ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

            It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

            Now everything reduces to the following

            Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

            and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

            ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

            The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

            primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

            into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

            (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

            2 where

            ν(U) =

            int x

            minusinfineminusπξ

            2

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

            17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

            It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

            Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

            σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

            This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

            Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

            2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

            nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

            the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

            centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

            Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

            radicn in particular the following estimate

            holds

            σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

            2

            In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

            Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

            defined as follows

            U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

            volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

            Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

            with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

            volX le v cosn+1 ε

            2= v

            (1minus sin2 ε

            2

            )n+12 le veminus

            (n+1) sin2 ε2

            2

            The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

            vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

            22

            which implies

            σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

            22

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

            A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

            Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

            σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

            2

            Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

            Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

            18 More remarks on isoperimetry

            There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

            First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

            ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

            where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

            M

            (ω∆ω)ν =

            intM

            |dω|2ν +

            intM

            |dlowastω|2ν

            where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

            M

            f∆fν =

            intM

            |df |2ν

            From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

            L20(M) =

            f isin L2(M)

            intM

            fν = 0

            the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

            0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

            0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

            M

            |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

            |f |2ν for all f such that

            intM

            fν = 0

            The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

            It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

            One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

            |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

            ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

            (xy)isinE

            f(x)

            The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

            Now we make the following definition

            Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

            Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

            First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

            Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

            19 Sidakrsquos lemma

            Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

            Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

            micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

            The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

            The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

            Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

            ν(A) ge micro(A)

            Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

            Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

            Rn

            f dν geintRn

            f dmicro

            Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

            f dν =

            int f(x)

            0

            intRn

            1 dνdy =

            int f(x)

            0

            ν(Cy)dy

            where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

            Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

            Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

            f(x) =

            inty(xy)isinA

            1 dτ

            is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

            Now we observe that

            ν times τ(A) =

            intRn

            f(x) dν geintRn

            f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

            by Lemma 193

            And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

            Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

            ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

            micro(S)

            is more peaked than micro

            Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

            Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

            Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

            Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

            Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

            radic2 This result was extended to lower

            values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

            Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

            2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

            one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

            Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

            ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

            This can be decoded as

            vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

            ε

            eminusπ|x|2

            dx

            where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

            asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

            be defined (following Minkowski) to be

            volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

            vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

            It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

            20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

            A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

            |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

            where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

            Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

            cradic

            nlogN

            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

            Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

            )n2eminusα|x|

            2 An easy es-

            timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

            micro(Pi) geint 1

            minus1

            radicα

            πeminusαx

            2

            dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

            eminusα

            It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

            radicnα

            By Theorem 191

            micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

            1minus 1radicπα

            eminusα)N

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

            so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

            cradic

            nlogN

            ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

            absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

            παeminusα)Nge c2

            or

            (201) N log

            (1minus 1radic

            παeminusα)ge c3

            for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

            Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

            Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

            logN middot logM ge γn

            for some absolute constant γ gt 0

            Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

            radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

            Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

            nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

            half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

            nlogN

            and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

            of radius rlowast = cradic

            1logM

            Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

            cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

            Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

            In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

            However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

            Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

            Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

            cn

            logN

            )n2vn

            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

            Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

            Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

            volK

            volKge(

            cn

            logN

            )n

            Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

            volK

            volK=

            (volK)2

            volK middot volKge (volK)2

            v2n

            ge(

            cn

            logN

            )n

            where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

            The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

            Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

            h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

            (1 + t)n= 1

            Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

            21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

            We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

            Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

            The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

            Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

            dist(xX) le δ

            In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

            Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

            δkminus1

            Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

            Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

            |X| le kvk4kminus1

            vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

            δkminus1

            here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

            vk = πk2

            Γ(k2+1)

            Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

            radic2

            Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

            2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

            radic2 such that

            the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

            has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

            So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

            2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

            Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

            E sube K suberadicnE

            Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

            radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

            E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

            Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

            1radicnle f(x) le 1

            on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

            Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

            c

            radiclog n

            n

            with some absolute constant c

            See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

            n(this is the

            DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

            Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

            C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

            σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

            128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

            128

            Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

            the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

            128 If in total

            2eminusc2ε2 logn

            128 |X| lt 1

            then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

            k16kminus1

            εkminus1eminus

            c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

            which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

            M equal 1

            x le sumxiisinX

            cixi leradic

            2 maxxiisinXxi le

            radic2(1 + ε8)

            Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

            radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

            (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

            2(1 + ε8)

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

            and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

            radic2(1 + ε8)

            For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

            22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

            It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

            Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

            where x1 xn are the points of X

            Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

            Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

            )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

            (4δ

            )kwe could rotate X

            and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

            This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

            Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

            About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

            Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

            Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

            Q = x21 + x2

            2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

            This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

            On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

            with n = k +(d+kminus1d

            ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

            by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

            d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

            Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

            is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

            (d+kminus1d

            ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

            Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

            minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

            (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

            )

            A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

            Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

            f(x) = f(minusx)

            References

            [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

            [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

            [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

            [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

            [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

            [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

            [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

            [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

            [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

            [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

            [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

            [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

            Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

            Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

            Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

            [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

            [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

            [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

            [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

            [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

            [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

            [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

            [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

            [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

            [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

            [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

            [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

            [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

            [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

            18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

            347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

            2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

            ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

            and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

            bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

            Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

            Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

            dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

            [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

            [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

            [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

            [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

            [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

            [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

            [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

            [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

            [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

            [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

            [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

            [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

            [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

            [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

            [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

            Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

            Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

            Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

            E-mail address r n karasevmailru

            URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

            • 1 Introduction
            • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
            • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
            • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
            • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
            • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
            • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
            • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
            • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
            • 10 Monotone maps
            • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
            • 12 Log-concavity
            • 13 Mixed volumes
            • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
            • 15 Needle decomposition
            • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
            • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
            • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
            • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
            • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
            • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
            • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
            • References

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 7

              Proof Select a hyperplane H sub RP n that intersects Z generically Without loss ofgenerality assume H to be the hyperplane at infinity which is naturally RP nminus1

              By the inductive assumption H intersects at most dnminus1 components of RP n Z Othercomponents C1 CN are bounded When considering the affine space Rn = RP n Hwe choose a degree d polynomial f with the set of zeros Z Every bounded componentCi has the property that on its boundary f vanishes and keeps sign in its interior Henceevery Ci has a maximum or a minimum of f in its interior Every critical point is a rootof the system of equations

              partfpartx1

              (x) = 0

              partfpartxn

              (x) = 0

              These are algebraic equations of degree at most dminus1 each and therefore the system has atmost (dminus1)n solutions Of course to conclude this we need the solution set to be discreteThe general case is handled by bounding not the number of solutions but the number ofconnected components of solutions By an appropriate perturbation of the equations wemay split the components of its solution set into several isolated points each thus provingwhat we need

              Now we have at most (d minus 1)n bounded components and at most dnminus1 unboundedcomponents The total number of components is therefore at most dn

              For the affine case we note that every infinite component in projective setting may givetwo components in affine setting therefore in Rn Z we have at most (d minus 1)n + dnminus1

              components (from the proof above) which is at most dn+1 always Hence in Lemma 41the number of components is actually of order r

              For the number of connected components of the set Z itself there is a more preciseresult in the plane This number is bounded from above by the number

              (degZminus1

              2

              )+1 by the

              Harnack theorem [Har76] The reader may try to prove the Harnack theorem consideringthe real algebraic curve as a set of cycles on the corresponding complex algebraic curveof genus g =

              (degZminus1

              2

              )

              Now we give another application of Lemma 41 is the following theorem of Chazelleand Welzl [Wel88 Cha89 Wel92]

              Theorem 62 Any finite set P sub R2 has a spanning tree T with the following propertyAny line ` (apart from a finite number of exceptions) intersects T in at most C

              radic|P |

              points

              Proof The first observation is that it is sufficient to find an arcwise connected subset Xcontaining P and having small crossings with almost all lines Then it is easy to select atree T inside X that will still connect P and has crossings at most twice of the crossingsof X Then the edges of T may be replaced with straight line segments without increasingthe number of crossings The details of this reduction are left to the reader

              Now we prove the following

              Lemma 63 It is possible to find a set Y sup P with at most |P |2 connected components

              and line crossing number at most Cradic|P |

              The lemma is proved as follows Taking r = |P |C1 we obtain by Lemma 41 an

              algebraic set Z of degree at most C2

              radic|P |C1 that splits P into parts of size at most

              C1 By Lemma 61 for sufficiently large C1 (but still an absolute constant) the number ofconnected components of R2 Z and therefore Z will be at most |P |2 Then in everycomponent Vi of R2 Z we have at most C1 points of P which we span by a tree Ti andattach this tree to the set Z Put Y = Z cup T1 cup middot middot middot cup TN Any line ` (apart from a finite

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

              number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

              |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

              with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

              obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

              radic|P | so it is bounded

              by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

              The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

              7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

              Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

              Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

              sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

              Now we can prove

              Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

              Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

              (nd+1

              )polynomials of degree d each we denote

              the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

              )and

              nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

              distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

              d

              (n

              d+ 1

              ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

              dnd22

              such connected components and order types

              The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

              In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

              8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

              A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

              Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

              Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

              A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

              Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

              ⋃iF

              Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

              product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

              Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

              middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

              Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

              ⋃iF

              Now we prove

              Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

              Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

              Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

              Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

              It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

              Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

              Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

              Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

              Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

              V =

              a0 +

              kminus1sumj=1

              (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

              We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

              We have a natural map

              I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

              As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

              Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

              Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

              The system of 2k minus 2 equations

              g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

              has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

              pisinP

              g(p)f(p) gt 0

              that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

              Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

              Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

              ⋃iF

              The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

              Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

              More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

              Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

              bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

              therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

              to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

              involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

              For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

              9 Partition into prescribed parts

              Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

              Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

              Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

              The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

              Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

              In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

              Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

              Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

              y ge λ1(x) + w1

              y ge λm(x) + wm

              We are going to establish the following fact

              Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

              micro(Ri) = αi

              Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

              Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

              Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

              Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

              0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

              we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

              Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

              It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

              Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

              Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

              Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

              If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

              f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

              which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

              first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

              Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

              Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

              ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

              Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

              10 Monotone maps

              Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

              u(x) = sup1leilem

              (λi(x) + wi)

              has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

              Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

              Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

              there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

              The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

              From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

              (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

              for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

              Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

              C(f) =

              intRn

              〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

              Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

              V

              u dmicro+

              intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

              In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

              u(k) = log

              intK

              e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

              It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

              volK =

              intV lowast

              detDf dk

              This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

              11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

              An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

              Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

              of finite volume each then

              vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

              where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

              Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

              Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

              vol(A+B) geintA

              detDg dx =

              intA

              det(id +Df(x)) dx

              Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

              det(id +Df(x)) ge

              (1 +

              (VBVA

              )1n)n

              and therefore

              vol(A+B) ge

              (1 +

              (VBVA

              )1n)n

              VA =(V

              1nA + V

              1nB

              )n

              which is what we need

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

              The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

              volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

              vol(A+Bh)minus volA

              h

              where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

              Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

              volnminus1(partA)

              snge(

              volA

              vn

              )nminus1n

              Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

              vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

              and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

              nminus1n v1n

              n

              Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

              volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

              (volA)nminus1n v1n

              n

              which is equivalent to the required inequality

              Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

              For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

              Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

              Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

              Proof Observe that

              A capB supe 1

              2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

              then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

              Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

              vol(Aminus A) le(

              2n

              n

              )volA

              Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

              When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

              A cap(A+

              1

              2(x1 + x2)

              )supe 1

              2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

              Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

              vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

              Now integrate this over x to obtain

              vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

              intAminusA

              vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

              ge volA middotintAminusA

              (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

              int (1minusx)n

              0

              1 dy dx =

              = volA middotint 1

              0

              intxle1minusy1n

              1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

              0

              (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

              = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

              0

              (1minus y1n)n dy

              Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

              0

              (1minus y1n)n dy =

              int 1

              0

              (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

              Γ(2n+ 1)=

              =nn(nminus 1)

              (2n)=

              (2n

              n

              )minus1

              Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

              12 Log-concavity

              Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

              The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

              (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

              Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

              ρ

              (x1 + x2

              2

              )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

              The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

              Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

              After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

              Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

              Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

              Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

              (intRρ(x1 y) dy

              )1minust

              middot(int

              Rρ(x2 y) dy

              )tunder the assumption

              ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

              Put for brevity

              f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

              and also

              F =

              intRf(y) dy G =

              intRg(y) dy H =

              intRh(y) dy

              Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

              1

              F

              int y

              minusinfinf(y) dy =

              1

              G

              int ϕ(y)

              minusinfing(y) dy

              It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

              As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

              therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

              H =

              intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

              intRh(ψ(y))

              (1minus t+

              tf(y)G

              g(ϕ(y))F

              )dy

              Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

              H ge F 1minustGt

              intR

              (f(y)G

              Fg(ϕ(y))

              )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

              G+ t

              f(y)

              F

              )dy

              and using the mean inequality(

              (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

              + tf(y)F

              )ge(f(y)F

              )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

              )1minustwe conclude

              H ge F 1minustGt

              intR

              f(y)

              Fdy = F 1minustGt

              Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

              Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

              vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

              this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

              1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

              volume we rewrite

              vol(A+B) ge 1

              (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

              The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

              If fact the inequality

              (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

              holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

              Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

              Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

              h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

              Then intRn

              h(x) ge(int

              Rn

              f(x) dx

              )1minust

              middot(int

              Rn

              g(y) dy

              )t

              Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

              Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

              Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

              Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

              (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

              Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

              A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

              Since v is arbitrary the result follows

              Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

              Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

              (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

              hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

              standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

              d log f(t) =1

              f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

              where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

              Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

              (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

              there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

              It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

              The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

              In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

              In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

              Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

              vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

              )

              is log-concave

              Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

              We have to prove the inequality

              (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

              )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

              ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

              )

              After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

              (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

              By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

              The general form of (126) is

              (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

              which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

              13 Mixed volumes

              Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

              Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

              vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

              for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

              Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

              ui(k) = log

              intK

              e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

              where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

              f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

              is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

              map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

              We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

              h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

              xisinK〈p x〉

              Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

              〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

              when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

              h(p K) = h(pK)

              Now we can calculate vol K = volK

              (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

              intRn

              det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

              Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

              Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

              Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

              MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

              It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

              It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

              P (x) =sumk

              ckxk

              where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

              N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

              Theorem 133 The system of equations

              P1(x) = 0

              P2(x) = 0

              Pn(x) = 0

              for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

              In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

              We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

              14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

              We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

              Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

              f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

              for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

              intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

              Rn

              f(x) dx middotintRn

              g(y) dy le (2π)n

              We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

              Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

              there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

              f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

              for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

              f(x) dx middotintRn

              g(y) dy le (2π)n

              Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

              Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

              f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

              Hence intRn

              f(x) dx middotintRn

              g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

              Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

              g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

              g(y)e(zy) dy

              Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

              Rn

              g(y) dy leintRn

              g(y)e(zy) dy

              which implies the required inequality

              In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

              Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

              0

              f(x) dx middotint +infin

              0

              g(y) dy le π

              2

              Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

              follows that for any s t isin R

              w

              (s+ t

              2

              )= eminuse

              s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

              radicu(s)v(t)

              Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

              0

              f(x) dx middotint +infin

              0

              g(y) dy =

              int +infin

              minusinfinu(s) ds middot

              int +infin

              minusinfinv(t) dt le

              le(int +infin

              minusinfinw(r) dr

              )2

              =

              (int +infin

              0

              eminusz22 dz

              )2

              2

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

              Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

              1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

              The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

              f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

              implies int +infin

              minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

              But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

              minusinfinf(x) dx =

              int +infin

              0

              f(x) dx = 12

              we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

              partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

              and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

              also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

              Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

              so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

              F (xprime) =

              int +infin

              0

              f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

              int +infin

              0

              g(Bxprime + ten) dt

              From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

              selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

              f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

              = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

              We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

              F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

              2eminus(xprimeyprime)

              Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

              intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

              H

              F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

              G(yprime) dyprime le π

              2(2π)nminus1

              SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

              BH+

              g(y) dy =

              intH

              G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

              Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

              g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

              and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

              g(y) dy le (2π)n

              Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

              Rn

              dist(xH)f(x) dx

              By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

              xf(x) dxminusintHminus

              xf(x) dx perp H and

              intH+

              f(x) dxminusintHminus

              f(x) dx = 0

              which is exactly what we need

              Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

              characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

              i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

              Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

              + Assume that

              h(radicx1y1

              radicxnyn) ge

              radicf(x)g(y)

              for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

              Rn+

              f(x) dx middotintRn+

              g(y) dy le

              (intRn+

              h(z) dz

              )2

              Proof Substitute

              f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

              g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

              h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

              It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

              (s+ t

              2

              ))2

              ge f(s)g(t)

              Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

              f(s) ds middotintRn

              g(t) dt le(int

              Rn

              h(r) dr

              )2

              that is equivalent to what we need

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

              Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

              minusAig(y) dy le πn

              It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

              Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

              K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

              volK middot volK le v2n

              where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

              Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

              The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

              (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

              f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

              22

              and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

              22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

              Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

              Rn

              f(x) dx =

              intRn

              int f(x)

              0

              1 dydx =

              int 1

              0

              volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

              for the constant cn =int 1

              0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

              Rn

              g(y) dy = cn volK

              It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

              (2π)n2 =

              intRn

              eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

              Hence

              volK middot volK le (2π)n

              c2n

              = v2n

              It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

              volK middot volK ge 4n

              n

              which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

              (141) volK middot volK ge πn

              n

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

              15 Needle decomposition

              Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

              The main result is the following theorem

              Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

              micro(Pi)

              micro(Rn)=

              ν(Pi)

              ν(Rn)

              and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

              A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

              Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

              The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

              Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

              Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

              The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

              appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

              There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

              16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

              Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

              2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

              intRn e

              minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

              Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

              Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

              micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

              Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

              So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

              Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

              micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

              = micro(U) = micro(H)

              The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

              ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

              It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

              Now everything reduces to the following

              Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

              and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

              ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

              The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

              primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

              into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

              (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

              2 where

              ν(U) =

              int x

              minusinfineminusπξ

              2

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

              17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

              It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

              Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

              σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

              This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

              Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

              2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

              nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

              the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

              centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

              Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

              radicn in particular the following estimate

              holds

              σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

              2

              In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

              Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

              defined as follows

              U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

              volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

              Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

              with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

              volX le v cosn+1 ε

              2= v

              (1minus sin2 ε

              2

              )n+12 le veminus

              (n+1) sin2 ε2

              2

              The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

              vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

              22

              which implies

              σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

              22

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

              A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

              Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

              σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

              2

              Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

              Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

              18 More remarks on isoperimetry

              There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

              First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

              ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

              where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

              M

              (ω∆ω)ν =

              intM

              |dω|2ν +

              intM

              |dlowastω|2ν

              where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

              M

              f∆fν =

              intM

              |df |2ν

              From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

              L20(M) =

              f isin L2(M)

              intM

              fν = 0

              the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

              0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

              0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

              M

              |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

              |f |2ν for all f such that

              intM

              fν = 0

              The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

              It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

              One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

              |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

              ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

              (xy)isinE

              f(x)

              The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

              Now we make the following definition

              Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

              Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

              First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

              Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

              19 Sidakrsquos lemma

              Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

              Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

              micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

              The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

              The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

              Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

              ν(A) ge micro(A)

              Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

              Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

              Rn

              f dν geintRn

              f dmicro

              Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

              f dν =

              int f(x)

              0

              intRn

              1 dνdy =

              int f(x)

              0

              ν(Cy)dy

              where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

              Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

              Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

              f(x) =

              inty(xy)isinA

              1 dτ

              is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

              Now we observe that

              ν times τ(A) =

              intRn

              f(x) dν geintRn

              f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

              by Lemma 193

              And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

              Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

              ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

              micro(S)

              is more peaked than micro

              Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

              Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

              Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

              Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

              Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

              radic2 This result was extended to lower

              values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

              Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

              2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

              one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

              Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

              ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

              This can be decoded as

              vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

              ε

              eminusπ|x|2

              dx

              where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

              asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

              be defined (following Minkowski) to be

              volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

              vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

              It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

              20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

              A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

              |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

              where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

              Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

              cradic

              nlogN

              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

              Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

              )n2eminusα|x|

              2 An easy es-

              timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

              micro(Pi) geint 1

              minus1

              radicα

              πeminusαx

              2

              dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

              eminusα

              It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

              radicnα

              By Theorem 191

              micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

              1minus 1radicπα

              eminusα)N

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

              so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

              cradic

              nlogN

              ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

              absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

              παeminusα)Nge c2

              or

              (201) N log

              (1minus 1radic

              παeminusα)ge c3

              for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

              Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

              Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

              logN middot logM ge γn

              for some absolute constant γ gt 0

              Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

              radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

              Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

              nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

              half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

              nlogN

              and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

              of radius rlowast = cradic

              1logM

              Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

              cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

              Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

              In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

              However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

              Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

              Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

              cn

              logN

              )n2vn

              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

              Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

              Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

              volK

              volKge(

              cn

              logN

              )n

              Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

              volK

              volK=

              (volK)2

              volK middot volKge (volK)2

              v2n

              ge(

              cn

              logN

              )n

              where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

              The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

              Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

              h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

              (1 + t)n= 1

              Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

              21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

              We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

              Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

              The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

              Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

              dist(xX) le δ

              In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

              Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

              δkminus1

              Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

              Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

              |X| le kvk4kminus1

              vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

              δkminus1

              here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

              vk = πk2

              Γ(k2+1)

              Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

              radic2

              Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

              2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

              radic2 such that

              the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

              has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

              So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

              2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

              Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

              E sube K suberadicnE

              Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

              radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

              E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

              Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

              1radicnle f(x) le 1

              on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

              Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

              c

              radiclog n

              n

              with some absolute constant c

              See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

              n(this is the

              DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

              Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

              C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

              σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

              128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

              128

              Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

              the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

              128 If in total

              2eminusc2ε2 logn

              128 |X| lt 1

              then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

              k16kminus1

              εkminus1eminus

              c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

              which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

              M equal 1

              x le sumxiisinX

              cixi leradic

              2 maxxiisinXxi le

              radic2(1 + ε8)

              Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

              radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

              (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

              2(1 + ε8)

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

              and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

              radic2(1 + ε8)

              For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

              22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

              It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

              Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

              where x1 xn are the points of X

              Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

              Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

              )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

              (4δ

              )kwe could rotate X

              and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

              This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

              Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

              About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

              Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

              Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

              Q = x21 + x2

              2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

              This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

              On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

              with n = k +(d+kminus1d

              ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

              by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

              d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

              Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

              is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

              (d+kminus1d

              ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

              Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

              minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

              (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

              )

              A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

              Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

              f(x) = f(minusx)

              References

              [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

              [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

              [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

              [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

              [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

              [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

              [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

              [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

              [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

              [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

              [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

              [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

              Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

              Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

              Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

              [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

              [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

              [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

              [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

              [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

              [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

              [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

              [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

              [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

              [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

              [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

              [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

              [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

              [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

              18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

              347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

              2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

              ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

              and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

              bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

              Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

              Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

              dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

              [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

              [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

              [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

              [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

              [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

              [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

              [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

              [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

              [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

              [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

              [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

              [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

              [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

              [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

              [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

              Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

              Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

              Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

              E-mail address r n karasevmailru

              URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

              • 1 Introduction
              • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
              • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
              • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
              • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
              • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
              • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
              • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
              • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
              • 10 Monotone maps
              • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
              • 12 Log-concavity
              • 13 Mixed volumes
              • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
              • 15 Needle decomposition
              • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
              • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
              • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
              • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
              • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
              • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
              • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
              • References

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 8

                number of exceptions) will intersect Z at mostradic|P | times and will intersect at mostradic

                |P | trees of Ti Hence this line will have at most (1 + C1)radic|P | points of intersection

                with Y The lemma is provedNow we apply the lemma once then select a point in every component of Y thus

                obtaining the set P2 with |P2| le 12|P | Then apply the lemma again to P2 pass toanother point set P3 with |P3| le 12|P2| and so on As it was in the proof of Lemma 41in log |P | number of steps we arrive at a connected set X = Y1cupY2cup spanning P Thenumber of crossings of X with a line ` is bounded from above by the sum of a geometricprogression with denominator 2minus12 and the leading term (1 +C1)

                radic|P | so it is bounded

                by Cradic|P | where C is another absolute constant

                The reader is now referred to the review [KMS12] and a more advanced paper of Soly-mosi and Tao [ST12] for other interesting applications of Lemma 41

                7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd

                Lemma 61 of the previous section has interesting applications to estimating the numberof configurations of n points in Rd up to a certain equivalence of relation

                Definition 71 Let x1 xn isin Rd be an ordered set of points We define its order typeto be the assignment of signs

                sgn det(xi1 minus xi0 xid minus xi0)to all (d + 1)-tuples 1 le i0 lt middot middot middot lt id le n The configuration x1 xn is in generalposition if all those determinants are nonzero

                Now we can prove

                Theorem 72 The number of distinct order types for ordered sets of n points in generalposition in Rd is at most nd(d+1)n

                Proof A configuration in general is characterized by nd coordinates of all its points Itsorder type depends on the signs of some

                (nd+1

                )polynomials of degree d each we denote

                the product of these polynomials by P (x1 xn) this polynomial has degree d(nd+1

                )and

                nd variablesIt is obvious that distinct order types of sets in general position must correspond to

                distinct connected components of the zero set of P Hence by Lemma 61 and the remarkabout its affine case we have at most(

                d

                (n

                d+ 1

                ))nd+ 1 le nd(d+1)n

                dnd22

                such connected components and order types

                The above argument comes from the paper [GP86] of Jacob Eli Goodman and RichardPollack After that they easily observe that the number of combinatorially distinct sim-plicial polytopes on n vertices in dimension d is also at most nd(d+1)n The generalizationof this result to possibly not simplicial polytopes and some other improvements can befound in the paper [Alon86] of Noga Alon

                In the case of d = 4 these results bound the number of polytopal triangulations of the3-sphere on n vertices Curiously (see [NW13] and the references therein) it is possible toconstruct much more triangulations of the 3-sphere of n vertices and conclude that mostof them are not coming from any 4-dimensional polytope

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

                8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

                A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

                Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

                Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

                A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

                Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

                ⋃iF

                Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

                product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

                Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

                middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

                Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

                ⋃iF

                Now we prove

                Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

                Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

                Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

                Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

                It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

                Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

                Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

                Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

                Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

                V =

                a0 +

                kminus1sumj=1

                (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

                We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

                We have a natural map

                I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

                As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

                Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

                Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

                The system of 2k minus 2 equations

                g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

                has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

                pisinP

                g(p)f(p) gt 0

                that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

                Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

                Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

                ⋃iF

                The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

                Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

                More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

                Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

                bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

                therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

                to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

                involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

                For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

                9 Partition into prescribed parts

                Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

                Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

                Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

                The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

                Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

                In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

                Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

                Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

                y ge λ1(x) + w1

                y ge λm(x) + wm

                We are going to establish the following fact

                Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

                micro(Ri) = αi

                Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

                Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

                Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

                Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

                0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

                we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

                Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

                It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

                Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

                Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

                Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

                If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

                f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

                which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

                first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

                Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

                Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

                ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

                Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

                10 Monotone maps

                Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

                u(x) = sup1leilem

                (λi(x) + wi)

                has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

                Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

                Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

                there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

                The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

                From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

                (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

                for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

                Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

                C(f) =

                intRn

                〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                V

                u dmicro+

                intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                u(k) = log

                intK

                e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                volK =

                intV lowast

                detDf dk

                This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                of finite volume each then

                vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                vol(A+B) geintA

                detDg dx =

                intA

                det(id +Df(x)) dx

                Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                det(id +Df(x)) ge

                (1 +

                (VBVA

                )1n)n

                and therefore

                vol(A+B) ge

                (1 +

                (VBVA

                )1n)n

                VA =(V

                1nA + V

                1nB

                )n

                which is what we need

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                h

                where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                volnminus1(partA)

                snge(

                volA

                vn

                )nminus1n

                Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                nminus1n v1n

                n

                Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                (volA)nminus1n v1n

                n

                which is equivalent to the required inequality

                Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                Proof Observe that

                A capB supe 1

                2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                vol(Aminus A) le(

                2n

                n

                )volA

                Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                A cap(A+

                1

                2(x1 + x2)

                )supe 1

                2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                Now integrate this over x to obtain

                vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                intAminusA

                vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                ge volA middotintAminusA

                (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                int (1minusx)n

                0

                1 dy dx =

                = volA middotint 1

                0

                intxle1minusy1n

                1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                0

                (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                0

                (1minus y1n)n dy

                Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                0

                (1minus y1n)n dy =

                int 1

                0

                (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                Γ(2n+ 1)=

                =nn(nminus 1)

                (2n)=

                (2n

                n

                )minus1

                Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                12 Log-concavity

                Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                ρ

                (x1 + x2

                2

                )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                )1minust

                middot(int

                Rρ(x2 y) dy

                )tunder the assumption

                ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                Put for brevity

                f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                and also

                F =

                intRf(y) dy G =

                intRg(y) dy H =

                intRh(y) dy

                Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                1

                F

                int y

                minusinfinf(y) dy =

                1

                G

                int ϕ(y)

                minusinfing(y) dy

                It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                H =

                intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                intRh(ψ(y))

                (1minus t+

                tf(y)G

                g(ϕ(y))F

                )dy

                Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                H ge F 1minustGt

                intR

                (f(y)G

                Fg(ϕ(y))

                )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                G+ t

                f(y)

                F

                )dy

                and using the mean inequality(

                (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                + tf(y)F

                )ge(f(y)F

                )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                )1minustwe conclude

                H ge F 1minustGt

                intR

                f(y)

                Fdy = F 1minustGt

                Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                volume we rewrite

                vol(A+B) ge 1

                (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                If fact the inequality

                (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                Then intRn

                h(x) ge(int

                Rn

                f(x) dx

                )1minust

                middot(int

                Rn

                g(y) dy

                )t

                Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                d log f(t) =1

                f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                )

                is log-concave

                Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                We have to prove the inequality

                (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                )

                After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                The general form of (126) is

                (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                13 Mixed volumes

                Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                ui(k) = log

                intK

                e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                xisinK〈p x〉

                Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                h(p K) = h(pK)

                Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                intRn

                det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                P (x) =sumk

                ckxk

                where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                Theorem 133 The system of equations

                P1(x) = 0

                P2(x) = 0

                Pn(x) = 0

                for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                Rn

                f(x) dx middotintRn

                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                f(x) dx middotintRn

                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                Hence intRn

                f(x) dx middotintRn

                g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                g(y)e(zy) dy

                Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                Rn

                g(y) dy leintRn

                g(y)e(zy) dy

                which implies the required inequality

                In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                0

                f(x) dx middotint +infin

                0

                g(y) dy le π

                2

                Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                follows that for any s t isin R

                w

                (s+ t

                2

                )= eminuse

                s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                radicu(s)v(t)

                Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                0

                f(x) dx middotint +infin

                0

                g(y) dy =

                int +infin

                minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                int +infin

                minusinfinv(t) dt le

                le(int +infin

                minusinfinw(r) dr

                )2

                =

                (int +infin

                0

                eminusz22 dz

                )2

                2

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                implies int +infin

                minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                minusinfinf(x) dx =

                int +infin

                0

                f(x) dx = 12

                we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                F (xprime) =

                int +infin

                0

                f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                int +infin

                0

                g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                H

                F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                G(yprime) dyprime le π

                2(2π)nminus1

                SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                BH+

                g(y) dy =

                intH

                G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                Rn

                dist(xH)f(x) dx

                By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                xf(x) dx perp H and

                intH+

                f(x) dxminusintHminus

                f(x) dx = 0

                which is exactly what we need

                Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                + Assume that

                h(radicx1y1

                radicxnyn) ge

                radicf(x)g(y)

                for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                Rn+

                f(x) dx middotintRn+

                g(y) dy le

                (intRn+

                h(z) dz

                )2

                Proof Substitute

                f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                (s+ t

                2

                ))2

                ge f(s)g(t)

                Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                f(s) ds middotintRn

                g(t) dt le(int

                Rn

                h(r) dr

                )2

                that is equivalent to what we need

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                minusAig(y) dy le πn

                It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                volK middot volK le v2n

                where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                22

                and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                Rn

                f(x) dx =

                intRn

                int f(x)

                0

                1 dydx =

                int 1

                0

                volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                for the constant cn =int 1

                0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                Rn

                g(y) dy = cn volK

                It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                (2π)n2 =

                intRn

                eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                Hence

                volK middot volK le (2π)n

                c2n

                = v2n

                It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                volK middot volK ge 4n

                n

                which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                n

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                15 Needle decomposition

                Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                The main result is the following theorem

                Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                micro(Pi)

                micro(Rn)=

                ν(Pi)

                ν(Rn)

                and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                intRn e

                minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                = micro(U) = micro(H)

                The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                Now everything reduces to the following

                Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                2 where

                ν(U) =

                int x

                minusinfineminusπξ

                2

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                radicn in particular the following estimate

                holds

                σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                2

                In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                defined as follows

                U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                volX le v cosn+1 ε

                2= v

                (1minus sin2 ε

                2

                )n+12 le veminus

                (n+1) sin2 ε2

                2

                The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                22

                which implies

                σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                22

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                2

                Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                M

                (ω∆ω)ν =

                intM

                |dω|2ν +

                intM

                |dlowastω|2ν

                where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                M

                f∆fν =

                intM

                |df |2ν

                From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                L20(M) =

                f isin L2(M)

                intM

                fν = 0

                the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                M

                |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                |f |2ν for all f such that

                intM

                fν = 0

                The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                (xy)isinE

                f(x)

                The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                Now we make the following definition

                Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                ν(A) ge micro(A)

                Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                Rn

                f dν geintRn

                f dmicro

                Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                f dν =

                int f(x)

                0

                intRn

                1 dνdy =

                int f(x)

                0

                ν(Cy)dy

                where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                f(x) =

                inty(xy)isinA

                1 dτ

                is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                Now we observe that

                ν times τ(A) =

                intRn

                f(x) dν geintRn

                f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                by Lemma 193

                And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                micro(S)

                is more peaked than micro

                Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                radic2 This result was extended to lower

                values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                This can be decoded as

                vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                ε

                eminusπ|x|2

                dx

                where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                cradic

                nlogN

                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                )n2eminusα|x|

                2 An easy es-

                timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                micro(Pi) geint 1

                minus1

                radicα

                πeminusαx

                2

                dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                eminusα

                It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                radicnα

                By Theorem 191

                micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                1minus 1radicπα

                eminusα)N

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                cradic

                nlogN

                ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                παeminusα)Nge c2

                or

                (201) N log

                (1minus 1radic

                παeminusα)ge c3

                for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                logN middot logM ge γn

                for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                nlogN

                and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                of radius rlowast = cradic

                1logM

                Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                cn

                logN

                )n2vn

                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                volK

                volKge(

                cn

                logN

                )n

                Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                volK

                volK=

                (volK)2

                volK middot volKge (volK)2

                v2n

                ge(

                cn

                logN

                )n

                where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                (1 + t)n= 1

                Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                dist(xX) le δ

                In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                δkminus1

                Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                |X| le kvk4kminus1

                vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                δkminus1

                here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                vk = πk2

                Γ(k2+1)

                Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                radic2

                Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                radic2 such that

                the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                E sube K suberadicnE

                Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                1radicnle f(x) le 1

                on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                c

                radiclog n

                n

                with some absolute constant c

                See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                n(this is the

                DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                128

                Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                128 If in total

                2eminusc2ε2 logn

                128 |X| lt 1

                then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                k16kminus1

                εkminus1eminus

                c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                M equal 1

                x le sumxiisinX

                cixi leradic

                2 maxxiisinXxi le

                radic2(1 + ε8)

                Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                2(1 + ε8)

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                radic2(1 + ε8)

                For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                where x1 xn are the points of X

                Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                (4δ

                )kwe could rotate X

                and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                Q = x21 + x2

                2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                (d+kminus1d

                ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                )

                A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                f(x) = f(minusx)

                References

                [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                • 1 Introduction
                • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                • 10 Monotone maps
                • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                • 12 Log-concavity
                • 13 Mixed volumes
                • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                • 15 Needle decomposition
                • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                • References

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 9

                  8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals

                  A wide range of applications of the appropriately generalized BorsukndashUlam theoremstarted when Laszlo Lovasz proved [Lov78] an estimate on the chromatic number of acertain graph known as the Kneser conjecture Let us give some definitions we denotethe segment of integers 1 n by [n]

                  Definition 81 Let G = (VE) be a graph with vertices V and edges E Its chromaticnumber χ(G) is the minimum number χ such that there exists a map V rarr [χ] sendingevery edge e isin E to two distinct numbers (colors)

                  Definition 82 The Kneser graph K(n k) has all k-element subsets of [n] as the sets ofvertices V and two vertices X1 X2 isin V form an edge if they are disjoint as subsets of [n]

                  A simple argument left as an exercise to the reader shows that it is possible to colorK(n k) in n minus 2k + 2 colors in a regular way The opposite bound χ(K(n k)) ge n minus2k + 2 was much harder to establish In order to prove it we follow the approach ofDolrsquonikov [Dol94] and first prove the hyperplane transversal theorem

                  Theorem 83 Let F1 Fn be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that ev-ery two sets CC prime from the same family Fi have a common point Then there exists ahyperplane H intersecting all the sets of

                  ⋃iF

                  Proof For every normal direction ν every set C isin⋃iF gives a segment of values of the

                  product ν middot x for x isin C For a given family Fi all these segments intersect pairwise andtherefore have a common point of intersection Let this point be di In other words allsets of Fi intersect the hyperplane

                  Hi(n) = x ν middot x = diActually the values di can be chosen to depend continuously on ν (if we choose the

                  middle of all candidates for example) and by definition they are also odd functions of nThe combinations d2 minus d1 dn minus d1 make an odd map Snminus1 rarr Rnminus1 which must takethe zero value according to the BorsukndashUlam theorem

                  Hence for some direction ν we can put d1 = d2 = middot middot middot = dn and the correspondinghyperplane will intersect all members of the family

                  ⋃iF

                  Now we prove

                  Theorem 84 Let n ge 2k For the Kneser graph we have χ(K(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

                  Proof The upper bounds is already mentioned so we prove the lower bound Assumethe contrary and consider a coloring of the graph in nminus 2k + 1 or less colors

                  Put the n vertices of the underlying set (from Definition 82) as a general position finitepoint set X in Rnminus2k+1 For any color i = 1 nminus2k+1 let Fi consist of all convex hullsof the k-element subsets of X that correspond to the ith color of the coloring of K(n k)Since the coloring is proper any two k-element subsets of X with the same color have acommon point and therefore these families Fi satisfy the assumptions of Theorem 83

                  Hence there is a hyperplane H touching every convex hull of every k-element subsetof X But this is impossible H can contain itself at most n minus 2k + 1 points of X fromthe general position assumption of 2k minus 1 remaining points some k must lie on one sideof H and therefore the convex hull of this k-tuple is not intersected by H This is acontradiction

                  It is in fact possible to find a much smaller induced subgraph of K(n k) having thesame chromatic number

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

                  Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

                  Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

                  Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

                  Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

                  V =

                  a0 +

                  kminus1sumj=1

                  (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

                  We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

                  We have a natural map

                  I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

                  As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

                  Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

                  Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

                  The system of 2k minus 2 equations

                  g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

                  has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

                  pisinP

                  g(p)f(p) gt 0

                  that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

                  Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

                  Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

                  ⋃iF

                  The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

                  Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

                  More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

                  Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

                  bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

                  therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

                  to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

                  involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

                  For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

                  9 Partition into prescribed parts

                  Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

                  Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

                  Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

                  The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

                  Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

                  In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

                  Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

                  Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

                  y ge λ1(x) + w1

                  y ge λm(x) + wm

                  We are going to establish the following fact

                  Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

                  micro(Ri) = αi

                  Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

                  Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

                  Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

                  Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

                  0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

                  we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

                  Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

                  It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

                  Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

                  Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

                  Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

                  If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

                  f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

                  which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

                  first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

                  Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

                  Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

                  ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

                  Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

                  10 Monotone maps

                  Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

                  u(x) = sup1leilem

                  (λi(x) + wi)

                  has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

                  Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

                  Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

                  there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

                  The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

                  From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

                  (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

                  for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

                  Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

                  C(f) =

                  intRn

                  〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                  Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                  V

                  u dmicro+

                  intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                  In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                  u(k) = log

                  intK

                  e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                  It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                  volK =

                  intV lowast

                  detDf dk

                  This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                  11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                  An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                  Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                  of finite volume each then

                  vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                  where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                  Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                  Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                  vol(A+B) geintA

                  detDg dx =

                  intA

                  det(id +Df(x)) dx

                  Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                  det(id +Df(x)) ge

                  (1 +

                  (VBVA

                  )1n)n

                  and therefore

                  vol(A+B) ge

                  (1 +

                  (VBVA

                  )1n)n

                  VA =(V

                  1nA + V

                  1nB

                  )n

                  which is what we need

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                  The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                  volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                  vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                  h

                  where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                  Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                  volnminus1(partA)

                  snge(

                  volA

                  vn

                  )nminus1n

                  Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                  vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                  and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                  nminus1n v1n

                  n

                  Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                  volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                  (volA)nminus1n v1n

                  n

                  which is equivalent to the required inequality

                  Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                  For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                  Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                  Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                  Proof Observe that

                  A capB supe 1

                  2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                  then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                  Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                  vol(Aminus A) le(

                  2n

                  n

                  )volA

                  Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                  When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                  A cap(A+

                  1

                  2(x1 + x2)

                  )supe 1

                  2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                  Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                  vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                  Now integrate this over x to obtain

                  vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                  intAminusA

                  vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                  ge volA middotintAminusA

                  (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                  int (1minusx)n

                  0

                  1 dy dx =

                  = volA middotint 1

                  0

                  intxle1minusy1n

                  1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                  0

                  (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                  = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                  0

                  (1minus y1n)n dy

                  Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                  0

                  (1minus y1n)n dy =

                  int 1

                  0

                  (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                  Γ(2n+ 1)=

                  =nn(nminus 1)

                  (2n)=

                  (2n

                  n

                  )minus1

                  Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                  12 Log-concavity

                  Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                  The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                  (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                  Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                  ρ

                  (x1 + x2

                  2

                  )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                  The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                  Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                  After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                  Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                  Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                  Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                  (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                  )1minust

                  middot(int

                  Rρ(x2 y) dy

                  )tunder the assumption

                  ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                  Put for brevity

                  f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                  and also

                  F =

                  intRf(y) dy G =

                  intRg(y) dy H =

                  intRh(y) dy

                  Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                  1

                  F

                  int y

                  minusinfinf(y) dy =

                  1

                  G

                  int ϕ(y)

                  minusinfing(y) dy

                  It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                  As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                  therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                  H =

                  intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                  intRh(ψ(y))

                  (1minus t+

                  tf(y)G

                  g(ϕ(y))F

                  )dy

                  Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                  H ge F 1minustGt

                  intR

                  (f(y)G

                  Fg(ϕ(y))

                  )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                  G+ t

                  f(y)

                  F

                  )dy

                  and using the mean inequality(

                  (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                  + tf(y)F

                  )ge(f(y)F

                  )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                  )1minustwe conclude

                  H ge F 1minustGt

                  intR

                  f(y)

                  Fdy = F 1minustGt

                  Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                  Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                  vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                  this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                  1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                  volume we rewrite

                  vol(A+B) ge 1

                  (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                  The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                  If fact the inequality

                  (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                  holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                  Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                  Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                  h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                  Then intRn

                  h(x) ge(int

                  Rn

                  f(x) dx

                  )1minust

                  middot(int

                  Rn

                  g(y) dy

                  )t

                  Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                  Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                  Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                  Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                  (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                  Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                  A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                  Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                  Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                  Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                  (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                  hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                  standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                  d log f(t) =1

                  f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                  where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                  Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                  (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                  there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                  It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                  The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                  In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                  In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                  Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                  vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                  )

                  is log-concave

                  Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                  We have to prove the inequality

                  (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                  )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                  ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                  )

                  After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                  (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                  By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                  The general form of (126) is

                  (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                  which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                  13 Mixed volumes

                  Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                  Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                  vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                  for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                  Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                  ui(k) = log

                  intK

                  e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                  where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                  f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                  is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                  map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                  We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                  h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                  xisinK〈p x〉

                  Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                  〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                  when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                  h(p K) = h(pK)

                  Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                  (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                  intRn

                  det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                  Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                  Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                  Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                  MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                  It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                  It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                  P (x) =sumk

                  ckxk

                  where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                  N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                  Theorem 133 The system of equations

                  P1(x) = 0

                  P2(x) = 0

                  Pn(x) = 0

                  for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                  In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                  We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                  14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                  We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                  Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                  f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                  for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                  intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                  Rn

                  f(x) dx middotintRn

                  g(y) dy le (2π)n

                  We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                  Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                  there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                  f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                  for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                  f(x) dx middotintRn

                  g(y) dy le (2π)n

                  Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                  Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                  f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                  Hence intRn

                  f(x) dx middotintRn

                  g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                  Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                  g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                  g(y)e(zy) dy

                  Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                  Rn

                  g(y) dy leintRn

                  g(y)e(zy) dy

                  which implies the required inequality

                  In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                  Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                  0

                  f(x) dx middotint +infin

                  0

                  g(y) dy le π

                  2

                  Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                  follows that for any s t isin R

                  w

                  (s+ t

                  2

                  )= eminuse

                  s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                  radicu(s)v(t)

                  Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                  0

                  f(x) dx middotint +infin

                  0

                  g(y) dy =

                  int +infin

                  minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                  int +infin

                  minusinfinv(t) dt le

                  le(int +infin

                  minusinfinw(r) dr

                  )2

                  =

                  (int +infin

                  0

                  eminusz22 dz

                  )2

                  2

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                  Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                  1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                  The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                  f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                  implies int +infin

                  minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                  But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                  minusinfinf(x) dx =

                  int +infin

                  0

                  f(x) dx = 12

                  we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                  partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                  and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                  also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                  Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                  so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                  F (xprime) =

                  int +infin

                  0

                  f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                  int +infin

                  0

                  g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                  From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                  selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                  f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                  = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                  We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                  F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                  2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                  Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                  intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                  H

                  F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                  G(yprime) dyprime le π

                  2(2π)nminus1

                  SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                  BH+

                  g(y) dy =

                  intH

                  G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                  Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                  g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                  and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                  g(y) dy le (2π)n

                  Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                  Rn

                  dist(xH)f(x) dx

                  By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                  xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                  xf(x) dx perp H and

                  intH+

                  f(x) dxminusintHminus

                  f(x) dx = 0

                  which is exactly what we need

                  Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                  characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                  i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                  Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                  + Assume that

                  h(radicx1y1

                  radicxnyn) ge

                  radicf(x)g(y)

                  for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                  Rn+

                  f(x) dx middotintRn+

                  g(y) dy le

                  (intRn+

                  h(z) dz

                  )2

                  Proof Substitute

                  f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                  g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                  h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                  It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                  (s+ t

                  2

                  ))2

                  ge f(s)g(t)

                  Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                  f(s) ds middotintRn

                  g(t) dt le(int

                  Rn

                  h(r) dr

                  )2

                  that is equivalent to what we need

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                  Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                  minusAig(y) dy le πn

                  It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                  Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                  K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                  volK middot volK le v2n

                  where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                  Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                  The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                  (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                  f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                  22

                  and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                  22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                  Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                  Rn

                  f(x) dx =

                  intRn

                  int f(x)

                  0

                  1 dydx =

                  int 1

                  0

                  volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                  for the constant cn =int 1

                  0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                  Rn

                  g(y) dy = cn volK

                  It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                  (2π)n2 =

                  intRn

                  eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                  Hence

                  volK middot volK le (2π)n

                  c2n

                  = v2n

                  It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                  volK middot volK ge 4n

                  n

                  which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                  (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                  n

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                  15 Needle decomposition

                  Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                  The main result is the following theorem

                  Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                  micro(Pi)

                  micro(Rn)=

                  ν(Pi)

                  ν(Rn)

                  and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                  A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                  Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                  The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                  Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                  Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                  The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                  appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                  There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                  16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                  Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                  2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                  intRn e

                  minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                  Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                  Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                  micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                  Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                  So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                  Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                  micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                  = micro(U) = micro(H)

                  The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                  ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                  It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                  Now everything reduces to the following

                  Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                  and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                  ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                  The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                  primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                  into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                  (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                  2 where

                  ν(U) =

                  int x

                  minusinfineminusπξ

                  2

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                  17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                  It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                  Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                  σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                  This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                  Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                  2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                  nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                  the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                  centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                  Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                  radicn in particular the following estimate

                  holds

                  σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                  2

                  In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                  Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                  defined as follows

                  U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                  volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                  Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                  with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                  volX le v cosn+1 ε

                  2= v

                  (1minus sin2 ε

                  2

                  )n+12 le veminus

                  (n+1) sin2 ε2

                  2

                  The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                  vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                  22

                  which implies

                  σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                  22

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                  A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                  Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                  σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                  2

                  Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                  Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                  18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                  There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                  First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                  ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                  where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                  M

                  (ω∆ω)ν =

                  intM

                  |dω|2ν +

                  intM

                  |dlowastω|2ν

                  where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                  M

                  f∆fν =

                  intM

                  |df |2ν

                  From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                  L20(M) =

                  f isin L2(M)

                  intM

                  fν = 0

                  the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                  0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                  0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                  M

                  |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                  |f |2ν for all f such that

                  intM

                  fν = 0

                  The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                  It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                  One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                  |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                  ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                  (xy)isinE

                  f(x)

                  The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                  Now we make the following definition

                  Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                  Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                  First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                  Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                  19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                  Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                  Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                  micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                  The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                  The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                  Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                  ν(A) ge micro(A)

                  Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                  Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                  Rn

                  f dν geintRn

                  f dmicro

                  Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                  f dν =

                  int f(x)

                  0

                  intRn

                  1 dνdy =

                  int f(x)

                  0

                  ν(Cy)dy

                  where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                  Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                  Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                  f(x) =

                  inty(xy)isinA

                  1 dτ

                  is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                  Now we observe that

                  ν times τ(A) =

                  intRn

                  f(x) dν geintRn

                  f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                  by Lemma 193

                  And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                  Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                  ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                  micro(S)

                  is more peaked than micro

                  Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                  Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                  Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                  Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                  Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                  radic2 This result was extended to lower

                  values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                  Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                  2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                  one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                  Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                  ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                  This can be decoded as

                  vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                  ε

                  eminusπ|x|2

                  dx

                  where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                  asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                  be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                  volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                  vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                  It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                  20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                  A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                  |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                  where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                  Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                  cradic

                  nlogN

                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                  Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                  )n2eminusα|x|

                  2 An easy es-

                  timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                  micro(Pi) geint 1

                  minus1

                  radicα

                  πeminusαx

                  2

                  dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                  eminusα

                  It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                  radicnα

                  By Theorem 191

                  micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                  1minus 1radicπα

                  eminusα)N

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                  so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                  cradic

                  nlogN

                  ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                  absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                  παeminusα)Nge c2

                  or

                  (201) N log

                  (1minus 1radic

                  παeminusα)ge c3

                  for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                  Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                  Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                  logN middot logM ge γn

                  for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                  Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                  radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                  Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                  nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                  half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                  nlogN

                  and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                  of radius rlowast = cradic

                  1logM

                  Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                  cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                  Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                  In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                  However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                  Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                  Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                  cn

                  logN

                  )n2vn

                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                  Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                  Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                  volK

                  volKge(

                  cn

                  logN

                  )n

                  Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                  volK

                  volK=

                  (volK)2

                  volK middot volKge (volK)2

                  v2n

                  ge(

                  cn

                  logN

                  )n

                  where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                  The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                  Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                  h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                  (1 + t)n= 1

                  Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                  21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                  We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                  Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                  The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                  Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                  dist(xX) le δ

                  In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                  Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                  δkminus1

                  Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                  Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                  |X| le kvk4kminus1

                  vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                  δkminus1

                  here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                  vk = πk2

                  Γ(k2+1)

                  Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                  radic2

                  Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                  2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                  radic2 such that

                  the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                  has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                  So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                  2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                  Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                  E sube K suberadicnE

                  Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                  radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                  E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                  Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                  1radicnle f(x) le 1

                  on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                  Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                  c

                  radiclog n

                  n

                  with some absolute constant c

                  See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                  n(this is the

                  DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                  Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                  C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                  σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                  128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                  128

                  Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                  the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                  128 If in total

                  2eminusc2ε2 logn

                  128 |X| lt 1

                  then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                  k16kminus1

                  εkminus1eminus

                  c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                  which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                  M equal 1

                  x le sumxiisinX

                  cixi leradic

                  2 maxxiisinXxi le

                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                  Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                  radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                  (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                  2(1 + ε8)

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                  and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                  For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                  22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                  It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                  Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                  where x1 xn are the points of X

                  Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                  Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                  )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                  (4δ

                  )kwe could rotate X

                  and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                  This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                  Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                  About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                  Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                  Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                  Q = x21 + x2

                  2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                  This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                  On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                  with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                  ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                  by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                  d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                  Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                  is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                  (d+kminus1d

                  ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                  Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                  minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                  (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                  )

                  A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                  Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                  f(x) = f(minusx)

                  References

                  [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                  [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                  [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                  [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                  [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                  [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                  [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                  [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                  [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                  [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                  [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                  [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                  Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                  Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                  Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                  [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                  [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                  [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                  [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                  [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                  [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                  [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                  [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                  [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                  [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                  [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                  [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                  [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                  [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                  18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                  347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                  2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                  ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                  and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                  bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                  Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                  Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                  dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                  [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                  [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                  [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                  [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                  [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                  [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                  [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                  [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                  [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                  [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                  [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                  [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                  [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                  [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                  [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                  Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                  Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                  Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                  E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                  URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                  • 1 Introduction
                  • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                  • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                  • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                  • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                  • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                  • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                  • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                  • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                  • 10 Monotone maps
                  • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                  • 12 Log-concavity
                  • 13 Mixed volumes
                  • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                  • 15 Needle decomposition
                  • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                  • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                  • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                  • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                  • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                  • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                  • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                  • References

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 10

                    Definition 85 Assume the ground set of n elements is arranged in a circle Its subset iscalled a Schrijver subset if it contains no two consecutive elements in the circular orderThe Schrijver graph S(n k) is a the subgraph of K(n k) induced on Schrijver sets

                    Theorem 86 Let n ge 2k For the Schrijver graph we have χ(S(n k)) = nminus 2k + 2

                    Proof We still need to use Dolnikovrsquos hyperplane transversal theorem but in a moresophisticated manner

                    Let the ground set X = [n] be identified with a subset of the circle S1 = R2πZ LetV be the space of trigonometric polynomials of order le k minus 1

                    V =

                    a0 +

                    kminus1sumj=1

                    (aj cos jx+ bj sin jx)

                    We will consider the restriction of functions on the circle S1 to the set X the set of allfunctions f X rarr R is then naturally identified with Rn A nonzero function in V cannothave more than 2kminus2 zeros in the circle and therefore its restriction to X is also nonzeroHence we may assume that V sub Rn and dimV = 2k minus 1 Let W be the orthogonalcomplement of V in Rn thus dimW = nminus 2k + 1

                    We have a natural map

                    I P rarr W lowast p 7rarr (f 7rarr f(p))

                    As in the proof of Theorem 84 we assume a coloring of the Schrijver k-tuples in nminus2k+1colors so that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect The images of the k-tuplesunder I have the property that every two k-tuples of the same color intersect and thenumber of colors equals the dimension of W lowast By Theorem 83 there exists a hyperplanein W lowast that intersects all the convex hulls of images of Schrijver k-tuples It is given bythe equation f = a where f isin (W lowast)lowast = W

                    Without loss of generality assume a ge 0 Look at the elements of X whose imageunder I lies in the halfspace f lt a we want to find a Schrijver k-tuple of such elementscontradicting the fact that f = a intersects all the convex hulls of Schrijver k-tuplesIn fact we will be done if we find a Schrijver k-tuple of the elements of X where f lt 0

                    Consider the subset N = p isin X f(p) lt 0 If this subset consists of at least ksegments of consecutive points (in the circular order) then we can take a point from eachsegment and they will make a Schrijver k-tuple Otherwise it is possible to have preciselykminus1 segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] of the circle with endpoints not in X such that thepoints of X in these segments are precisely the points of N (some segments may containno point from X and are added just to have k minus 1 segments in total)

                    The system of 2k minus 2 equations

                    g(u1) = g(v1) = middot middot middot = g(ukminus1) = g(vkminus1) = 0

                    has a nonzero solution in V since dimV gt 2kminus 2 Since g cannot have more than 2kminus 2zeros it only changes sign at the points ui vi Hence we may choose g positive outsidethe union of the segments [u1 v1] [ukminus1 vkminus1] and negative inside the segments Bythe definition of N the product g(p)f(p) is non-negative on X and is positive on N Incase N = empty the product must also be positive on some point p isin X since f represents anonzero element of W In any casesum

                    pisinP

                    g(p)f(p) gt 0

                    that contradicts the orthogonality of g isin V and f isin W

                    Theorem 83 can also be generalized the following way

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

                    Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

                    ⋃iF

                    The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

                    Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

                    More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

                    Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

                    bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

                    therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

                    to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

                    involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

                    For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

                    9 Partition into prescribed parts

                    Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

                    Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

                    Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

                    The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

                    Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

                    In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

                    Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

                    Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

                    y ge λ1(x) + w1

                    y ge λm(x) + wm

                    We are going to establish the following fact

                    Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

                    micro(Ri) = αi

                    Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

                    Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

                    Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

                    Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

                    0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

                    we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

                    Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

                    It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

                    Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

                    Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

                    Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

                    If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

                    f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

                    which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

                    first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

                    Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

                    Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

                    ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

                    Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

                    10 Monotone maps

                    Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

                    u(x) = sup1leilem

                    (λi(x) + wi)

                    has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

                    Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

                    Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

                    there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

                    The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

                    From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

                    (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

                    for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

                    Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

                    C(f) =

                    intRn

                    〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                    Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                    V

                    u dmicro+

                    intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                    In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                    u(k) = log

                    intK

                    e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                    It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                    volK =

                    intV lowast

                    detDf dk

                    This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                    11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                    An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                    Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                    of finite volume each then

                    vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                    where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                    Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                    Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                    vol(A+B) geintA

                    detDg dx =

                    intA

                    det(id +Df(x)) dx

                    Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                    det(id +Df(x)) ge

                    (1 +

                    (VBVA

                    )1n)n

                    and therefore

                    vol(A+B) ge

                    (1 +

                    (VBVA

                    )1n)n

                    VA =(V

                    1nA + V

                    1nB

                    )n

                    which is what we need

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                    The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                    volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                    vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                    h

                    where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                    Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                    volnminus1(partA)

                    snge(

                    volA

                    vn

                    )nminus1n

                    Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                    vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                    and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                    nminus1n v1n

                    n

                    Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                    volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                    (volA)nminus1n v1n

                    n

                    which is equivalent to the required inequality

                    Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                    For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                    Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                    Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                    Proof Observe that

                    A capB supe 1

                    2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                    then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                    Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                    vol(Aminus A) le(

                    2n

                    n

                    )volA

                    Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                    When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                    A cap(A+

                    1

                    2(x1 + x2)

                    )supe 1

                    2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                    Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                    vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                    Now integrate this over x to obtain

                    vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                    intAminusA

                    vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                    ge volA middotintAminusA

                    (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                    int (1minusx)n

                    0

                    1 dy dx =

                    = volA middotint 1

                    0

                    intxle1minusy1n

                    1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                    0

                    (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                    = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                    0

                    (1minus y1n)n dy

                    Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                    0

                    (1minus y1n)n dy =

                    int 1

                    0

                    (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                    Γ(2n+ 1)=

                    =nn(nminus 1)

                    (2n)=

                    (2n

                    n

                    )minus1

                    Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                    12 Log-concavity

                    Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                    The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                    (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                    Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                    ρ

                    (x1 + x2

                    2

                    )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                    The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                    Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                    After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                    Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                    Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                    Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                    (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                    )1minust

                    middot(int

                    Rρ(x2 y) dy

                    )tunder the assumption

                    ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                    Put for brevity

                    f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                    and also

                    F =

                    intRf(y) dy G =

                    intRg(y) dy H =

                    intRh(y) dy

                    Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                    1

                    F

                    int y

                    minusinfinf(y) dy =

                    1

                    G

                    int ϕ(y)

                    minusinfing(y) dy

                    It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                    As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                    therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                    H =

                    intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                    intRh(ψ(y))

                    (1minus t+

                    tf(y)G

                    g(ϕ(y))F

                    )dy

                    Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                    H ge F 1minustGt

                    intR

                    (f(y)G

                    Fg(ϕ(y))

                    )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                    G+ t

                    f(y)

                    F

                    )dy

                    and using the mean inequality(

                    (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                    + tf(y)F

                    )ge(f(y)F

                    )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                    )1minustwe conclude

                    H ge F 1minustGt

                    intR

                    f(y)

                    Fdy = F 1minustGt

                    Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                    Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                    vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                    this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                    1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                    volume we rewrite

                    vol(A+B) ge 1

                    (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                    The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                    If fact the inequality

                    (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                    holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                    Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                    Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                    h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                    Then intRn

                    h(x) ge(int

                    Rn

                    f(x) dx

                    )1minust

                    middot(int

                    Rn

                    g(y) dy

                    )t

                    Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                    Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                    Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                    Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                    (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                    Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                    A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                    Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                    Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                    Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                    (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                    hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                    standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                    d log f(t) =1

                    f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                    where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                    Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                    (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                    there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                    It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                    The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                    In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                    In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                    Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                    vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                    )

                    is log-concave

                    Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                    We have to prove the inequality

                    (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                    )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                    ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                    )

                    After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                    (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                    By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                    The general form of (126) is

                    (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                    which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                    13 Mixed volumes

                    Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                    Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                    vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                    for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                    Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                    ui(k) = log

                    intK

                    e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                    where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                    f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                    is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                    map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                    We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                    h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                    xisinK〈p x〉

                    Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                    〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                    when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                    h(p K) = h(pK)

                    Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                    (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                    intRn

                    det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                    Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                    Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                    Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                    MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                    It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                    It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                    P (x) =sumk

                    ckxk

                    where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                    N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                    Theorem 133 The system of equations

                    P1(x) = 0

                    P2(x) = 0

                    Pn(x) = 0

                    for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                    In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                    We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                    14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                    We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                    Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                    f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                    for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                    intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                    Rn

                    f(x) dx middotintRn

                    g(y) dy le (2π)n

                    We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                    Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                    there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                    f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                    for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                    f(x) dx middotintRn

                    g(y) dy le (2π)n

                    Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                    Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                    f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                    Hence intRn

                    f(x) dx middotintRn

                    g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                    Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                    g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                    g(y)e(zy) dy

                    Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                    Rn

                    g(y) dy leintRn

                    g(y)e(zy) dy

                    which implies the required inequality

                    In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                    Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                    0

                    f(x) dx middotint +infin

                    0

                    g(y) dy le π

                    2

                    Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                    follows that for any s t isin R

                    w

                    (s+ t

                    2

                    )= eminuse

                    s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                    radicu(s)v(t)

                    Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                    0

                    f(x) dx middotint +infin

                    0

                    g(y) dy =

                    int +infin

                    minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                    int +infin

                    minusinfinv(t) dt le

                    le(int +infin

                    minusinfinw(r) dr

                    )2

                    =

                    (int +infin

                    0

                    eminusz22 dz

                    )2

                    2

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                    Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                    1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                    The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                    f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                    implies int +infin

                    minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                    But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                    minusinfinf(x) dx =

                    int +infin

                    0

                    f(x) dx = 12

                    we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                    partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                    and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                    also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                    Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                    so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                    F (xprime) =

                    int +infin

                    0

                    f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                    int +infin

                    0

                    g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                    From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                    selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                    f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                    = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                    We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                    F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                    2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                    Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                    intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                    H

                    F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                    G(yprime) dyprime le π

                    2(2π)nminus1

                    SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                    BH+

                    g(y) dy =

                    intH

                    G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                    Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                    g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                    and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                    g(y) dy le (2π)n

                    Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                    Rn

                    dist(xH)f(x) dx

                    By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                    xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                    xf(x) dx perp H and

                    intH+

                    f(x) dxminusintHminus

                    f(x) dx = 0

                    which is exactly what we need

                    Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                    characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                    i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                    Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                    + Assume that

                    h(radicx1y1

                    radicxnyn) ge

                    radicf(x)g(y)

                    for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                    Rn+

                    f(x) dx middotintRn+

                    g(y) dy le

                    (intRn+

                    h(z) dz

                    )2

                    Proof Substitute

                    f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                    g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                    h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                    It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                    (s+ t

                    2

                    ))2

                    ge f(s)g(t)

                    Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                    f(s) ds middotintRn

                    g(t) dt le(int

                    Rn

                    h(r) dr

                    )2

                    that is equivalent to what we need

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                    Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                    minusAig(y) dy le πn

                    It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                    Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                    K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                    volK middot volK le v2n

                    where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                    Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                    The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                    (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                    f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                    22

                    and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                    22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                    Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                    Rn

                    f(x) dx =

                    intRn

                    int f(x)

                    0

                    1 dydx =

                    int 1

                    0

                    volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                    for the constant cn =int 1

                    0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                    Rn

                    g(y) dy = cn volK

                    It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                    (2π)n2 =

                    intRn

                    eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                    Hence

                    volK middot volK le (2π)n

                    c2n

                    = v2n

                    It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                    volK middot volK ge 4n

                    n

                    which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                    (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                    n

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                    15 Needle decomposition

                    Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                    The main result is the following theorem

                    Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                    micro(Pi)

                    micro(Rn)=

                    ν(Pi)

                    ν(Rn)

                    and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                    A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                    Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                    The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                    Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                    Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                    The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                    appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                    There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                    16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                    Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                    2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                    intRn e

                    minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                    Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                    Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                    micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                    Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                    So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                    Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                    micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                    = micro(U) = micro(H)

                    The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                    ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                    It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                    Now everything reduces to the following

                    Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                    and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                    ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                    The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                    primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                    into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                    (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                    2 where

                    ν(U) =

                    int x

                    minusinfineminusπξ

                    2

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                    17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                    It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                    Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                    σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                    This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                    Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                    2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                    nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                    the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                    centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                    Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                    radicn in particular the following estimate

                    holds

                    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                    2

                    In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                    Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                    defined as follows

                    U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                    volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                    Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                    with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                    volX le v cosn+1 ε

                    2= v

                    (1minus sin2 ε

                    2

                    )n+12 le veminus

                    (n+1) sin2 ε2

                    2

                    The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                    vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                    22

                    which implies

                    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                    22

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                    A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                    Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                    σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                    2

                    Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                    Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                    18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                    There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                    First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                    ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                    where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                    M

                    (ω∆ω)ν =

                    intM

                    |dω|2ν +

                    intM

                    |dlowastω|2ν

                    where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                    M

                    f∆fν =

                    intM

                    |df |2ν

                    From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                    L20(M) =

                    f isin L2(M)

                    intM

                    fν = 0

                    the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                    0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                    0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                    M

                    |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                    |f |2ν for all f such that

                    intM

                    fν = 0

                    The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                    It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                    One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                    |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                    ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                    (xy)isinE

                    f(x)

                    The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                    Now we make the following definition

                    Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                    Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                    First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                    Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                    19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                    Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                    Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                    micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                    The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                    The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                    Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                    ν(A) ge micro(A)

                    Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                    Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                    Rn

                    f dν geintRn

                    f dmicro

                    Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                    f dν =

                    int f(x)

                    0

                    intRn

                    1 dνdy =

                    int f(x)

                    0

                    ν(Cy)dy

                    where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                    Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                    Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                    f(x) =

                    inty(xy)isinA

                    1 dτ

                    is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                    Now we observe that

                    ν times τ(A) =

                    intRn

                    f(x) dν geintRn

                    f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                    by Lemma 193

                    And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                    Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                    ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                    micro(S)

                    is more peaked than micro

                    Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                    Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                    Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                    Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                    Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                    radic2 This result was extended to lower

                    values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                    Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                    2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                    one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                    Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                    ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                    This can be decoded as

                    vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                    ε

                    eminusπ|x|2

                    dx

                    where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                    asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                    be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                    volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                    vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                    It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                    20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                    A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                    |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                    where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                    Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                    cradic

                    nlogN

                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                    Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                    )n2eminusα|x|

                    2 An easy es-

                    timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                    micro(Pi) geint 1

                    minus1

                    radicα

                    πeminusαx

                    2

                    dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                    eminusα

                    It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                    radicnα

                    By Theorem 191

                    micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                    1minus 1radicπα

                    eminusα)N

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                    so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                    cradic

                    nlogN

                    ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                    absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                    παeminusα)Nge c2

                    or

                    (201) N log

                    (1minus 1radic

                    παeminusα)ge c3

                    for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                    Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                    Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                    logN middot logM ge γn

                    for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                    Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                    radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                    Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                    nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                    half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                    nlogN

                    and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                    of radius rlowast = cradic

                    1logM

                    Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                    cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                    Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                    In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                    However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                    Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                    Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                    cn

                    logN

                    )n2vn

                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                    Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                    Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                    volK

                    volKge(

                    cn

                    logN

                    )n

                    Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                    volK

                    volK=

                    (volK)2

                    volK middot volKge (volK)2

                    v2n

                    ge(

                    cn

                    logN

                    )n

                    where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                    The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                    Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                    h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                    (1 + t)n= 1

                    Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                    21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                    We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                    Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                    The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                    Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                    dist(xX) le δ

                    In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                    Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                    δkminus1

                    Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                    Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                    |X| le kvk4kminus1

                    vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                    δkminus1

                    here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                    vk = πk2

                    Γ(k2+1)

                    Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                    radic2

                    Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                    2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                    radic2 such that

                    the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                    has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                    So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                    2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                    Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                    E sube K suberadicnE

                    Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                    radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                    E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                    Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                    1radicnle f(x) le 1

                    on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                    Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                    c

                    radiclog n

                    n

                    with some absolute constant c

                    See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                    n(this is the

                    DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                    Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                    C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                    σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                    128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                    128

                    Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                    the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                    128 If in total

                    2eminusc2ε2 logn

                    128 |X| lt 1

                    then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                    k16kminus1

                    εkminus1eminus

                    c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                    which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                    M equal 1

                    x le sumxiisinX

                    cixi leradic

                    2 maxxiisinXxi le

                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                    Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                    radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                    (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                    2(1 + ε8)

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                    and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                    For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                    22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                    It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                    Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                    where x1 xn are the points of X

                    Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                    Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                    )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                    (4δ

                    )kwe could rotate X

                    and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                    This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                    Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                    About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                    Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                    Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                    Q = x21 + x2

                    2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                    This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                    On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                    with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                    ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                    by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                    d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                    Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                    is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                    (d+kminus1d

                    ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                    Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                    minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                    (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                    )

                    A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                    Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                    f(x) = f(minusx)

                    References

                    [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                    [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                    [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                    [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                    [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                    [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                    [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                    [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                    [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                    [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                    [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                    [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                    Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                    Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                    Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                    [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                    [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                    [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                    [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                    [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                    [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                    [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                    [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                    [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                    [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                    [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                    [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                    [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                    [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                    18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                    347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                    2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                    ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                    and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                    bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                    Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                    Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                    dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                    [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                    [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                    [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                    [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                    [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                    [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                    [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                    [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                    [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                    [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                    [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                    [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                    [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                    [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                    [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                    Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                    Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                    Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                    E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                    URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                    • 1 Introduction
                    • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                    • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                    • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                    • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                    • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                    • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                    • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                    • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                    • 10 Monotone maps
                    • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                    • 12 Log-concavity
                    • 13 Mixed volumes
                    • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                    • 15 Needle decomposition
                    • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                    • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                    • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                    • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                    • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                    • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                    • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                    • References

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 11

                      Theorem 87 Let F0 Fk be families of convex compacta in Rn Assume that everyn minus k + 1 or less number of sets from the same family Fi have a common point Thenthere exists a k-dimensional affine subspace L intersecting all the sets of

                      ⋃iF

                      The proof of this result [Dol94] uses a more advanced topological fact Any nminusk sectionsof the canonical k-dimensional bundle over the real Grassmannian Gnk have a commonzero We sketch the proof as follows For a generic set of nminus k sections there is an oddnumber of such common zeros This is established by considering a certain ldquolinearrdquo set ofsections with precisely one nondegenerate common zero and then showing that the parityof the number of common zeros does not depend on the choice of the generic set of nminus ksections of the bundle This is essentially the same argument that shows that the degree(modulo 2) of a proper map between manifolds of the same dimension is well-defined

                      Arguing like in the proof of Theorem 84 it is possible to establish some results aboutchromatic numbers of certain hypergraphs see [ABMR11] for example Though the resultsfor hypergraphs are not so precise as in the case of graphs

                      More systematic topological approach of [Lov78] (see also the book [Mat03]) to thechromatic number of graphs works as follows For any two graphs GH consider thehomomorphisms G rarr H that is maps between the vertex sets V (G) and V (H) sendingevery edge of G to an edge of H There is a natural way to consider such homomorphismsas the vertex set of a simplicial (or cellular) complex Hom(GH)

                      Now we check that the definition of the chromatic number of G reads as the smallestχ such that there exists a homomorphism from G to Kχ where Kχ is the full graphof χ vertices Such a homomorphism induces a morphism of simplicial complexes c Hom(I2 G)rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) where I2 is the segment graph with two vertices and an edgebetween them Now the crucial facts are

                      bull We can interchange the vertices of I2 thus obtaining an involution on both thesimplicial complexes Hom(I2 G) and Hom(I2 Kχ)bull The complex Hom(I2 Kχ) has as faces pairs F1 F2 of disjoint subsets of [χ] and

                      therefore is combinatorially the (χminus1)-dimensional boundary of the crosspolytope(the higher dimensional octahedron) in Rχ This is the same as the (χ minus 1)-dimensional sphere with the standard involutionbull In some cases it is possible to map a sphere Sn of dimension larger than χ minus 1

                      to Hom(I2 G) so that this map respects the involution on the sphere Sn and onHom(I2 G) In particular it is possible when the simplicial complex Hom(I2 G)is (χminus 1)-connectedbull Then the existence of the map c Hom(I2 G) rarr Hom(I2 Kχ) commuting with

                      involution contradicts the BorsukndashUlam theorem

                      For more information the reader is referred to the book [Mat03]

                      9 Partition into prescribed parts

                      Here we stop using the ham sandwich theorem and introduce another technique ofmeasure partitions that has some useful consequences

                      Let us introduce the notion of a generalized Voronoi partition The standard Voronoipartition is defined as follows Start from a finite point set x1 xm sub Rn and put

                      Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi| le |xminus xj|

                      The sets Ri give a partition of Rn into convex parts A generalization of a Voronoipartition is obtained when we assign weights wi to every point xi and put

                      Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i |xminus xi|2 minus wi le |xminus xj|2 minus wj

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

                      In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

                      Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

                      Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

                      y ge λ1(x) + w1

                      y ge λm(x) + wm

                      We are going to establish the following fact

                      Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

                      micro(Ri) = αi

                      Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

                      Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

                      Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

                      Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

                      0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

                      we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

                      Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

                      It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

                      Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

                      Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

                      Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

                      If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

                      f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

                      which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

                      first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

                      Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

                      Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

                      ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

                      Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

                      10 Monotone maps

                      Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

                      u(x) = sup1leilem

                      (λi(x) + wi)

                      has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

                      Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

                      Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

                      there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

                      The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

                      From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

                      (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

                      for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

                      Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

                      C(f) =

                      intRn

                      〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                      Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                      V

                      u dmicro+

                      intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                      In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                      u(k) = log

                      intK

                      e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                      It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                      volK =

                      intV lowast

                      detDf dk

                      This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                      11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                      An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                      Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                      of finite volume each then

                      vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                      where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                      Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                      Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                      vol(A+B) geintA

                      detDg dx =

                      intA

                      det(id +Df(x)) dx

                      Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                      det(id +Df(x)) ge

                      (1 +

                      (VBVA

                      )1n)n

                      and therefore

                      vol(A+B) ge

                      (1 +

                      (VBVA

                      )1n)n

                      VA =(V

                      1nA + V

                      1nB

                      )n

                      which is what we need

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                      The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                      volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                      vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                      h

                      where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                      Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                      volnminus1(partA)

                      snge(

                      volA

                      vn

                      )nminus1n

                      Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                      vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                      and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                      nminus1n v1n

                      n

                      Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                      volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                      (volA)nminus1n v1n

                      n

                      which is equivalent to the required inequality

                      Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                      For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                      Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                      Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                      Proof Observe that

                      A capB supe 1

                      2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                      then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                      Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                      vol(Aminus A) le(

                      2n

                      n

                      )volA

                      Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                      When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                      A cap(A+

                      1

                      2(x1 + x2)

                      )supe 1

                      2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                      Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                      vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                      Now integrate this over x to obtain

                      vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                      intAminusA

                      vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                      ge volA middotintAminusA

                      (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                      int (1minusx)n

                      0

                      1 dy dx =

                      = volA middotint 1

                      0

                      intxle1minusy1n

                      1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                      0

                      (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                      = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                      0

                      (1minus y1n)n dy

                      Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                      0

                      (1minus y1n)n dy =

                      int 1

                      0

                      (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                      Γ(2n+ 1)=

                      =nn(nminus 1)

                      (2n)=

                      (2n

                      n

                      )minus1

                      Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                      12 Log-concavity

                      Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                      The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                      (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                      Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                      ρ

                      (x1 + x2

                      2

                      )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                      The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                      Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                      After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                      Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                      Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                      Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                      (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                      )1minust

                      middot(int

                      Rρ(x2 y) dy

                      )tunder the assumption

                      ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                      Put for brevity

                      f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                      and also

                      F =

                      intRf(y) dy G =

                      intRg(y) dy H =

                      intRh(y) dy

                      Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                      1

                      F

                      int y

                      minusinfinf(y) dy =

                      1

                      G

                      int ϕ(y)

                      minusinfing(y) dy

                      It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                      As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                      therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                      H =

                      intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                      intRh(ψ(y))

                      (1minus t+

                      tf(y)G

                      g(ϕ(y))F

                      )dy

                      Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                      H ge F 1minustGt

                      intR

                      (f(y)G

                      Fg(ϕ(y))

                      )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                      G+ t

                      f(y)

                      F

                      )dy

                      and using the mean inequality(

                      (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                      + tf(y)F

                      )ge(f(y)F

                      )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                      )1minustwe conclude

                      H ge F 1minustGt

                      intR

                      f(y)

                      Fdy = F 1minustGt

                      Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                      Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                      vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                      this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                      1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                      volume we rewrite

                      vol(A+B) ge 1

                      (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                      The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                      If fact the inequality

                      (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                      holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                      Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                      Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                      h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                      Then intRn

                      h(x) ge(int

                      Rn

                      f(x) dx

                      )1minust

                      middot(int

                      Rn

                      g(y) dy

                      )t

                      Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                      Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                      Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                      Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                      (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                      Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                      A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                      Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                      Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                      Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                      (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                      hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                      standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                      d log f(t) =1

                      f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                      where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                      Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                      (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                      there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                      It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                      The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                      In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                      In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                      Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                      vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                      )

                      is log-concave

                      Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                      We have to prove the inequality

                      (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                      )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                      ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                      )

                      After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                      (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                      By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                      The general form of (126) is

                      (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                      which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                      13 Mixed volumes

                      Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                      Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                      vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                      for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                      Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                      ui(k) = log

                      intK

                      e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                      where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                      f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                      is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                      map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                      We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                      h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                      xisinK〈p x〉

                      Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                      〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                      when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                      h(p K) = h(pK)

                      Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                      (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                      intRn

                      det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                      Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                      Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                      Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                      MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                      It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                      It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                      P (x) =sumk

                      ckxk

                      where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                      N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                      Theorem 133 The system of equations

                      P1(x) = 0

                      P2(x) = 0

                      Pn(x) = 0

                      for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                      In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                      We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                      14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                      We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                      Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                      f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                      for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                      intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                      Rn

                      f(x) dx middotintRn

                      g(y) dy le (2π)n

                      We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                      Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                      there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                      f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                      for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                      f(x) dx middotintRn

                      g(y) dy le (2π)n

                      Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                      Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                      f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                      Hence intRn

                      f(x) dx middotintRn

                      g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                      Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                      g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                      g(y)e(zy) dy

                      Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                      Rn

                      g(y) dy leintRn

                      g(y)e(zy) dy

                      which implies the required inequality

                      In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                      Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                      0

                      f(x) dx middotint +infin

                      0

                      g(y) dy le π

                      2

                      Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                      follows that for any s t isin R

                      w

                      (s+ t

                      2

                      )= eminuse

                      s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                      radicu(s)v(t)

                      Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                      0

                      f(x) dx middotint +infin

                      0

                      g(y) dy =

                      int +infin

                      minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                      int +infin

                      minusinfinv(t) dt le

                      le(int +infin

                      minusinfinw(r) dr

                      )2

                      =

                      (int +infin

                      0

                      eminusz22 dz

                      )2

                      2

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                      Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                      1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                      The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                      f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                      implies int +infin

                      minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                      But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                      minusinfinf(x) dx =

                      int +infin

                      0

                      f(x) dx = 12

                      we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                      partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                      and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                      also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                      Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                      so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                      F (xprime) =

                      int +infin

                      0

                      f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                      int +infin

                      0

                      g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                      From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                      selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                      f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                      = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                      We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                      F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                      2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                      Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                      intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                      H

                      F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                      G(yprime) dyprime le π

                      2(2π)nminus1

                      SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                      BH+

                      g(y) dy =

                      intH

                      G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                      Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                      g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                      and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                      g(y) dy le (2π)n

                      Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                      Rn

                      dist(xH)f(x) dx

                      By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                      xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                      xf(x) dx perp H and

                      intH+

                      f(x) dxminusintHminus

                      f(x) dx = 0

                      which is exactly what we need

                      Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                      characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                      i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                      Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                      + Assume that

                      h(radicx1y1

                      radicxnyn) ge

                      radicf(x)g(y)

                      for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                      Rn+

                      f(x) dx middotintRn+

                      g(y) dy le

                      (intRn+

                      h(z) dz

                      )2

                      Proof Substitute

                      f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                      g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                      h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                      It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                      (s+ t

                      2

                      ))2

                      ge f(s)g(t)

                      Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                      f(s) ds middotintRn

                      g(t) dt le(int

                      Rn

                      h(r) dr

                      )2

                      that is equivalent to what we need

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                      Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                      minusAig(y) dy le πn

                      It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                      Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                      K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                      volK middot volK le v2n

                      where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                      Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                      The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                      (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                      f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                      22

                      and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                      22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                      Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                      Rn

                      f(x) dx =

                      intRn

                      int f(x)

                      0

                      1 dydx =

                      int 1

                      0

                      volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                      for the constant cn =int 1

                      0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                      Rn

                      g(y) dy = cn volK

                      It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                      (2π)n2 =

                      intRn

                      eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                      Hence

                      volK middot volK le (2π)n

                      c2n

                      = v2n

                      It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                      volK middot volK ge 4n

                      n

                      which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                      (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                      n

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                      15 Needle decomposition

                      Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                      The main result is the following theorem

                      Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                      micro(Pi)

                      micro(Rn)=

                      ν(Pi)

                      ν(Rn)

                      and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                      A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                      Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                      The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                      Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                      Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                      The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                      appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                      There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                      16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                      Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                      2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                      intRn e

                      minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                      Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                      Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                      micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                      Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                      So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                      Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                      micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                      = micro(U) = micro(H)

                      The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                      ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                      It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                      Now everything reduces to the following

                      Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                      and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                      ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                      The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                      primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                      into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                      (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                      2 where

                      ν(U) =

                      int x

                      minusinfineminusπξ

                      2

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                      17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                      It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                      Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                      σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                      This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                      Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                      2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                      nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                      the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                      centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                      Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                      radicn in particular the following estimate

                      holds

                      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                      2

                      In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                      Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                      defined as follows

                      U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                      volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                      Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                      with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                      volX le v cosn+1 ε

                      2= v

                      (1minus sin2 ε

                      2

                      )n+12 le veminus

                      (n+1) sin2 ε2

                      2

                      The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                      vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                      22

                      which implies

                      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                      22

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                      A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                      Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                      σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                      2

                      Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                      Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                      18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                      There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                      First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                      ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                      where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                      M

                      (ω∆ω)ν =

                      intM

                      |dω|2ν +

                      intM

                      |dlowastω|2ν

                      where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                      M

                      f∆fν =

                      intM

                      |df |2ν

                      From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                      L20(M) =

                      f isin L2(M)

                      intM

                      fν = 0

                      the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                      0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                      0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                      M

                      |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                      |f |2ν for all f such that

                      intM

                      fν = 0

                      The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                      It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                      One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                      |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                      ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                      (xy)isinE

                      f(x)

                      The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                      Now we make the following definition

                      Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                      Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                      First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                      Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                      19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                      Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                      Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                      micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                      The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                      The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                      Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                      ν(A) ge micro(A)

                      Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                      Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                      Rn

                      f dν geintRn

                      f dmicro

                      Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                      f dν =

                      int f(x)

                      0

                      intRn

                      1 dνdy =

                      int f(x)

                      0

                      ν(Cy)dy

                      where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                      Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                      Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                      f(x) =

                      inty(xy)isinA

                      1 dτ

                      is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                      Now we observe that

                      ν times τ(A) =

                      intRn

                      f(x) dν geintRn

                      f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                      by Lemma 193

                      And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                      Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                      ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                      micro(S)

                      is more peaked than micro

                      Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                      Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                      Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                      Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                      Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                      radic2 This result was extended to lower

                      values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                      Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                      2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                      one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                      Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                      ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                      This can be decoded as

                      vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                      ε

                      eminusπ|x|2

                      dx

                      where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                      asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                      be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                      volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                      vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                      It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                      20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                      A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                      |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                      where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                      Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                      cradic

                      nlogN

                      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                      Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                      )n2eminusα|x|

                      2 An easy es-

                      timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                      micro(Pi) geint 1

                      minus1

                      radicα

                      πeminusαx

                      2

                      dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                      eminusα

                      It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                      radicnα

                      By Theorem 191

                      micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                      1minus 1radicπα

                      eminusα)N

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                      so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                      cradic

                      nlogN

                      ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                      absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                      παeminusα)Nge c2

                      or

                      (201) N log

                      (1minus 1radic

                      παeminusα)ge c3

                      for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                      Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                      Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                      logN middot logM ge γn

                      for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                      Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                      radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                      Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                      nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                      half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                      nlogN

                      and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                      of radius rlowast = cradic

                      1logM

                      Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                      cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                      Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                      In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                      However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                      Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                      Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                      cn

                      logN

                      )n2vn

                      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                      Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                      Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                      volK

                      volKge(

                      cn

                      logN

                      )n

                      Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                      volK

                      volK=

                      (volK)2

                      volK middot volKge (volK)2

                      v2n

                      ge(

                      cn

                      logN

                      )n

                      where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                      The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                      Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                      h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                      (1 + t)n= 1

                      Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                      21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                      We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                      Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                      The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                      Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                      dist(xX) le δ

                      In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                      Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                      δkminus1

                      Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                      Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                      |X| le kvk4kminus1

                      vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                      δkminus1

                      here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                      vk = πk2

                      Γ(k2+1)

                      Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                      radic2

                      Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                      2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                      radic2 such that

                      the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                      has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                      So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                      2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                      Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                      E sube K suberadicnE

                      Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                      radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                      E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                      Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                      1radicnle f(x) le 1

                      on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                      Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                      c

                      radiclog n

                      n

                      with some absolute constant c

                      See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                      n(this is the

                      DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                      Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                      C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                      σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                      128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                      128

                      Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                      the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                      128 If in total

                      2eminusc2ε2 logn

                      128 |X| lt 1

                      then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                      k16kminus1

                      εkminus1eminus

                      c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                      which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                      M equal 1

                      x le sumxiisinX

                      cixi leradic

                      2 maxxiisinXxi le

                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                      Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                      radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                      (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                      2(1 + ε8)

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                      and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                      For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                      22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                      It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                      Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                      where x1 xn are the points of X

                      Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                      Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                      )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                      (4δ

                      )kwe could rotate X

                      and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                      This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                      Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                      About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                      Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                      Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                      Q = x21 + x2

                      2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                      This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                      On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                      with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                      ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                      by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                      d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                      Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                      is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                      (d+kminus1d

                      ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                      Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                      minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                      (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                      )

                      A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                      Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                      f(x) = f(minusx)

                      References

                      [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                      [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                      [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                      [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                      [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                      [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                      [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                      [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                      [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                      [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                      [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                      [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                      Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                      Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                      Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                      [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                      [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                      [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                      [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                      [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                      [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                      [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                      [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                      [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                      [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                      [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                      [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                      [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                      [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                      18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                      347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                      2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                      ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                      and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                      bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                      Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                      Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                      dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                      [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                      [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                      [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                      [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                      [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                      [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                      [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                      [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                      [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                      [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                      [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                      [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                      [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                      [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                      [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                      Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                      Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                      Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                      E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                      URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                      • 1 Introduction
                      • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                      • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                      • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                      • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                      • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                      • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                      • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                      • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                      • 10 Monotone maps
                      • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                      • 12 Log-concavity
                      • 13 Mixed volumes
                      • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                      • 15 Needle decomposition
                      • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                      • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                      • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                      • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                      • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                      • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                      • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                      • References

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 12

                        In this case the inequalities in the definition are actually linear because the both partshave the same quadratic in x term |x|2

                        Having noticed the linear nature of the generalized Voronoi partition we may redefineit as follows Let us work with a finite dimensional linear space V and its dual V lowast For afinite set of linear forms λ1 λm isin V lowast and weights w1 wm isin R put

                        Ri = x isin Rn forallj 6= i λi(x) + wi ge λj(x) + wjDefinitely every generalized Voronoi partition has this kind of representation and thereader may check that the converse is also true With such a definition it is clear that theregions Ri are projections of facets of the convex polyhedron G+ sub V timesR defined by thesystem of linear inequalities

                        y ge λ1(x) + w1

                        y ge λm(x) + wm

                        We are going to establish the following fact

                        Theorem 91 Let micro be a probability measure on V that attains zero on every hyperplaneλ1 λm isin V lowast be a system of linear forms and α1 αm be positive integers with unitsum Then there exists weights w1 wm isin R such that the generalized Voronoi partitionRi corresponding to λi and wi has the following property

                        micro(Ri) = αi

                        Before proving it we exhibit an appropriate topological tool

                        Lemma 92 Assume that a continuous map f ∆rarr ∆ of the n-dimensional simplex toitself maps every face of ∆ to itself Then the map f is surjective

                        Proof We prove a stronger assertion the map f of the pair (∆ part∆) to itself has degree1 by induction

                        Since every facet parti∆ (for i = 0 n) is mapped to itself with degree 1 then therestriction of f to part∆ has degree 1 This means that the map flowast Hnminus1(part∆)rarr Hnminus1(part∆)is the identity From the long exact sequence of reduced homology groups

                        0 = Hn(∆) minusminusminusrarr Hn(∆ part∆)δminusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(part∆) minusminusminusrarr Hnminus1(∆) = 0

                        we obtain that flowast Hn(∆ part∆) rarr Hn(∆ part∆) also must be an isomorphism The lemmais proved

                        Proof of Theorem 91 Consider the barycentric coordinates t1 tm in an (m minus 1)-dimensional simplex ∆ Define the map f ∆rarr ∆ as follows For a point (t1 tm) con-sider the set of weights (minus1t1 minus1tm) and let f(t1 tm) be the set (micro(R1) micro(Rm))that corresponds to the partition Ri with given weights

                        It is easy to check that when some tirsquos vanish and we substitute wi = minusinfin the definitionremains valid and the map f is continuous up to the boundary of ∆ Moreover when tivanishes and wi turns to minusinfin the corresponding region Ri becomes empty and thereforef maps faces of ∆ to faces Now we apply Lemma 92 and conclude that the point(α1 αm) must be in the image of f

                        Lemma 92 also allows to prove several classical results Here is the Brouwer fixed pointtheorem

                        Theorem 93 Every continuous map f from a convex compactum to itself has a fixedpoint that is a point x such that f(x) = x

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

                        Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

                        If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

                        f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

                        which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

                        first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

                        Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

                        Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

                        ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

                        Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

                        10 Monotone maps

                        Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

                        u(x) = sup1leilem

                        (λi(x) + wi)

                        has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

                        Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

                        Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

                        there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

                        The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

                        From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

                        (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

                        for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

                        Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

                        C(f) =

                        intRn

                        〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                        Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                        V

                        u dmicro+

                        intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                        In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                        u(k) = log

                        intK

                        e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                        It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                        volK =

                        intV lowast

                        detDf dk

                        This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                        11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                        An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                        Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                        of finite volume each then

                        vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                        where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                        Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                        Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                        vol(A+B) geintA

                        detDg dx =

                        intA

                        det(id +Df(x)) dx

                        Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                        det(id +Df(x)) ge

                        (1 +

                        (VBVA

                        )1n)n

                        and therefore

                        vol(A+B) ge

                        (1 +

                        (VBVA

                        )1n)n

                        VA =(V

                        1nA + V

                        1nB

                        )n

                        which is what we need

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                        The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                        volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                        vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                        h

                        where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                        Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                        volnminus1(partA)

                        snge(

                        volA

                        vn

                        )nminus1n

                        Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                        vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                        and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                        nminus1n v1n

                        n

                        Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                        volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                        (volA)nminus1n v1n

                        n

                        which is equivalent to the required inequality

                        Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                        For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                        Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                        Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                        Proof Observe that

                        A capB supe 1

                        2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                        then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                        Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                        vol(Aminus A) le(

                        2n

                        n

                        )volA

                        Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                        When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                        A cap(A+

                        1

                        2(x1 + x2)

                        )supe 1

                        2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                        Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                        vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                        Now integrate this over x to obtain

                        vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                        intAminusA

                        vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                        ge volA middotintAminusA

                        (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                        int (1minusx)n

                        0

                        1 dy dx =

                        = volA middotint 1

                        0

                        intxle1minusy1n

                        1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                        0

                        (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                        = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                        0

                        (1minus y1n)n dy

                        Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                        0

                        (1minus y1n)n dy =

                        int 1

                        0

                        (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                        Γ(2n+ 1)=

                        =nn(nminus 1)

                        (2n)=

                        (2n

                        n

                        )minus1

                        Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                        12 Log-concavity

                        Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                        The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                        (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                        Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                        ρ

                        (x1 + x2

                        2

                        )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                        The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                        Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                        After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                        Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                        Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                        Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                        (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                        )1minust

                        middot(int

                        Rρ(x2 y) dy

                        )tunder the assumption

                        ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                        Put for brevity

                        f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                        and also

                        F =

                        intRf(y) dy G =

                        intRg(y) dy H =

                        intRh(y) dy

                        Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                        1

                        F

                        int y

                        minusinfinf(y) dy =

                        1

                        G

                        int ϕ(y)

                        minusinfing(y) dy

                        It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                        As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                        therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                        H =

                        intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                        intRh(ψ(y))

                        (1minus t+

                        tf(y)G

                        g(ϕ(y))F

                        )dy

                        Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                        H ge F 1minustGt

                        intR

                        (f(y)G

                        Fg(ϕ(y))

                        )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                        G+ t

                        f(y)

                        F

                        )dy

                        and using the mean inequality(

                        (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                        + tf(y)F

                        )ge(f(y)F

                        )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                        )1minustwe conclude

                        H ge F 1minustGt

                        intR

                        f(y)

                        Fdy = F 1minustGt

                        Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                        Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                        vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                        this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                        1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                        volume we rewrite

                        vol(A+B) ge 1

                        (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                        The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                        If fact the inequality

                        (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                        holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                        Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                        Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                        h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                        Then intRn

                        h(x) ge(int

                        Rn

                        f(x) dx

                        )1minust

                        middot(int

                        Rn

                        g(y) dy

                        )t

                        Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                        Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                        Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                        Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                        (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                        Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                        A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                        Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                        Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                        Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                        (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                        hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                        standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                        d log f(t) =1

                        f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                        where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                        Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                        (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                        there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                        It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                        The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                        In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                        In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                        Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                        vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                        )

                        is log-concave

                        Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                        We have to prove the inequality

                        (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                        )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                        ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                        M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                        )

                        After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                        (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                        By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                        The general form of (126) is

                        (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                        which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                        13 Mixed volumes

                        Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                        Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                        vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                        for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                        Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                        ui(k) = log

                        intK

                        e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                        where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                        f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                        is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                        map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                        We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                        h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                        xisinK〈p x〉

                        Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                        〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                        when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                        h(p K) = h(pK)

                        Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                        (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                        intRn

                        det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                        Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                        Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                        Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                        MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                        It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                        It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                        P (x) =sumk

                        ckxk

                        where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                        N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                        Theorem 133 The system of equations

                        P1(x) = 0

                        P2(x) = 0

                        Pn(x) = 0

                        for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                        In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                        We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                        14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                        We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                        Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                        f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                        for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                        intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                        Rn

                        f(x) dx middotintRn

                        g(y) dy le (2π)n

                        We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                        Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                        there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                        f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                        for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                        f(x) dx middotintRn

                        g(y) dy le (2π)n

                        Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                        Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                        f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                        Hence intRn

                        f(x) dx middotintRn

                        g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                        Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                        g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                        g(y)e(zy) dy

                        Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                        Rn

                        g(y) dy leintRn

                        g(y)e(zy) dy

                        which implies the required inequality

                        In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                        Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                        0

                        f(x) dx middotint +infin

                        0

                        g(y) dy le π

                        2

                        Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                        follows that for any s t isin R

                        w

                        (s+ t

                        2

                        )= eminuse

                        s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                        radicu(s)v(t)

                        Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                        0

                        f(x) dx middotint +infin

                        0

                        g(y) dy =

                        int +infin

                        minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                        int +infin

                        minusinfinv(t) dt le

                        le(int +infin

                        minusinfinw(r) dr

                        )2

                        =

                        (int +infin

                        0

                        eminusz22 dz

                        )2

                        2

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                        Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                        1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                        The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                        f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                        implies int +infin

                        minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                        But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                        minusinfinf(x) dx =

                        int +infin

                        0

                        f(x) dx = 12

                        we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                        partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                        and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                        also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                        Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                        so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                        F (xprime) =

                        int +infin

                        0

                        f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                        int +infin

                        0

                        g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                        From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                        selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                        f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                        = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                        We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                        F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                        2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                        Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                        intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                        H

                        F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                        G(yprime) dyprime le π

                        2(2π)nminus1

                        SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                        BH+

                        g(y) dy =

                        intH

                        G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                        Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                        g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                        and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                        g(y) dy le (2π)n

                        Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                        Rn

                        dist(xH)f(x) dx

                        By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                        xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                        xf(x) dx perp H and

                        intH+

                        f(x) dxminusintHminus

                        f(x) dx = 0

                        which is exactly what we need

                        Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                        characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                        i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                        Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                        + Assume that

                        h(radicx1y1

                        radicxnyn) ge

                        radicf(x)g(y)

                        for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                        Rn+

                        f(x) dx middotintRn+

                        g(y) dy le

                        (intRn+

                        h(z) dz

                        )2

                        Proof Substitute

                        f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                        g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                        h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                        It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                        (s+ t

                        2

                        ))2

                        ge f(s)g(t)

                        Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                        f(s) ds middotintRn

                        g(t) dt le(int

                        Rn

                        h(r) dr

                        )2

                        that is equivalent to what we need

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                        Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                        minusAig(y) dy le πn

                        It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                        Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                        K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                        volK middot volK le v2n

                        where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                        Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                        The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                        (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                        f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                        22

                        and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                        22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                        Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                        Rn

                        f(x) dx =

                        intRn

                        int f(x)

                        0

                        1 dydx =

                        int 1

                        0

                        volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                        for the constant cn =int 1

                        0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                        Rn

                        g(y) dy = cn volK

                        It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                        (2π)n2 =

                        intRn

                        eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                        Hence

                        volK middot volK le (2π)n

                        c2n

                        = v2n

                        It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                        volK middot volK ge 4n

                        n

                        which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                        (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                        n

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                        15 Needle decomposition

                        Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                        The main result is the following theorem

                        Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                        micro(Pi)

                        micro(Rn)=

                        ν(Pi)

                        ν(Rn)

                        and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                        A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                        Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                        The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                        Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                        Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                        The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                        appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                        There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                        16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                        Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                        2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                        intRn e

                        minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                        Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                        Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                        micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                        Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                        So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                        Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                        micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                        = micro(U) = micro(H)

                        The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                        ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                        It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                        Now everything reduces to the following

                        Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                        and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                        ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                        The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                        primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                        into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                        (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                        2 where

                        ν(U) =

                        int x

                        minusinfineminusπξ

                        2

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                        17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                        It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                        Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                        σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                        This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                        Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                        2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                        nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                        the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                        centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                        Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                        radicn in particular the following estimate

                        holds

                        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                        2

                        In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                        Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                        defined as follows

                        U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                        volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                        Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                        with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                        volX le v cosn+1 ε

                        2= v

                        (1minus sin2 ε

                        2

                        )n+12 le veminus

                        (n+1) sin2 ε2

                        2

                        The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                        vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                        22

                        which implies

                        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                        22

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                        A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                        Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                        σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                        2

                        Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                        Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                        18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                        There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                        First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                        ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                        where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                        M

                        (ω∆ω)ν =

                        intM

                        |dω|2ν +

                        intM

                        |dlowastω|2ν

                        where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                        M

                        f∆fν =

                        intM

                        |df |2ν

                        From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                        L20(M) =

                        f isin L2(M)

                        intM

                        fν = 0

                        the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                        0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                        0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                        M

                        |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                        |f |2ν for all f such that

                        intM

                        fν = 0

                        The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                        It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                        One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                        |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                        ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                        (xy)isinE

                        f(x)

                        The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                        Now we make the following definition

                        Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                        Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                        First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                        Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                        19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                        Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                        Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                        micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                        The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                        The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                        Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                        ν(A) ge micro(A)

                        Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                        Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                        Rn

                        f dν geintRn

                        f dmicro

                        Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                        f dν =

                        int f(x)

                        0

                        intRn

                        1 dνdy =

                        int f(x)

                        0

                        ν(Cy)dy

                        where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                        Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                        Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                        f(x) =

                        inty(xy)isinA

                        1 dτ

                        is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                        Now we observe that

                        ν times τ(A) =

                        intRn

                        f(x) dν geintRn

                        f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                        by Lemma 193

                        And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                        Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                        ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                        micro(S)

                        is more peaked than micro

                        Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                        Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                        Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                        Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                        Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                        radic2 This result was extended to lower

                        values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                        Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                        2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                        one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                        Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                        ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                        This can be decoded as

                        vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                        ε

                        eminusπ|x|2

                        dx

                        where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                        asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                        be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                        volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                        vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                        It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                        20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                        A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                        |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                        where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                        Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                        cradic

                        nlogN

                        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                        Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                        )n2eminusα|x|

                        2 An easy es-

                        timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                        micro(Pi) geint 1

                        minus1

                        radicα

                        πeminusαx

                        2

                        dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                        eminusα

                        It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                        radicnα

                        By Theorem 191

                        micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                        1minus 1radicπα

                        eminusα)N

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                        so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                        cradic

                        nlogN

                        ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                        absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                        παeminusα)Nge c2

                        or

                        (201) N log

                        (1minus 1radic

                        παeminusα)ge c3

                        for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                        Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                        Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                        logN middot logM ge γn

                        for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                        Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                        radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                        Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                        nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                        half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                        nlogN

                        and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                        of radius rlowast = cradic

                        1logM

                        Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                        cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                        Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                        In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                        However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                        Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                        Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                        cn

                        logN

                        )n2vn

                        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                        Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                        Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                        volK

                        volKge(

                        cn

                        logN

                        )n

                        Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                        volK

                        volK=

                        (volK)2

                        volK middot volKge (volK)2

                        v2n

                        ge(

                        cn

                        logN

                        )n

                        where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                        The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                        Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                        h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                        (1 + t)n= 1

                        Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                        21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                        We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                        Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                        The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                        Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                        dist(xX) le δ

                        In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                        Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                        δkminus1

                        Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                        Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                        |X| le kvk4kminus1

                        vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                        δkminus1

                        here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                        vk = πk2

                        Γ(k2+1)

                        Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                        radic2

                        Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                        2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                        radic2 such that

                        the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                        has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                        So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                        2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                        Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                        E sube K suberadicnE

                        Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                        radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                        E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                        Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                        1radicnle f(x) le 1

                        on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                        Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                        c

                        radiclog n

                        n

                        with some absolute constant c

                        See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                        n(this is the

                        DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                        Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                        C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                        σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                        128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                        128

                        Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                        the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                        128 If in total

                        2eminusc2ε2 logn

                        128 |X| lt 1

                        then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                        k16kminus1

                        εkminus1eminus

                        c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                        which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                        M equal 1

                        x le sumxiisinX

                        cixi leradic

                        2 maxxiisinXxi le

                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                        Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                        radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                        (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                        2(1 + ε8)

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                        and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                        For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                        22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                        It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                        Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                        where x1 xn are the points of X

                        Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                        Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                        )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                        (4δ

                        )kwe could rotate X

                        and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                        This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                        Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                        About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                        Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                        Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                        Q = x21 + x2

                        2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                        This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                        On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                        with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                        ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                        by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                        d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                        Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                        is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                        (d+kminus1d

                        ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                        Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                        minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                        (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                        )

                        A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                        Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                        f(x) = f(minusx)

                        References

                        [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                        [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                        [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                        [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                        [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                        [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                        [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                        [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                        [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                        [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                        [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                        [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                        Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                        Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                        Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                        [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                        [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                        [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                        [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                        [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                        [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                        [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                        [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                        [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                        [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                        [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                        [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                        [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                        [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                        18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                        347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                        2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                        ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                        and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                        bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                        Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                        Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                        dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                        [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                        [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                        [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                        [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                        [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                        [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                        [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                        [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                        [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                        [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                        [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                        [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                        [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                        [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                        [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                        Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                        Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                        Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                        E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                        URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                        • 1 Introduction
                        • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                        • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                        • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                        • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                        • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                        • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                        • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                        • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                        • 10 Monotone maps
                        • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                        • 12 Log-concavity
                        • 13 Mixed volumes
                        • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                        • 15 Needle decomposition
                        • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                        • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                        • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                        • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                        • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                        • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                        • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                        • References

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 13

                          Proof Topologically every convex compactum is homeomorphic to a simplex ∆ of appro-priate dimension So we assume f ∆rarr ∆ We also assume that the center of ∆ is theorigin and its diameter is 1

                          If f(x) is never equal to x then from compactness |f(x) minus x| ge ε for some positiveconstant ε Now we replace f with another map

                          f(x) = (1minus ε2)f(x)

                          which still has no fixed points and maps ∆ to its interior Next we construct the con-tinuous map g ∆rarr ∆ as follows take the ray ρ(x) from f(x) towards x and mark the

                          first time it touches the boundary part∆ this is the point g(x) The assumptions that f hasno fixed points and maps the simplex to its interior guarantee that g(x) is continuousFrom the construction it is clear that g(x) = x for any x isin part∆ Therefore Lemma 92 isapplicable and g must be surjective But the construction also implies that its image ispart∆ and therefore we have a contradiction

                          Another application is the classical KnasterndashKuratowskindashMazurkievicz theorem

                          Theorem 94 Consider the n-dimensional simplex ∆ with facets part0∆ partn∆ AssumeXini=0 is a closed covering of ∆ such that any Xi does not intersect its respective parti∆Then the intersection

                          ⋂ni=0Xi is not empty

                          Hint Replace the covering with the corresponding continuous partition of unity

                          10 Monotone maps

                          Theorem 91 has the following interpretation Let micro be a probability measure on V zero on hyperplanes and ν be a discrete measure on V lowast assigning to every λi from thefinite set λi sub V lowast the measure αi Then the convex piecewise linear function

                          u(x) = sup1leilem

                          (λi(x) + wi)

                          has the following property The (discontinuous) map f V rarr V lowast defined by f x 7rarr duxtransports the measure micro to the measure ν

                          Using the approximation of arbitrary measures by discrete measures we may replace νwith any ldquoreasonably goodrdquo measure on V lowast and obtain the following theorem

                          Theorem 101 For two absolutely continuous probability measures micro on V and ν on V lowast

                          there exits a convex function u V rarr R such that the map f x 7rarr dux sends micro to ν

                          The maps given by x 7rarr dux with a convex u are called monotone maps More pre-cise claims about the assumptions on micro and ν and continuity of the resulting map f inTheorem 101 can be found in the beautiful review [Ball04] If the map f is continuouslydifferentiable then its differential Df turns out to be a positive semidefinite quadraticform and the conclusion that micro is sent to ν just means that ρmicro = detDf middot ρν for thecorresponding densities of the measures

                          From the general properties of convex functions one easily deduces that

                          (101) 〈xminus y f(x)minus f(y)〉 ge 0

                          for a monotone map and the inequality becomes strict if x 6= y ρmicro is everywhere positiveand ρν is defined

                          Another description of a monotone map (see [Ball04] for details) for micro and ν is a mapthat sends micro to ν and maximizes the following ldquocost functionrdquo

                          C(f) =

                          intRn

                          〈x f(x)〉 dmicro

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                          Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                          V

                          u dmicro+

                          intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                          In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                          u(k) = log

                          intK

                          e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                          It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                          volK =

                          intV lowast

                          detDf dk

                          This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                          11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                          An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                          Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                          of finite volume each then

                          vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                          where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                          Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                          Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                          vol(A+B) geintA

                          detDg dx =

                          intA

                          det(id +Df(x)) dx

                          Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                          det(id +Df(x)) ge

                          (1 +

                          (VBVA

                          )1n)n

                          and therefore

                          vol(A+B) ge

                          (1 +

                          (VBVA

                          )1n)n

                          VA =(V

                          1nA + V

                          1nB

                          )n

                          which is what we need

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                          The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                          volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                          vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                          h

                          where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                          Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                          volnminus1(partA)

                          snge(

                          volA

                          vn

                          )nminus1n

                          Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                          vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                          and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                          nminus1n v1n

                          n

                          Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                          volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                          (volA)nminus1n v1n

                          n

                          which is equivalent to the required inequality

                          Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                          For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                          Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                          Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                          Proof Observe that

                          A capB supe 1

                          2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                          then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                          Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                          vol(Aminus A) le(

                          2n

                          n

                          )volA

                          Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                          When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                          A cap(A+

                          1

                          2(x1 + x2)

                          )supe 1

                          2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                          Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                          vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                          Now integrate this over x to obtain

                          vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                          intAminusA

                          vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                          ge volA middotintAminusA

                          (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                          int (1minusx)n

                          0

                          1 dy dx =

                          = volA middotint 1

                          0

                          intxle1minusy1n

                          1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                          0

                          (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                          = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                          0

                          (1minus y1n)n dy

                          Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                          0

                          (1minus y1n)n dy =

                          int 1

                          0

                          (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                          Γ(2n+ 1)=

                          =nn(nminus 1)

                          (2n)=

                          (2n

                          n

                          )minus1

                          Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                          12 Log-concavity

                          Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                          The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                          (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                          Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                          ρ

                          (x1 + x2

                          2

                          )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                          The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                          Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                          After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                          Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                          Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                          Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                          (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                          )1minust

                          middot(int

                          Rρ(x2 y) dy

                          )tunder the assumption

                          ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                          Put for brevity

                          f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                          and also

                          F =

                          intRf(y) dy G =

                          intRg(y) dy H =

                          intRh(y) dy

                          Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                          1

                          F

                          int y

                          minusinfinf(y) dy =

                          1

                          G

                          int ϕ(y)

                          minusinfing(y) dy

                          It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                          As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                          therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                          H =

                          intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                          intRh(ψ(y))

                          (1minus t+

                          tf(y)G

                          g(ϕ(y))F

                          )dy

                          Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                          H ge F 1minustGt

                          intR

                          (f(y)G

                          Fg(ϕ(y))

                          )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                          G+ t

                          f(y)

                          F

                          )dy

                          and using the mean inequality(

                          (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                          + tf(y)F

                          )ge(f(y)F

                          )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                          )1minustwe conclude

                          H ge F 1minustGt

                          intR

                          f(y)

                          Fdy = F 1minustGt

                          Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                          Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                          vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                          this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                          1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                          volume we rewrite

                          vol(A+B) ge 1

                          (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                          The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                          If fact the inequality

                          (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                          holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                          Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                          Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                          h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                          Then intRn

                          h(x) ge(int

                          Rn

                          f(x) dx

                          )1minust

                          middot(int

                          Rn

                          g(y) dy

                          )t

                          Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                          Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                          Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                          Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                          (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                          Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                          A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                          Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                          Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                          Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                          (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                          hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                          standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                          d log f(t) =1

                          f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                          where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                          Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                          (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                          there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                          It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                          The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                          In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                          In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                          Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                          vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                          )

                          is log-concave

                          Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                          We have to prove the inequality

                          (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                          )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                          ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                          M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                          )

                          After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                          (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                          By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                          The general form of (126) is

                          (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                          which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                          13 Mixed volumes

                          Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                          Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                          vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                          for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                          Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                          ui(k) = log

                          intK

                          e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                          where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                          f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                          is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                          map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                          We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                          h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                          xisinK〈p x〉

                          Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                          〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                          when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                          h(p K) = h(pK)

                          Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                          (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                          intRn

                          det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                          Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                          Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                          Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                          MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                          It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                          It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                          P (x) =sumk

                          ckxk

                          where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                          N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                          Theorem 133 The system of equations

                          P1(x) = 0

                          P2(x) = 0

                          Pn(x) = 0

                          for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                          In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                          We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                          14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                          We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                          Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                          f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                          for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                          intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                          Rn

                          f(x) dx middotintRn

                          g(y) dy le (2π)n

                          We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                          Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                          there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                          f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                          for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                          f(x) dx middotintRn

                          g(y) dy le (2π)n

                          Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                          Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                          f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                          Hence intRn

                          f(x) dx middotintRn

                          g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                          Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                          g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                          g(y)e(zy) dy

                          Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                          Rn

                          g(y) dy leintRn

                          g(y)e(zy) dy

                          which implies the required inequality

                          In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                          Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                          0

                          f(x) dx middotint +infin

                          0

                          g(y) dy le π

                          2

                          Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                          follows that for any s t isin R

                          w

                          (s+ t

                          2

                          )= eminuse

                          s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                          radicu(s)v(t)

                          Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                          0

                          f(x) dx middotint +infin

                          0

                          g(y) dy =

                          int +infin

                          minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                          int +infin

                          minusinfinv(t) dt le

                          le(int +infin

                          minusinfinw(r) dr

                          )2

                          =

                          (int +infin

                          0

                          eminusz22 dz

                          )2

                          2

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                          Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                          1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                          The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                          f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                          implies int +infin

                          minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                          But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                          minusinfinf(x) dx =

                          int +infin

                          0

                          f(x) dx = 12

                          we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                          partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                          and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                          also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                          Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                          so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                          F (xprime) =

                          int +infin

                          0

                          f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                          int +infin

                          0

                          g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                          From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                          selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                          f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                          = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                          We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                          F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                          2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                          Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                          intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                          H

                          F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                          G(yprime) dyprime le π

                          2(2π)nminus1

                          SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                          BH+

                          g(y) dy =

                          intH

                          G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                          Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                          g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                          and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                          g(y) dy le (2π)n

                          Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                          Rn

                          dist(xH)f(x) dx

                          By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                          xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                          xf(x) dx perp H and

                          intH+

                          f(x) dxminusintHminus

                          f(x) dx = 0

                          which is exactly what we need

                          Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                          characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                          i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                          Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                          + Assume that

                          h(radicx1y1

                          radicxnyn) ge

                          radicf(x)g(y)

                          for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                          Rn+

                          f(x) dx middotintRn+

                          g(y) dy le

                          (intRn+

                          h(z) dz

                          )2

                          Proof Substitute

                          f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                          g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                          h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                          It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                          (s+ t

                          2

                          ))2

                          ge f(s)g(t)

                          Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                          f(s) ds middotintRn

                          g(t) dt le(int

                          Rn

                          h(r) dr

                          )2

                          that is equivalent to what we need

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                          Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                          minusAig(y) dy le πn

                          It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                          Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                          K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                          volK middot volK le v2n

                          where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                          Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                          The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                          (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                          f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                          22

                          and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                          22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                          Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                          Rn

                          f(x) dx =

                          intRn

                          int f(x)

                          0

                          1 dydx =

                          int 1

                          0

                          volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                          for the constant cn =int 1

                          0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                          Rn

                          g(y) dy = cn volK

                          It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                          (2π)n2 =

                          intRn

                          eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                          Hence

                          volK middot volK le (2π)n

                          c2n

                          = v2n

                          It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                          volK middot volK ge 4n

                          n

                          which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                          (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                          n

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                          15 Needle decomposition

                          Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                          The main result is the following theorem

                          Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                          micro(Pi)

                          micro(Rn)=

                          ν(Pi)

                          ν(Rn)

                          and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                          A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                          Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                          The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                          Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                          Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                          The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                          appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                          There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                          16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                          Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                          2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                          intRn e

                          minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                          Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                          Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                          micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                          Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                          So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                          Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                          micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                          = micro(U) = micro(H)

                          The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                          ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                          It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                          Now everything reduces to the following

                          Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                          and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                          ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                          The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                          primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                          into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                          (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                          2 where

                          ν(U) =

                          int x

                          minusinfineminusπξ

                          2

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                          17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                          It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                          Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                          σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                          This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                          Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                          2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                          nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                          the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                          centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                          Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                          radicn in particular the following estimate

                          holds

                          σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                          2

                          In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                          Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                          defined as follows

                          U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                          volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                          Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                          with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                          volX le v cosn+1 ε

                          2= v

                          (1minus sin2 ε

                          2

                          )n+12 le veminus

                          (n+1) sin2 ε2

                          2

                          The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                          vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                          22

                          which implies

                          σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                          22

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                          A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                          Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                          σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                          2

                          Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                          Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                          18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                          There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                          First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                          ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                          where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                          M

                          (ω∆ω)ν =

                          intM

                          |dω|2ν +

                          intM

                          |dlowastω|2ν

                          where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                          M

                          f∆fν =

                          intM

                          |df |2ν

                          From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                          L20(M) =

                          f isin L2(M)

                          intM

                          fν = 0

                          the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                          0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                          0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                          M

                          |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                          |f |2ν for all f such that

                          intM

                          fν = 0

                          The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                          It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                          One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                          |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                          ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                          (xy)isinE

                          f(x)

                          The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                          Now we make the following definition

                          Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                          Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                          First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                          Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                          19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                          Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                          Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                          micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                          The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                          The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                          Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                          ν(A) ge micro(A)

                          Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                          Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                          Rn

                          f dν geintRn

                          f dmicro

                          Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                          f dν =

                          int f(x)

                          0

                          intRn

                          1 dνdy =

                          int f(x)

                          0

                          ν(Cy)dy

                          where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                          Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                          Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                          f(x) =

                          inty(xy)isinA

                          1 dτ

                          is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                          Now we observe that

                          ν times τ(A) =

                          intRn

                          f(x) dν geintRn

                          f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                          by Lemma 193

                          And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                          Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                          ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                          micro(S)

                          is more peaked than micro

                          Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                          Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                          Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                          Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                          Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                          radic2 This result was extended to lower

                          values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                          Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                          2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                          one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                          Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                          ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                          This can be decoded as

                          vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                          ε

                          eminusπ|x|2

                          dx

                          where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                          asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                          be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                          volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                          vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                          It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                          20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                          A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                          |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                          where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                          Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                          cradic

                          nlogN

                          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                          Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                          )n2eminusα|x|

                          2 An easy es-

                          timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                          micro(Pi) geint 1

                          minus1

                          radicα

                          πeminusαx

                          2

                          dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                          eminusα

                          It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                          radicnα

                          By Theorem 191

                          micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                          1minus 1radicπα

                          eminusα)N

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                          so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                          cradic

                          nlogN

                          ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                          absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                          παeminusα)Nge c2

                          or

                          (201) N log

                          (1minus 1radic

                          παeminusα)ge c3

                          for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                          Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                          Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                          logN middot logM ge γn

                          for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                          Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                          radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                          Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                          nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                          half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                          nlogN

                          and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                          of radius rlowast = cradic

                          1logM

                          Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                          cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                          Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                          In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                          However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                          Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                          Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                          cn

                          logN

                          )n2vn

                          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                          Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                          Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                          volK

                          volKge(

                          cn

                          logN

                          )n

                          Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                          volK

                          volK=

                          (volK)2

                          volK middot volKge (volK)2

                          v2n

                          ge(

                          cn

                          logN

                          )n

                          where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                          The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                          Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                          h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                          (1 + t)n= 1

                          Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                          21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                          We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                          Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                          The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                          Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                          dist(xX) le δ

                          In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                          Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                          δkminus1

                          Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                          Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                          |X| le kvk4kminus1

                          vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                          δkminus1

                          here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                          vk = πk2

                          Γ(k2+1)

                          Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                          radic2

                          Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                          2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                          radic2 such that

                          the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                          has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                          So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                          2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                          Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                          E sube K suberadicnE

                          Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                          radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                          E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                          Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                          1radicnle f(x) le 1

                          on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                          Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                          c

                          radiclog n

                          n

                          with some absolute constant c

                          See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                          n(this is the

                          DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                          Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                          C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                          σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                          128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                          128

                          Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                          the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                          128 If in total

                          2eminusc2ε2 logn

                          128 |X| lt 1

                          then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                          k16kminus1

                          εkminus1eminus

                          c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                          which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                          M equal 1

                          x le sumxiisinX

                          cixi leradic

                          2 maxxiisinXxi le

                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                          Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                          radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                          (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                          2(1 + ε8)

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                          and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                          For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                          22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                          It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                          Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                          where x1 xn are the points of X

                          Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                          Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                          )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                          (4δ

                          )kwe could rotate X

                          and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                          This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                          Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                          About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                          Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                          Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                          Q = x21 + x2

                          2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                          This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                          On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                          with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                          ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                          by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                          d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                          Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                          is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                          (d+kminus1d

                          ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                          Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                          minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                          (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                          )

                          A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                          Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                          f(x) = f(minusx)

                          References

                          [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                          [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                          [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                          [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                          [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                          [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                          [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                          [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                          [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                          [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                          [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                          [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                          Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                          Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                          Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                          [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                          [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                          [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                          [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                          [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                          [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                          [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                          [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                          [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                          [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                          [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                          [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                          [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                          [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                          18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                          347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                          2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                          ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                          and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                          bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                          Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                          Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                          dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                          [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                          [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                          [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                          [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                          [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                          [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                          [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                          [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                          [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                          [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                          [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                          [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                          [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                          [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                          [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                          Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                          Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                          Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                          E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                          URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                          • 1 Introduction
                          • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                          • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                          • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                          • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                          • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                          • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                          • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                          • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                          • 10 Monotone maps
                          • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                          • 12 Log-concavity
                          • 13 Mixed volumes
                          • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                          • 15 Needle decomposition
                          • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                          • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                          • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                          • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                          • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                          • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                          • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                          • References

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 14

                            Also it is possible to describe the function u and its polar w as the solution to the linearoptimization problemint

                            V

                            u dmicro+

                            intV lowastw dν rarr min under constraints forallx isin V y isin V lowast u(x) + w(y) ge 〈x y〉

                            In the paper of M Gromov [Grom90] we find an example of an explicit constructionof a monotone map Let a measure micro be supported in a convex compactum K so thatconv suppmicro = K sub V and put for any k isin V lowast

                            u(k) = log

                            intK

                            e〈kx〉 dmicro(x)

                            It can be checked by hand that the differential map f(k) = duk V lowast rarr V mapsV lowast precisely to the relative interior of K and its differential Df is a symmetric positivesemidefinite matrix which is positive definite if K has nonempty interior Therefore f isinjective and the volume of K is found as

                            volK =

                            intV lowast

                            detDf dk

                            This formula may be used as a starting point in studying mixed volumes see Section 13By straightforward differentiation we observe a curious fact The values f(k) and Df(k)are the first and the second moment of the measure e〈kx〉micro after its normalization

                            11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry

                            An interesting application of monotone maps (following [Ball04]) is

                            Theorem 111 (The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality) Let A and B be open subsets of Rn

                            of finite volume each then

                            vol(A+B)1n ge volA1n + volB1n

                            where A+B denotes the Minkowski sum a+ b a isin A b isin B of A and B

                            Proof Consider the probability measures micro and ν distributed uniformly on A and Brespectively Let f be the monotone map between them this means that detDfx = VBVAat any point x isin A where we put VA = volA and VB = volB for brevity

                            Note that by (101) and the remark after it the map g(x) = x+ f(x) is injective on Aand therefore

                            vol(A+B) geintA

                            detDg dx =

                            intA

                            det(id +Df(x)) dx

                            Now we are going to use the inequality det(X + Y )1n ge detX1n + detY 1n for positivesemidefinite n times n matrices (the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for matrices) its proof issimply achieved by diagonalization and is left to the reader We conclude that

                            det(id +Df(x)) ge

                            (1 +

                            (VBVA

                            )1n)n

                            and therefore

                            vol(A+B) ge

                            (1 +

                            (VBVA

                            )1n)n

                            VA =(V

                            1nA + V

                            1nB

                            )n

                            which is what we need

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                            The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                            volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                            vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                            h

                            where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                            Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                            volnminus1(partA)

                            snge(

                            volA

                            vn

                            )nminus1n

                            Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                            vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                            and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                            nminus1n v1n

                            n

                            Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                            volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                            (volA)nminus1n v1n

                            n

                            which is equivalent to the required inequality

                            Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                            For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                            Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                            Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                            Proof Observe that

                            A capB supe 1

                            2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                            then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                            Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                            vol(Aminus A) le(

                            2n

                            n

                            )volA

                            Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                            When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                            A cap(A+

                            1

                            2(x1 + x2)

                            )supe 1

                            2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                            Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                            vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                            Now integrate this over x to obtain

                            vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                            intAminusA

                            vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                            ge volA middotintAminusA

                            (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                            int (1minusx)n

                            0

                            1 dy dx =

                            = volA middotint 1

                            0

                            intxle1minusy1n

                            1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                            0

                            (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                            = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                            0

                            (1minus y1n)n dy

                            Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                            0

                            (1minus y1n)n dy =

                            int 1

                            0

                            (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                            Γ(2n+ 1)=

                            =nn(nminus 1)

                            (2n)=

                            (2n

                            n

                            )minus1

                            Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                            12 Log-concavity

                            Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                            The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                            (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                            Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                            ρ

                            (x1 + x2

                            2

                            )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                            The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                            Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                            After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                            Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                            Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                            Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                            (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                            )1minust

                            middot(int

                            Rρ(x2 y) dy

                            )tunder the assumption

                            ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                            Put for brevity

                            f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                            and also

                            F =

                            intRf(y) dy G =

                            intRg(y) dy H =

                            intRh(y) dy

                            Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                            1

                            F

                            int y

                            minusinfinf(y) dy =

                            1

                            G

                            int ϕ(y)

                            minusinfing(y) dy

                            It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                            As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                            therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                            H =

                            intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                            intRh(ψ(y))

                            (1minus t+

                            tf(y)G

                            g(ϕ(y))F

                            )dy

                            Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                            H ge F 1minustGt

                            intR

                            (f(y)G

                            Fg(ϕ(y))

                            )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                            G+ t

                            f(y)

                            F

                            )dy

                            and using the mean inequality(

                            (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                            + tf(y)F

                            )ge(f(y)F

                            )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                            )1minustwe conclude

                            H ge F 1minustGt

                            intR

                            f(y)

                            Fdy = F 1minustGt

                            Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                            Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                            vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                            this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                            1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                            volume we rewrite

                            vol(A+B) ge 1

                            (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                            The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                            If fact the inequality

                            (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                            holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                            Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                            Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                            h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                            Then intRn

                            h(x) ge(int

                            Rn

                            f(x) dx

                            )1minust

                            middot(int

                            Rn

                            g(y) dy

                            )t

                            Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                            Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                            Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                            Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                            (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                            Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                            A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                            Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                            Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                            Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                            (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                            hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                            standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                            d log f(t) =1

                            f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                            where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                            Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                            (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                            there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                            It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                            The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                            In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                            In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                            Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                            vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                            )

                            is log-concave

                            Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                            We have to prove the inequality

                            (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                            )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                            ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                            M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                            )

                            After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                            (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                            By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                            The general form of (126) is

                            (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                            which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                            13 Mixed volumes

                            Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                            Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                            vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                            for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                            Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                            ui(k) = log

                            intK

                            e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                            where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                            f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                            is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                            map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                            We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                            h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                            xisinK〈p x〉

                            Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                            〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                            when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                            h(p K) = h(pK)

                            Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                            (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                            intRn

                            det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                            Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                            Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                            Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                            MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                            It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                            It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                            P (x) =sumk

                            ckxk

                            where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                            N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                            Theorem 133 The system of equations

                            P1(x) = 0

                            P2(x) = 0

                            Pn(x) = 0

                            for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                            In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                            We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                            14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                            We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                            Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                            f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                            for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                            intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                            Rn

                            f(x) dx middotintRn

                            g(y) dy le (2π)n

                            We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                            Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                            there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                            f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                            for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                            f(x) dx middotintRn

                            g(y) dy le (2π)n

                            Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                            Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                            f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                            Hence intRn

                            f(x) dx middotintRn

                            g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                            Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                            g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                            g(y)e(zy) dy

                            Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                            Rn

                            g(y) dy leintRn

                            g(y)e(zy) dy

                            which implies the required inequality

                            In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                            Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                            0

                            f(x) dx middotint +infin

                            0

                            g(y) dy le π

                            2

                            Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                            follows that for any s t isin R

                            w

                            (s+ t

                            2

                            )= eminuse

                            s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                            radicu(s)v(t)

                            Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                            0

                            f(x) dx middotint +infin

                            0

                            g(y) dy =

                            int +infin

                            minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                            int +infin

                            minusinfinv(t) dt le

                            le(int +infin

                            minusinfinw(r) dr

                            )2

                            =

                            (int +infin

                            0

                            eminusz22 dz

                            )2

                            2

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                            Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                            1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                            The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                            f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                            implies int +infin

                            minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                            But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                            minusinfinf(x) dx =

                            int +infin

                            0

                            f(x) dx = 12

                            we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                            partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                            and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                            also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                            Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                            so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                            F (xprime) =

                            int +infin

                            0

                            f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                            int +infin

                            0

                            g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                            From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                            selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                            f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                            = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                            We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                            F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                            2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                            Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                            intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                            H

                            F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                            G(yprime) dyprime le π

                            2(2π)nminus1

                            SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                            BH+

                            g(y) dy =

                            intH

                            G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                            Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                            g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                            and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                            g(y) dy le (2π)n

                            Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                            Rn

                            dist(xH)f(x) dx

                            By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                            xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                            xf(x) dx perp H and

                            intH+

                            f(x) dxminusintHminus

                            f(x) dx = 0

                            which is exactly what we need

                            Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                            characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                            i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                            Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                            + Assume that

                            h(radicx1y1

                            radicxnyn) ge

                            radicf(x)g(y)

                            for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                            Rn+

                            f(x) dx middotintRn+

                            g(y) dy le

                            (intRn+

                            h(z) dz

                            )2

                            Proof Substitute

                            f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                            g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                            h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                            It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                            (s+ t

                            2

                            ))2

                            ge f(s)g(t)

                            Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                            f(s) ds middotintRn

                            g(t) dt le(int

                            Rn

                            h(r) dr

                            )2

                            that is equivalent to what we need

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                            Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                            minusAig(y) dy le πn

                            It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                            Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                            K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                            volK middot volK le v2n

                            where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                            Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                            The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                            (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                            f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                            22

                            and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                            22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                            Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                            Rn

                            f(x) dx =

                            intRn

                            int f(x)

                            0

                            1 dydx =

                            int 1

                            0

                            volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                            for the constant cn =int 1

                            0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                            Rn

                            g(y) dy = cn volK

                            It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                            (2π)n2 =

                            intRn

                            eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                            Hence

                            volK middot volK le (2π)n

                            c2n

                            = v2n

                            It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                            volK middot volK ge 4n

                            n

                            which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                            (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                            n

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                            15 Needle decomposition

                            Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                            The main result is the following theorem

                            Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                            micro(Pi)

                            micro(Rn)=

                            ν(Pi)

                            ν(Rn)

                            and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                            A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                            Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                            The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                            Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                            Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                            The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                            appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                            There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                            16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                            Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                            2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                            intRn e

                            minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                            Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                            Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                            micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                            Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                            So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                            Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                            micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                            = micro(U) = micro(H)

                            The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                            ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                            It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                            Now everything reduces to the following

                            Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                            and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                            ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                            The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                            primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                            into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                            (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                            2 where

                            ν(U) =

                            int x

                            minusinfineminusπξ

                            2

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                            17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                            It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                            Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                            σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                            This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                            Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                            2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                            nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                            the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                            centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                            Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                            radicn in particular the following estimate

                            holds

                            σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                            2

                            In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                            Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                            defined as follows

                            U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                            volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                            Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                            with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                            volX le v cosn+1 ε

                            2= v

                            (1minus sin2 ε

                            2

                            )n+12 le veminus

                            (n+1) sin2 ε2

                            2

                            The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                            vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                            22

                            which implies

                            σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                            22

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                            A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                            Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                            σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                            2

                            Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                            Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                            18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                            There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                            First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                            ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                            where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                            M

                            (ω∆ω)ν =

                            intM

                            |dω|2ν +

                            intM

                            |dlowastω|2ν

                            where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                            M

                            f∆fν =

                            intM

                            |df |2ν

                            From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                            L20(M) =

                            f isin L2(M)

                            intM

                            fν = 0

                            the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                            0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                            0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                            M

                            |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                            |f |2ν for all f such that

                            intM

                            fν = 0

                            The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                            It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                            One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                            |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                            ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                            (xy)isinE

                            f(x)

                            The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                            Now we make the following definition

                            Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                            Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                            First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                            Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                            19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                            Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                            Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                            micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                            The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                            The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                            Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                            ν(A) ge micro(A)

                            Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                            Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                            Rn

                            f dν geintRn

                            f dmicro

                            Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                            f dν =

                            int f(x)

                            0

                            intRn

                            1 dνdy =

                            int f(x)

                            0

                            ν(Cy)dy

                            where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                            Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                            Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                            f(x) =

                            inty(xy)isinA

                            1 dτ

                            is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                            Now we observe that

                            ν times τ(A) =

                            intRn

                            f(x) dν geintRn

                            f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                            by Lemma 193

                            And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                            Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                            ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                            micro(S)

                            is more peaked than micro

                            Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                            Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                            Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                            Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                            Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                            radic2 This result was extended to lower

                            values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                            Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                            2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                            one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                            Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                            ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                            This can be decoded as

                            vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                            ε

                            eminusπ|x|2

                            dx

                            where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                            asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                            be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                            volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                            vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                            It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                            20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                            A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                            |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                            where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                            Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                            cradic

                            nlogN

                            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                            Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                            )n2eminusα|x|

                            2 An easy es-

                            timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                            micro(Pi) geint 1

                            minus1

                            radicα

                            πeminusαx

                            2

                            dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                            eminusα

                            It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                            radicnα

                            By Theorem 191

                            micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                            1minus 1radicπα

                            eminusα)N

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                            so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                            cradic

                            nlogN

                            ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                            absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                            παeminusα)Nge c2

                            or

                            (201) N log

                            (1minus 1radic

                            παeminusα)ge c3

                            for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                            Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                            Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                            logN middot logM ge γn

                            for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                            Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                            radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                            Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                            nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                            half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                            nlogN

                            and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                            of radius rlowast = cradic

                            1logM

                            Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                            cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                            Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                            In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                            However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                            Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                            Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                            cn

                            logN

                            )n2vn

                            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                            Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                            Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                            volK

                            volKge(

                            cn

                            logN

                            )n

                            Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                            volK

                            volK=

                            (volK)2

                            volK middot volKge (volK)2

                            v2n

                            ge(

                            cn

                            logN

                            )n

                            where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                            The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                            Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                            h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                            (1 + t)n= 1

                            Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                            21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                            We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                            Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                            The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                            Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                            dist(xX) le δ

                            In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                            Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                            δkminus1

                            Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                            Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                            |X| le kvk4kminus1

                            vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                            δkminus1

                            here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                            vk = πk2

                            Γ(k2+1)

                            Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                            radic2

                            Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                            2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                            radic2 such that

                            the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                            has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                            So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                            2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                            Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                            E sube K suberadicnE

                            Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                            radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                            E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                            Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                            1radicnle f(x) le 1

                            on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                            Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                            c

                            radiclog n

                            n

                            with some absolute constant c

                            See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                            n(this is the

                            DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                            Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                            C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                            σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                            128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                            128

                            Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                            the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                            128 If in total

                            2eminusc2ε2 logn

                            128 |X| lt 1

                            then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                            k16kminus1

                            εkminus1eminus

                            c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                            which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                            M equal 1

                            x le sumxiisinX

                            cixi leradic

                            2 maxxiisinXxi le

                            radic2(1 + ε8)

                            Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                            radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                            (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                            2(1 + ε8)

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                            and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                            radic2(1 + ε8)

                            For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                            22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                            It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                            Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                            where x1 xn are the points of X

                            Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                            Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                            )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                            (4δ

                            )kwe could rotate X

                            and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                            This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                            Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                            About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                            Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                            Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                            Q = x21 + x2

                            2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                            This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                            On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                            with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                            ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                            by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                            d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                            Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                            is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                            (d+kminus1d

                            ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                            Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                            minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                            (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                            )

                            A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                            Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                            f(x) = f(minusx)

                            References

                            [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                            [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                            [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                            [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                            [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                            [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                            [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                            [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                            [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                            [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                            [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                            [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                            Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                            Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                            Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                            [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                            [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                            [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                            [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                            [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                            [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                            [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                            [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                            [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                            [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                            [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                            [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                            [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                            [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                            18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                            347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                            2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                            ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                            and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                            bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                            Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                            Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                            dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                            [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                            [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                            [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                            [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                            [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                            [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                            [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                            [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                            [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                            [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                            [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                            [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                            [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                            [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                            [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                            Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                            Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                            Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                            E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                            URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                            • 1 Introduction
                            • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                            • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                            • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                            • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                            • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                            • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                            • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                            • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                            • 10 Monotone maps
                            • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                            • 12 Log-concavity
                            • 13 Mixed volumes
                            • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                            • 15 Needle decomposition
                            • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                            • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                            • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                            • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                            • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                            • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                            • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                            • References

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 15

                              The most famous consequence of the BrunnndashMinkowski theorem is the isoperimetricinequality For an open subset A sub Rn we want to define its surface area volnminus1(partA)Several definitions are possible but for A with piecewise smooth boundary the followingformula (the Minkowski surface area) works

                              volnminus1(partA) = limhrarr+0

                              vol(A+Bh)minus volA

                              h

                              where Bh is the ball of radius h Let vn and sn be the volume and the surface area of theunit ball B1 in Rn

                              Theorem 112 For reasonable A we have

                              volnminus1(partA)

                              snge(

                              volA

                              vn

                              )nminus1n

                              Proof From the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality we obtain

                              vol(A+Bh) ge (volA1n + v1nn h)n

                              and thereforevolnminus1(partA) ge n(volA)

                              nminus1n v1n

                              n

                              Differentiating the equality volBh = vnhn we obtain sn = nvn and therefore

                              volnminus1(partA) ge snvn

                              (volA)nminus1n v1n

                              n

                              which is equivalent to the required inequality

                              Remark 113 A more careful argument can show that the equality is attained only if Ais a ball

                              For another approach to the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality the reader is referred to thepaper of M Gromov [Grom90] and the post of T Tao [Tao11] That approach uses uppertriangular Jacobi matrices in place of positive semidefinite matrices and turns out to beuseful in several generalizations of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                              Let us mention other consequences of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                              Corollary 114 Let A and B be centrally symmetric convex bodies in Rn Then thevolume vol(A+ x) capB is maximal if x = 0

                              Proof Observe that

                              A capB supe 1

                              2((A+ x) capB + (Aminus x) capB)

                              then apply the BrunnndashMinkowsky inequality

                              Theorem 115 (The RogersndashShepard inequality) For any convex A

                              vol(Aminus A) le(

                              2n

                              n

                              )volA

                              Proof Definitely AminusA = a1 minus a2 a1 a2 isin A is a projection of AtimesA sube R2n onto theRn under the map π (a b) 7rarr a minus b The fibers of this projection over x isin Rn are thesets (a1 a2) isin Atimes A such that a1 minus a2 = x that is a1 = a2 + x Hence up to translationthe fiber over x is A cap (A+ x)

                              When A cap (A+ x1) and A cap (A+ x2) are both nonempty then

                              A cap(A+

                              1

                              2(x1 + x2)

                              )supe 1

                              2(A cap (A+ x1) + A cap (A+ x2))

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                              Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                              vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                              Now integrate this over x to obtain

                              vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                              intAminusA

                              vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                              ge volA middotintAminusA

                              (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                              int (1minusx)n

                              0

                              1 dy dx =

                              = volA middotint 1

                              0

                              intxle1minusy1n

                              1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                              0

                              (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                              = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                              0

                              (1minus y1n)n dy

                              Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                              0

                              (1minus y1n)n dy =

                              int 1

                              0

                              (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                              Γ(2n+ 1)=

                              =nn(nminus 1)

                              (2n)=

                              (2n

                              n

                              )minus1

                              Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                              12 Log-concavity

                              Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                              The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                              (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                              Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                              ρ

                              (x1 + x2

                              2

                              )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                              The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                              Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                              After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                              Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                              Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                              Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                              (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                              )1minust

                              middot(int

                              Rρ(x2 y) dy

                              )tunder the assumption

                              ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                              Put for brevity

                              f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                              and also

                              F =

                              intRf(y) dy G =

                              intRg(y) dy H =

                              intRh(y) dy

                              Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                              1

                              F

                              int y

                              minusinfinf(y) dy =

                              1

                              G

                              int ϕ(y)

                              minusinfing(y) dy

                              It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                              As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                              therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                              H =

                              intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                              intRh(ψ(y))

                              (1minus t+

                              tf(y)G

                              g(ϕ(y))F

                              )dy

                              Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                              H ge F 1minustGt

                              intR

                              (f(y)G

                              Fg(ϕ(y))

                              )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                              G+ t

                              f(y)

                              F

                              )dy

                              and using the mean inequality(

                              (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                              + tf(y)F

                              )ge(f(y)F

                              )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                              )1minustwe conclude

                              H ge F 1minustGt

                              intR

                              f(y)

                              Fdy = F 1minustGt

                              Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                              Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                              vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                              this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                              1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                              volume we rewrite

                              vol(A+B) ge 1

                              (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                              The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                              If fact the inequality

                              (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                              holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                              Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                              Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                              h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                              Then intRn

                              h(x) ge(int

                              Rn

                              f(x) dx

                              )1minust

                              middot(int

                              Rn

                              g(y) dy

                              )t

                              Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                              Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                              Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                              Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                              (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                              Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                              A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                              Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                              Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                              Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                              (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                              hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                              standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                              d log f(t) =1

                              f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                              where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                              Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                              (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                              there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                              It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                              The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                              In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                              In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                              Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                              vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                              )

                              is log-concave

                              Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                              We have to prove the inequality

                              (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                              )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                              ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                              M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                              )

                              After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                              (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                              By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                              The general form of (126) is

                              (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                              which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                              13 Mixed volumes

                              Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                              Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                              vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                              for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                              Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                              ui(k) = log

                              intK

                              e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                              where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                              f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                              is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                              map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                              We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                              h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                              xisinK〈p x〉

                              Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                              〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                              when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                              h(p K) = h(pK)

                              Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                              (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                              intRn

                              det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                              Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                              Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                              Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                              MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                              It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                              It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                              P (x) =sumk

                              ckxk

                              where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                              N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                              Theorem 133 The system of equations

                              P1(x) = 0

                              P2(x) = 0

                              Pn(x) = 0

                              for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                              In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                              We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                              14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                              We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                              Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                              f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                              for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                              intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                              Rn

                              f(x) dx middotintRn

                              g(y) dy le (2π)n

                              We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                              Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                              there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                              f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                              for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                              f(x) dx middotintRn

                              g(y) dy le (2π)n

                              Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                              Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                              f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                              Hence intRn

                              f(x) dx middotintRn

                              g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                              Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                              g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                              g(y)e(zy) dy

                              Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                              Rn

                              g(y) dy leintRn

                              g(y)e(zy) dy

                              which implies the required inequality

                              In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                              Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                              0

                              f(x) dx middotint +infin

                              0

                              g(y) dy le π

                              2

                              Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                              follows that for any s t isin R

                              w

                              (s+ t

                              2

                              )= eminuse

                              s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                              radicu(s)v(t)

                              Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                              0

                              f(x) dx middotint +infin

                              0

                              g(y) dy =

                              int +infin

                              minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                              int +infin

                              minusinfinv(t) dt le

                              le(int +infin

                              minusinfinw(r) dr

                              )2

                              =

                              (int +infin

                              0

                              eminusz22 dz

                              )2

                              2

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                              Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                              1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                              The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                              f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                              implies int +infin

                              minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                              But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                              minusinfinf(x) dx =

                              int +infin

                              0

                              f(x) dx = 12

                              we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                              partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                              and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                              also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                              Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                              so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                              F (xprime) =

                              int +infin

                              0

                              f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                              int +infin

                              0

                              g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                              From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                              selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                              f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                              = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                              We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                              F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                              2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                              Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                              intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                              H

                              F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                              G(yprime) dyprime le π

                              2(2π)nminus1

                              SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                              BH+

                              g(y) dy =

                              intH

                              G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                              Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                              g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                              and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                              g(y) dy le (2π)n

                              Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                              Rn

                              dist(xH)f(x) dx

                              By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                              xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                              xf(x) dx perp H and

                              intH+

                              f(x) dxminusintHminus

                              f(x) dx = 0

                              which is exactly what we need

                              Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                              characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                              i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                              Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                              + Assume that

                              h(radicx1y1

                              radicxnyn) ge

                              radicf(x)g(y)

                              for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                              Rn+

                              f(x) dx middotintRn+

                              g(y) dy le

                              (intRn+

                              h(z) dz

                              )2

                              Proof Substitute

                              f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                              g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                              h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                              It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                              (s+ t

                              2

                              ))2

                              ge f(s)g(t)

                              Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                              f(s) ds middotintRn

                              g(t) dt le(int

                              Rn

                              h(r) dr

                              )2

                              that is equivalent to what we need

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                              Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                              minusAig(y) dy le πn

                              It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                              Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                              K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                              volK middot volK le v2n

                              where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                              Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                              The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                              (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                              f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                              22

                              and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                              22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                              Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                              Rn

                              f(x) dx =

                              intRn

                              int f(x)

                              0

                              1 dydx =

                              int 1

                              0

                              volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                              for the constant cn =int 1

                              0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                              Rn

                              g(y) dy = cn volK

                              It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                              (2π)n2 =

                              intRn

                              eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                              Hence

                              volK middot volK le (2π)n

                              c2n

                              = v2n

                              It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                              volK middot volK ge 4n

                              n

                              which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                              (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                              n

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                              15 Needle decomposition

                              Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                              The main result is the following theorem

                              Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                              micro(Pi)

                              micro(Rn)=

                              ν(Pi)

                              ν(Rn)

                              and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                              A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                              Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                              The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                              Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                              Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                              The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                              appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                              There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                              16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                              Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                              2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                              intRn e

                              minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                              Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                              Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                              micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                              Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                              So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                              Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                              micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                              = micro(U) = micro(H)

                              The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                              ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                              It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                              Now everything reduces to the following

                              Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                              and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                              ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                              The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                              primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                              into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                              (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                              2 where

                              ν(U) =

                              int x

                              minusinfineminusπξ

                              2

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                              17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                              It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                              Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                              σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                              This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                              Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                              2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                              nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                              the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                              centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                              Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                              radicn in particular the following estimate

                              holds

                              σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                              2

                              In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                              Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                              defined as follows

                              U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                              volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                              Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                              with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                              volX le v cosn+1 ε

                              2= v

                              (1minus sin2 ε

                              2

                              )n+12 le veminus

                              (n+1) sin2 ε2

                              2

                              The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                              vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                              22

                              which implies

                              σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                              22

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                              A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                              Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                              σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                              2

                              Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                              Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                              18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                              There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                              First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                              ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                              where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                              M

                              (ω∆ω)ν =

                              intM

                              |dω|2ν +

                              intM

                              |dlowastω|2ν

                              where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                              M

                              f∆fν =

                              intM

                              |df |2ν

                              From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                              L20(M) =

                              f isin L2(M)

                              intM

                              fν = 0

                              the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                              0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                              0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                              M

                              |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                              |f |2ν for all f such that

                              intM

                              fν = 0

                              The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                              It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                              One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                              |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                              ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                              (xy)isinE

                              f(x)

                              The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                              Now we make the following definition

                              Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                              Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                              First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                              Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                              19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                              Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                              Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                              micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                              The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                              The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                              Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                              ν(A) ge micro(A)

                              Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                              Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                              Rn

                              f dν geintRn

                              f dmicro

                              Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                              f dν =

                              int f(x)

                              0

                              intRn

                              1 dνdy =

                              int f(x)

                              0

                              ν(Cy)dy

                              where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                              Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                              Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                              f(x) =

                              inty(xy)isinA

                              1 dτ

                              is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                              Now we observe that

                              ν times τ(A) =

                              intRn

                              f(x) dν geintRn

                              f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                              by Lemma 193

                              And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                              Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                              ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                              micro(S)

                              is more peaked than micro

                              Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                              Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                              Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                              Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                              Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                              radic2 This result was extended to lower

                              values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                              Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                              2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                              one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                              Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                              ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                              This can be decoded as

                              vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                              ε

                              eminusπ|x|2

                              dx

                              where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                              asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                              be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                              volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                              vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                              It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                              20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                              A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                              |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                              where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                              Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                              cradic

                              nlogN

                              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                              Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                              )n2eminusα|x|

                              2 An easy es-

                              timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                              micro(Pi) geint 1

                              minus1

                              radicα

                              πeminusαx

                              2

                              dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                              eminusα

                              It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                              radicnα

                              By Theorem 191

                              micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                              1minus 1radicπα

                              eminusα)N

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                              so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                              cradic

                              nlogN

                              ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                              absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                              παeminusα)Nge c2

                              or

                              (201) N log

                              (1minus 1radic

                              παeminusα)ge c3

                              for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                              Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                              Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                              logN middot logM ge γn

                              for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                              Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                              radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                              Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                              nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                              half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                              nlogN

                              and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                              of radius rlowast = cradic

                              1logM

                              Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                              cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                              Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                              In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                              However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                              Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                              Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                              cn

                              logN

                              )n2vn

                              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                              Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                              Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                              volK

                              volKge(

                              cn

                              logN

                              )n

                              Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                              volK

                              volK=

                              (volK)2

                              volK middot volKge (volK)2

                              v2n

                              ge(

                              cn

                              logN

                              )n

                              where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                              The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                              Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                              h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                              (1 + t)n= 1

                              Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                              21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                              We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                              Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                              The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                              Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                              dist(xX) le δ

                              In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                              Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                              δkminus1

                              Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                              Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                              |X| le kvk4kminus1

                              vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                              δkminus1

                              here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                              vk = πk2

                              Γ(k2+1)

                              Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                              radic2

                              Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                              2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                              radic2 such that

                              the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                              has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                              So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                              2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                              Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                              E sube K suberadicnE

                              Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                              radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                              E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                              Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                              1radicnle f(x) le 1

                              on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                              Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                              c

                              radiclog n

                              n

                              with some absolute constant c

                              See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                              n(this is the

                              DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                              Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                              C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                              σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                              128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                              128

                              Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                              the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                              128 If in total

                              2eminusc2ε2 logn

                              128 |X| lt 1

                              then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                              k16kminus1

                              εkminus1eminus

                              c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                              which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                              M equal 1

                              x le sumxiisinX

                              cixi leradic

                              2 maxxiisinXxi le

                              radic2(1 + ε8)

                              Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                              radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                              (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                              2(1 + ε8)

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                              and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                              radic2(1 + ε8)

                              For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                              22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                              It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                              Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                              where x1 xn are the points of X

                              Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                              Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                              )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                              (4δ

                              )kwe could rotate X

                              and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                              This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                              Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                              About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                              Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                              Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                              Q = x21 + x2

                              2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                              This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                              On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                              with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                              ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                              by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                              d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                              Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                              is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                              (d+kminus1d

                              ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                              Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                              minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                              (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                              )

                              A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                              Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                              f(x) = f(minusx)

                              References

                              [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                              [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                              [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                              [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                              [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                              [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                              [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                              [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                              [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                              [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                              [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                              [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                              Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                              Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                              Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                              [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                              [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                              [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                              [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                              [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                              [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                              [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                              [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                              [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                              [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                              [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                              [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                              [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                              [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                              18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                              347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                              2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                              ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                              and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                              bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                              Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                              Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                              dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                              [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                              [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                              [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                              [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                              [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                              [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                              [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                              [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                              [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                              [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                              [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                              [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                              [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                              [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                              [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                              Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                              Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                              Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                              E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                              URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                              • 1 Introduction
                              • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                              • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                              • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                              • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                              • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                              • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                              • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                              • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                              • 10 Monotone maps
                              • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                              • 12 Log-concavity
                              • 13 Mixed volumes
                              • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                              • 15 Needle decomposition
                              • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                              • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                              • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                              • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                              • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                              • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                              • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                              • References

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 16

                                Hence vol(A cap (A+ x))1n is a concave function on AminusA If we introduce the norm xwith the unit ball Aminus A then from concavity

                                vol(A cap (A+ x)) ge (1minus x)n volA

                                Now integrate this over x to obtain

                                vol2nAtimes A = (volA)2 =

                                intAminusA

                                vol(A cap (A+ x)) dx ge

                                ge volA middotintAminusA

                                (1minus x)n dx = volA middotintAminusA

                                int (1minusx)n

                                0

                                1 dy dx =

                                = volA middotint 1

                                0

                                intxle1minusy1n

                                1 dx dy = volA middotint 1

                                0

                                (1minus y1n)n vol(Aminus A) dy =

                                = volA middot vol(Aminus A) middotint 1

                                0

                                (1minus y1n)n dy

                                Let us calculate the last integral by substitution y = tn and using the beta-functionint 1

                                0

                                (1minus y1n)n dy =

                                int 1

                                0

                                (1minus t)nntnminus1 dt = nB(n+ 1 n) =nΓ(n+ 1)Γ(n)

                                Γ(2n+ 1)=

                                =nn(nminus 1)

                                (2n)=

                                (2n

                                n

                                )minus1

                                Substituting this into the previous inequality we complete the proof

                                12 Log-concavity

                                Let us discuss logarithmically concave measures (abbreviated ldquolog-concaverdquo) and theirproperties see also [Ball04 Tao11] A log-concave measure on Rn is a measure havingdensity ρ such that log ρ(x) is a concave function though there are more general definitionsfor measures having no density Following the usual convention we allow values minusinfin forconcave functions corresponding to 0 for log-concave functions

                                The log-concavity is expressed by the inequality

                                (121) ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)t

                                Moreover for continuous density ρ it is sufficient to check the case t = 12 that is

                                ρ

                                (x1 + x2

                                2

                                )geradicρ(x1)ρ(x2)

                                The main result about log-concave measures is the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                Theorem 121 If a measure micro is log-concave and π Rm rarr Rn is a linear surjectionthen πlowastmicro is log-concave

                                After the trivial observation that a Cartesian product of log-concave measures is log-concave we immediately obtain

                                Corollary 122 The convolution of two log-concave measures is log-concave

                                Proof of Theorem 121 It sufficient to consider the case when π drops the dimension by1 and use induction Moreover since the concavity property is essentially one-dimensionalit suffices to consider the case of n = 1 and π (x y) 7rarr x where y isin R

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                                Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                                (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                                )1minust

                                middot(int

                                Rρ(x2 y) dy

                                )tunder the assumption

                                ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                                Put for brevity

                                f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                                and also

                                F =

                                intRf(y) dy G =

                                intRg(y) dy H =

                                intRh(y) dy

                                Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                                1

                                F

                                int y

                                minusinfinf(y) dy =

                                1

                                G

                                int ϕ(y)

                                minusinfing(y) dy

                                It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                                As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                                therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                                H =

                                intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                                intRh(ψ(y))

                                (1minus t+

                                tf(y)G

                                g(ϕ(y))F

                                )dy

                                Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                                H ge F 1minustGt

                                intR

                                (f(y)G

                                Fg(ϕ(y))

                                )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                                G+ t

                                f(y)

                                F

                                )dy

                                and using the mean inequality(

                                (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                                + tf(y)F

                                )ge(f(y)F

                                )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                                )1minustwe conclude

                                H ge F 1minustGt

                                intR

                                f(y)

                                Fdy = F 1minustGt

                                Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                                Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                                vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                                this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                                1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                                volume we rewrite

                                vol(A+B) ge 1

                                (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                                The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                                If fact the inequality

                                (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                                holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                                Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                                Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                                h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                                Then intRn

                                h(x) ge(int

                                Rn

                                f(x) dx

                                )1minust

                                middot(int

                                Rn

                                g(y) dy

                                )t

                                Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                                Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                                Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                                Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                                (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                                Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                                A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                                Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                                Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                                Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                                (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                                hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                                standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                                d log f(t) =1

                                f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                                where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                                Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                                (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                                there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                                It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                                The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                                In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                                In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                                Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                                vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                )

                                is log-concave

                                Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                                We have to prove the inequality

                                (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                                ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                                M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                                )

                                After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                                (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                                By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                                The general form of (126) is

                                (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                                which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                                13 Mixed volumes

                                Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                                Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                                vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                                for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                                Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                                ui(k) = log

                                intK

                                e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                                where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                                f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                                is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                                map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                                We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                                h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                                xisinK〈p x〉

                                Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                                〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                                when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                                h(p K) = h(pK)

                                Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                                (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                                intRn

                                det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                                Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                                Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                                Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                                MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                                It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                                It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                                P (x) =sumk

                                ckxk

                                where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                                N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                                Theorem 133 The system of equations

                                P1(x) = 0

                                P2(x) = 0

                                Pn(x) = 0

                                for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                                In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                                We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                                14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                                We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                                Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                                f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                                intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                                Rn

                                f(x) dx middotintRn

                                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                f(x) dx middotintRn

                                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                Hence intRn

                                f(x) dx middotintRn

                                g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                g(y)e(zy) dy

                                Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                Rn

                                g(y) dy leintRn

                                g(y)e(zy) dy

                                which implies the required inequality

                                In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                0

                                f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                0

                                g(y) dy le π

                                2

                                Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                follows that for any s t isin R

                                w

                                (s+ t

                                2

                                )= eminuse

                                s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                radicu(s)v(t)

                                Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                0

                                f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                0

                                g(y) dy =

                                int +infin

                                minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                int +infin

                                minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                le(int +infin

                                minusinfinw(r) dr

                                )2

                                =

                                (int +infin

                                0

                                eminusz22 dz

                                )2

                                2

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                implies int +infin

                                minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                int +infin

                                0

                                f(x) dx = 12

                                we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                F (xprime) =

                                int +infin

                                0

                                f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                int +infin

                                0

                                g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                H

                                F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                2(2π)nminus1

                                SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                BH+

                                g(y) dy =

                                intH

                                G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                Rn

                                dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                xf(x) dx perp H and

                                intH+

                                f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                f(x) dx = 0

                                which is exactly what we need

                                Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                + Assume that

                                h(radicx1y1

                                radicxnyn) ge

                                radicf(x)g(y)

                                for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                Rn+

                                f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                g(y) dy le

                                (intRn+

                                h(z) dz

                                )2

                                Proof Substitute

                                f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                (s+ t

                                2

                                ))2

                                ge f(s)g(t)

                                Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                f(s) ds middotintRn

                                g(t) dt le(int

                                Rn

                                h(r) dr

                                )2

                                that is equivalent to what we need

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                volK middot volK le v2n

                                where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                22

                                and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                Rn

                                f(x) dx =

                                intRn

                                int f(x)

                                0

                                1 dydx =

                                int 1

                                0

                                volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                for the constant cn =int 1

                                0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                Rn

                                g(y) dy = cn volK

                                It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                (2π)n2 =

                                intRn

                                eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                Hence

                                volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                c2n

                                = v2n

                                It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                volK middot volK ge 4n

                                n

                                which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                n

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                15 Needle decomposition

                                Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                The main result is the following theorem

                                Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                micro(Pi)

                                micro(Rn)=

                                ν(Pi)

                                ν(Rn)

                                and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                intRn e

                                minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                Now everything reduces to the following

                                Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                2 where

                                ν(U) =

                                int x

                                minusinfineminusπξ

                                2

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                radicn in particular the following estimate

                                holds

                                σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                2

                                In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                defined as follows

                                U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                2= v

                                (1minus sin2 ε

                                2

                                )n+12 le veminus

                                (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                2

                                The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                22

                                which implies

                                σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                22

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                2

                                Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                M

                                (ω∆ω)ν =

                                intM

                                |dω|2ν +

                                intM

                                |dlowastω|2ν

                                where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                M

                                f∆fν =

                                intM

                                |df |2ν

                                From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                L20(M) =

                                f isin L2(M)

                                intM

                                fν = 0

                                the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                M

                                |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                |f |2ν for all f such that

                                intM

                                fν = 0

                                The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                (xy)isinE

                                f(x)

                                The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                Now we make the following definition

                                Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                Rn

                                f dν geintRn

                                f dmicro

                                Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                f dν =

                                int f(x)

                                0

                                intRn

                                1 dνdy =

                                int f(x)

                                0

                                ν(Cy)dy

                                where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                f(x) =

                                inty(xy)isinA

                                1 dτ

                                is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                Now we observe that

                                ν times τ(A) =

                                intRn

                                f(x) dν geintRn

                                f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                by Lemma 193

                                And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                micro(S)

                                is more peaked than micro

                                Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                This can be decoded as

                                vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                ε

                                eminusπ|x|2

                                dx

                                where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                cradic

                                nlogN

                                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                )n2eminusα|x|

                                2 An easy es-

                                timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                micro(Pi) geint 1

                                minus1

                                radicα

                                πeminusαx

                                2

                                dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                eminusα

                                It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                radicnα

                                By Theorem 191

                                micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                1minus 1radicπα

                                eminusα)N

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                cradic

                                nlogN

                                ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                παeminusα)Nge c2

                                or

                                (201) N log

                                (1minus 1radic

                                παeminusα)ge c3

                                for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                logN middot logM ge γn

                                for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                nlogN

                                and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                of radius rlowast = cradic

                                1logM

                                Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                cn

                                logN

                                )n2vn

                                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                volK

                                volKge(

                                cn

                                logN

                                )n

                                Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                volK

                                volK=

                                (volK)2

                                volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                v2n

                                ge(

                                cn

                                logN

                                )n

                                where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                (1 + t)n= 1

                                Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                dist(xX) le δ

                                In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                δkminus1

                                Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                δkminus1

                                here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                vk = πk2

                                Γ(k2+1)

                                Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                radic2

                                Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                radic2 such that

                                the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                E sube K suberadicnE

                                Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                c

                                radiclog n

                                n

                                with some absolute constant c

                                See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                n(this is the

                                DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                128

                                Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                128 If in total

                                2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                128 |X| lt 1

                                then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                k16kminus1

                                εkminus1eminus

                                c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                M equal 1

                                x le sumxiisinX

                                cixi leradic

                                2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                radic2(1 + ε8)

                                Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                2(1 + ε8)

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                radic2(1 + ε8)

                                For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                where x1 xn are the points of X

                                Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                (4δ

                                )kwe could rotate X

                                and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                Q = x21 + x2

                                2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                (d+kminus1d

                                ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                )

                                A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                f(x) = f(minusx)

                                References

                                [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                • 1 Introduction
                                • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                • 10 Monotone maps
                                • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                • 12 Log-concavity
                                • 13 Mixed volumes
                                • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                • 15 Needle decomposition
                                • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                • References

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 17

                                  Now we have to prove thatintRρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y) dy ge

                                  (intRρ(x1 y) dy

                                  )1minust

                                  middot(int

                                  Rρ(x2 y) dy

                                  )tunder the assumption

                                  ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 (1minus t)y1 + ty2) ge ρ(x1 y1)1minustρ(x2 y2)t

                                  Put for brevity

                                  f(y) = ρ(x1 y) g(y) = ρ(x2 y) h(y) = ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2 y)

                                  and also

                                  F =

                                  intRf(y) dy G =

                                  intRg(y) dy H =

                                  intRh(y) dy

                                  Consider the monotone map ϕ R rarr R such that is transports f(y)Fdy to g(y)Gdythat is for all y

                                  1

                                  F

                                  int y

                                  minusinfinf(y) dy =

                                  1

                                  G

                                  int ϕ(y)

                                  minusinfing(y) dy

                                  It follows that ϕprime(y) = f(y)Gg(ϕ(y))F

                                  As y runs from minusinfin to +infin the value ϕ(y) does the same

                                  therefore ψ(y) = (1minus t)y + tϕ(y) also runs monotonically from minusinfin to +infin So we write

                                  H =

                                  intRh(ψ(y)) dψ(y) =

                                  intRh(ψ(y))

                                  (1minus t+

                                  tf(y)G

                                  g(ϕ(y))F

                                  )dy

                                  Using the assumption h(ψ(y)) ge f(y)1minustg(ϕ(y))t we obtain

                                  H ge F 1minustGt

                                  intR

                                  (f(y)G

                                  Fg(ϕ(y))

                                  )1minust((1minus t)g(ϕ(y))

                                  G+ t

                                  f(y)

                                  F

                                  )dy

                                  and using the mean inequality(

                                  (1minus t)g(ϕ(y))G

                                  + tf(y)F

                                  )ge(f(y)F

                                  )tmiddot(g(ϕ(y))G

                                  )1minustwe conclude

                                  H ge F 1minustGt

                                  intR

                                  f(y)

                                  Fdy = F 1minustGt

                                  Now we make several observations Every measure with constant density inside a convexbody and zero density outside is log-concave by definition So any its projection is alsolog-concave

                                  Then we start from two convex bodies A sub Rn B sub Rn and put the into Rn+1 asAprime = Atimes 0 and Bprime = B times 1 Note that the convex hull convAprime cupBprime contains the set((1 minus t)A + tB) times t Therefore by projection to the last coordinate and log-concavitywe obtain

                                  vol((1minus t)A+ tB) ge volA1minust volBt

                                  this inequality is the dimension-independent version of the BrunnndashMinkowski inequalityIndeed it actually implies the standard BrunnndashMinkowski inequality as follows ReplacingA and B with their homothetic copies 1

                                  1minustA and 1tB and using the homogeneity of the

                                  volume we rewrite

                                  vol(A+B) ge 1

                                  (1minus t)(1minust)nttnvolA1minust volBt

                                  The reader is invited to check that after finding the maximum of the right hand side in twe arrive again at the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                                  If fact the inequality

                                  (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                                  holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                                  Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                                  Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                                  h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                                  Then intRn

                                  h(x) ge(int

                                  Rn

                                  f(x) dx

                                  )1minust

                                  middot(int

                                  Rn

                                  g(y) dy

                                  )t

                                  Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                                  Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                                  Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                                  Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                                  (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                                  Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                                  A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                                  Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                                  Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                                  Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                                  (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                                  hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                                  standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                                  d log f(t) =1

                                  f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                                  where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                                  Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                                  (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                                  there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                                  It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                                  The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                                  In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                                  In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                                  Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                                  vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                  )

                                  is log-concave

                                  Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                                  We have to prove the inequality

                                  (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                  )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                                  ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                                  M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                                  )

                                  After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                                  (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                                  By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                                  The general form of (126) is

                                  (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                                  which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                                  13 Mixed volumes

                                  Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                                  Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                                  vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                                  for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                                  Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                                  ui(k) = log

                                  intK

                                  e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                                  where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                                  f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                                  is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                                  map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                                  We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                                  h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                                  xisinK〈p x〉

                                  Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                                  〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                                  when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                                  h(p K) = h(pK)

                                  Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                                  (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                                  intRn

                                  det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                                  Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                                  Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                                  Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                                  MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                                  It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                                  It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                                  P (x) =sumk

                                  ckxk

                                  where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                                  N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                                  Theorem 133 The system of equations

                                  P1(x) = 0

                                  P2(x) = 0

                                  Pn(x) = 0

                                  for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                                  In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                                  We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                                  14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                                  We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                                  Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                                  f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                  for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                                  intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                                  Rn

                                  f(x) dx middotintRn

                                  g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                  We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                  Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                  there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                  f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                  for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                  f(x) dx middotintRn

                                  g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                  Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                  Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                  f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                  Hence intRn

                                  f(x) dx middotintRn

                                  g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                  Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                  g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                  g(y)e(zy) dy

                                  Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                  Rn

                                  g(y) dy leintRn

                                  g(y)e(zy) dy

                                  which implies the required inequality

                                  In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                  Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                  0

                                  f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                  0

                                  g(y) dy le π

                                  2

                                  Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                  follows that for any s t isin R

                                  w

                                  (s+ t

                                  2

                                  )= eminuse

                                  s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                  radicu(s)v(t)

                                  Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                  0

                                  f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                  0

                                  g(y) dy =

                                  int +infin

                                  minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                  int +infin

                                  minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                  le(int +infin

                                  minusinfinw(r) dr

                                  )2

                                  =

                                  (int +infin

                                  0

                                  eminusz22 dz

                                  )2

                                  2

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                  Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                  1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                  The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                  f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                  implies int +infin

                                  minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                  But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                  minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                  int +infin

                                  0

                                  f(x) dx = 12

                                  we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                  partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                  and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                  also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                  Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                  so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                  F (xprime) =

                                  int +infin

                                  0

                                  f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                  int +infin

                                  0

                                  g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                  From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                  selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                  f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                  = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                  We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                  F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                  2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                  Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                  intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                  H

                                  F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                  G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                  2(2π)nminus1

                                  SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                  BH+

                                  g(y) dy =

                                  intH

                                  G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                  Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                  g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                  and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                  g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                  Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                  Rn

                                  dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                  By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                  xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                  xf(x) dx perp H and

                                  intH+

                                  f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                  f(x) dx = 0

                                  which is exactly what we need

                                  Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                  characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                  i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                  Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                  + Assume that

                                  h(radicx1y1

                                  radicxnyn) ge

                                  radicf(x)g(y)

                                  for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                  Rn+

                                  f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                  g(y) dy le

                                  (intRn+

                                  h(z) dz

                                  )2

                                  Proof Substitute

                                  f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                  g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                  h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                  It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                  (s+ t

                                  2

                                  ))2

                                  ge f(s)g(t)

                                  Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                  f(s) ds middotintRn

                                  g(t) dt le(int

                                  Rn

                                  h(r) dr

                                  )2

                                  that is equivalent to what we need

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                  Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                  minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                  It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                  Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                  K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                  volK middot volK le v2n

                                  where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                  Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                  The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                  (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                  f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                  22

                                  and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                  22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                  Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                  Rn

                                  f(x) dx =

                                  intRn

                                  int f(x)

                                  0

                                  1 dydx =

                                  int 1

                                  0

                                  volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                  for the constant cn =int 1

                                  0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                  Rn

                                  g(y) dy = cn volK

                                  It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                  (2π)n2 =

                                  intRn

                                  eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                  Hence

                                  volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                  c2n

                                  = v2n

                                  It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                  volK middot volK ge 4n

                                  n

                                  which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                  (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                  n

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                  15 Needle decomposition

                                  Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                  The main result is the following theorem

                                  Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                  micro(Pi)

                                  micro(Rn)=

                                  ν(Pi)

                                  ν(Rn)

                                  and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                  A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                  Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                  The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                  Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                  Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                  The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                  appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                  There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                  16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                  Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                  2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                  intRn e

                                  minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                  Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                  Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                  micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                  Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                  So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                  Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                  micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                  = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                  The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                  ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                  It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                  Now everything reduces to the following

                                  Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                  and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                  ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                  The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                  primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                  into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                  (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                  2 where

                                  ν(U) =

                                  int x

                                  minusinfineminusπξ

                                  2

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                  17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                  It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                  Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                  σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                  This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                  Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                  2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                  nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                  the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                  centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                  Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                  radicn in particular the following estimate

                                  holds

                                  σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                  2

                                  In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                  Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                  defined as follows

                                  U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                  volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                  Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                  with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                  volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                  2= v

                                  (1minus sin2 ε

                                  2

                                  )n+12 le veminus

                                  (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                  2

                                  The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                  vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                  22

                                  which implies

                                  σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                  22

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                  A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                  Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                  σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                  2

                                  Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                  Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                  18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                  There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                  First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                  ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                  where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                  M

                                  (ω∆ω)ν =

                                  intM

                                  |dω|2ν +

                                  intM

                                  |dlowastω|2ν

                                  where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                  M

                                  f∆fν =

                                  intM

                                  |df |2ν

                                  From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                  L20(M) =

                                  f isin L2(M)

                                  intM

                                  fν = 0

                                  the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                  0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                  0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                  M

                                  |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                  |f |2ν for all f such that

                                  intM

                                  fν = 0

                                  The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                  It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                  One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                  |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                  ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                  (xy)isinE

                                  f(x)

                                  The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                  Now we make the following definition

                                  Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                  Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                  First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                  Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                  19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                  Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                  Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                  micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                  The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                  The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                  Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                  ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                  Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                  Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                  Rn

                                  f dν geintRn

                                  f dmicro

                                  Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                  f dν =

                                  int f(x)

                                  0

                                  intRn

                                  1 dνdy =

                                  int f(x)

                                  0

                                  ν(Cy)dy

                                  where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                  Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                  Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                  f(x) =

                                  inty(xy)isinA

                                  1 dτ

                                  is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                  Now we observe that

                                  ν times τ(A) =

                                  intRn

                                  f(x) dν geintRn

                                  f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                  by Lemma 193

                                  And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                  Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                  ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                  micro(S)

                                  is more peaked than micro

                                  Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                  Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                  Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                  Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                  Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                  radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                  values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                  Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                  2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                  one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                  Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                  ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                  This can be decoded as

                                  vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                  ε

                                  eminusπ|x|2

                                  dx

                                  where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                  asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                  be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                  volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                  vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                  It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                  20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                  A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                  |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                  where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                  Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                  cradic

                                  nlogN

                                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                  Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                  )n2eminusα|x|

                                  2 An easy es-

                                  timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                  micro(Pi) geint 1

                                  minus1

                                  radicα

                                  πeminusαx

                                  2

                                  dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                  eminusα

                                  It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                  radicnα

                                  By Theorem 191

                                  micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                  1minus 1radicπα

                                  eminusα)N

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                  so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                  cradic

                                  nlogN

                                  ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                  absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                  παeminusα)Nge c2

                                  or

                                  (201) N log

                                  (1minus 1radic

                                  παeminusα)ge c3

                                  for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                  Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                  Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                  logN middot logM ge γn

                                  for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                  Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                  radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                  Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                  nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                  half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                  nlogN

                                  and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                  of radius rlowast = cradic

                                  1logM

                                  Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                  cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                  Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                  In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                  However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                  Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                  Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                  cn

                                  logN

                                  )n2vn

                                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                  Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                  Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                  volK

                                  volKge(

                                  cn

                                  logN

                                  )n

                                  Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                  volK

                                  volK=

                                  (volK)2

                                  volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                  v2n

                                  ge(

                                  cn

                                  logN

                                  )n

                                  where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                  The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                  Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                  h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                  (1 + t)n= 1

                                  Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                  21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                  We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                  Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                  The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                  Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                  dist(xX) le δ

                                  In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                  Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                  δkminus1

                                  Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                  Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                  |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                  vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                  δkminus1

                                  here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                  vk = πk2

                                  Γ(k2+1)

                                  Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                  radic2

                                  Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                  2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                  radic2 such that

                                  the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                  has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                  So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                  2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                  Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                  E sube K suberadicnE

                                  Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                  radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                  E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                  Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                  1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                  on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                  Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                  c

                                  radiclog n

                                  n

                                  with some absolute constant c

                                  See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                  n(this is the

                                  DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                  Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                  C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                  σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                  128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                  128

                                  Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                  the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                  128 If in total

                                  2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                  128 |X| lt 1

                                  then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                  k16kminus1

                                  εkminus1eminus

                                  c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                  which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                  M equal 1

                                  x le sumxiisinX

                                  cixi leradic

                                  2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                                  Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                  radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                  (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                  2(1 + ε8)

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                  and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                                  For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                  22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                  It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                  Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                  where x1 xn are the points of X

                                  Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                  Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                  )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                  (4δ

                                  )kwe could rotate X

                                  and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                  This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                  Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                  About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                  Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                  Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                  Q = x21 + x2

                                  2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                  This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                  On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                  with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                  ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                  by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                  d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                  Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                  is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                  (d+kminus1d

                                  ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                  Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                  minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                  (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                  )

                                  A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                  Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                  f(x) = f(minusx)

                                  References

                                  [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                  [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                  [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                  [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                  [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                  [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                  [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                  [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                  [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                  [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                  [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                  [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                  Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                  Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                  Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                  [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                  [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                  [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                  [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                  [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                  [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                  [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                  [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                  [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                  [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                  [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                  [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                  [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                  [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                  18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                  347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                  2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                  ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                  and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                  bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                  Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                  Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                  dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                  [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                  [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                  [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                  [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                  [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                  [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                  [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                  [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                  [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                  [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                  [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                  [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                  [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                  [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                  [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                  Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                  Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                  Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                  E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                  URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                  • 1 Introduction
                                  • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                  • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                  • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                  • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                  • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                  • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                  • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                  • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                  • 10 Monotone maps
                                  • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                  • 12 Log-concavity
                                  • 13 Mixed volumes
                                  • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                  • 15 Needle decomposition
                                  • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                  • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                  • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                  • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                  • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                  • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                  • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                  • References

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 18

                                    If fact the inequality

                                    (122) micro((1minus t)A+ tB) ge microA1minustmicroBt

                                    holds for arbitrary log-concave measure micro and convex bodies A and B with almost thesame proof as for vol = micro This inequality (122) is sometimes considered as the definitionof log-concavity which is also applicable to measures with no density The reader maycheck that for a measure with density the two definitions are equivalent

                                    Actually the case of possibly non-convexA andB in the dimension-independent BrunnndashMinkowski inequality is also valid and is contained in the following version of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (see also [Tao11] for generalizations to nilpotent Lie groups) alsoknown as the functional BrunnndashMinkowski inequality

                                    Theorem 123 Assume f g h are nonnegative densities in Rn such that for some t isin[0 1] and x y isin Rn

                                    h((1minus t)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t

                                    Then intRn

                                    h(x) ge(int

                                    Rn

                                    f(x) dx

                                    )1minust

                                    middot(int

                                    Rn

                                    g(y) dy

                                    )t

                                    Sketch of the proof One way of proving this theorem is to show that the property h((1minust)x+ ty) ge f(x)1minustg(y)t is preserved under projections dropping dimension by 1 like wedid in the proof of Theorem 121

                                    Another approach is to consider a monotone map ϕ sending the measure f(x)dx tog(x)dx and then consider the monotone map ψ x 7rarr (1minust)x+tϕ(x) and write inequalitiesfor h((1minus t)x+ tϕ(x)) similarly to the proof of Theorem 121

                                    Another result that benefits from log-concavity is the Minkowski theorem on facet areasWe split it into the simple direct theorem and the harder converse theorem

                                    Theorem 124 If P sub Rn is a polytope ν1 νm are its facet normals and A1 Amare its respective facet surface areas then

                                    (123) A1ν1 + A2ν2 + middot middot middot+ Amνm = 0

                                    Proof Consider a constant vector field v it has zero divergence and by the Gauss theoremits flux through partP is zero That is

                                    A1(ν1 v) + A2(ν2 v) + middot middot middot+ Am(νm v) = 0

                                    Since v is arbitrary the result follows

                                    Theorem 125 For any prescribed set of normals ν1 νm spanning Rn and positivefacet surface areas A1 Am satisfying (123) there exists a unique (up to translations)polytope P corresponding to these data

                                    Sketch of the proof Introduce real variables t1 tm and consider the polytope

                                    (124) P (t) = x isin Rn foralli = 1 m (x νi) le tiSince a positive combination of νirsquos equals zero then P (t) is always bounded The equa-tion (124) may treat xjrsquos and tirsquos as variables and define an (n + m)-dimensional poly-

                                    hedron P this way P (t) is a parameterized n-dimensional section of P By the PrekopandashLeindler inequality the function f(t) = volP (t) is log-concave in t The

                                    standard geometric differentiation reasoning shows that its logarithmic derivative equals

                                    d log f(t) =1

                                    f(t)(A1(t)dt1 + middot middot middot+ Am(t)dtm)

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                                    where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                                    Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                                    (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                                    there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                                    It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                                    The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                                    In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                                    In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                                    Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                                    vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                    )

                                    is log-concave

                                    Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                                    We have to prove the inequality

                                    (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                    )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                                    ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                                    M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                                    )

                                    After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                                    (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                                    By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                                    The general form of (126) is

                                    (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                                    which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                                    13 Mixed volumes

                                    Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                                    Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                                    vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                                    for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                                    Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                                    ui(k) = log

                                    intK

                                    e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                                    where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                                    f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                                    is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                                    map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                                    We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                                    h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                                    xisinK〈p x〉

                                    Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                                    〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                                    when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                                    h(p K) = h(pK)

                                    Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                                    (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                                    intRn

                                    det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                                    Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                                    Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                                    Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                                    MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                                    It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                                    It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                                    P (x) =sumk

                                    ckxk

                                    where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                                    N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                                    Theorem 133 The system of equations

                                    P1(x) = 0

                                    P2(x) = 0

                                    Pn(x) = 0

                                    for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                                    In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                                    We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                                    14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                                    We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                                    Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                                    f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                    for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                                    intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                                    Rn

                                    f(x) dx middotintRn

                                    g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                    We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                    Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                    there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                    f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                    for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                    f(x) dx middotintRn

                                    g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                    Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                    Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                    f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                    Hence intRn

                                    f(x) dx middotintRn

                                    g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                    Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                    g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                    g(y)e(zy) dy

                                    Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                    Rn

                                    g(y) dy leintRn

                                    g(y)e(zy) dy

                                    which implies the required inequality

                                    In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                    Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                    0

                                    f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                    0

                                    g(y) dy le π

                                    2

                                    Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                    follows that for any s t isin R

                                    w

                                    (s+ t

                                    2

                                    )= eminuse

                                    s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                    radicu(s)v(t)

                                    Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                    0

                                    f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                    0

                                    g(y) dy =

                                    int +infin

                                    minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                    int +infin

                                    minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                    le(int +infin

                                    minusinfinw(r) dr

                                    )2

                                    =

                                    (int +infin

                                    0

                                    eminusz22 dz

                                    )2

                                    2

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                    Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                    1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                    The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                    f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                    implies int +infin

                                    minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                    But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                    minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                    int +infin

                                    0

                                    f(x) dx = 12

                                    we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                    partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                    and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                    also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                    Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                    so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                    F (xprime) =

                                    int +infin

                                    0

                                    f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                    int +infin

                                    0

                                    g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                    From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                    selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                    f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                    = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                    We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                    F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                    2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                    Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                    intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                    H

                                    F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                    G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                    2(2π)nminus1

                                    SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                    BH+

                                    g(y) dy =

                                    intH

                                    G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                    Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                    g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                    and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                    g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                    Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                    Rn

                                    dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                    By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                    xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                    xf(x) dx perp H and

                                    intH+

                                    f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                    f(x) dx = 0

                                    which is exactly what we need

                                    Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                    characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                    i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                    Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                    + Assume that

                                    h(radicx1y1

                                    radicxnyn) ge

                                    radicf(x)g(y)

                                    for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                    Rn+

                                    f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                    g(y) dy le

                                    (intRn+

                                    h(z) dz

                                    )2

                                    Proof Substitute

                                    f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                    g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                    h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                    It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                    (s+ t

                                    2

                                    ))2

                                    ge f(s)g(t)

                                    Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                    f(s) ds middotintRn

                                    g(t) dt le(int

                                    Rn

                                    h(r) dr

                                    )2

                                    that is equivalent to what we need

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                    Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                    minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                    It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                    Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                    K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                    volK middot volK le v2n

                                    where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                    Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                    The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                    (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                    f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                    22

                                    and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                    22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                    Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                    Rn

                                    f(x) dx =

                                    intRn

                                    int f(x)

                                    0

                                    1 dydx =

                                    int 1

                                    0

                                    volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                    for the constant cn =int 1

                                    0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                    Rn

                                    g(y) dy = cn volK

                                    It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                    (2π)n2 =

                                    intRn

                                    eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                    Hence

                                    volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                    c2n

                                    = v2n

                                    It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                    volK middot volK ge 4n

                                    n

                                    which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                    (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                    n

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                    15 Needle decomposition

                                    Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                    The main result is the following theorem

                                    Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                    micro(Pi)

                                    micro(Rn)=

                                    ν(Pi)

                                    ν(Rn)

                                    and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                    A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                    Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                    The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                    Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                    Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                    The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                    appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                    There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                    16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                    Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                    2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                    intRn e

                                    minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                    Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                    Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                    micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                    Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                    So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                    Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                    micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                    = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                    The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                    ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                    It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                    Now everything reduces to the following

                                    Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                    and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                    ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                    The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                    primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                    into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                    (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                    2 where

                                    ν(U) =

                                    int x

                                    minusinfineminusπξ

                                    2

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                    17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                    It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                    Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                    σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                    This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                    Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                    2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                    nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                    the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                    centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                    Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                    radicn in particular the following estimate

                                    holds

                                    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                    2

                                    In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                    Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                    defined as follows

                                    U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                    volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                    Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                    with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                    volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                    2= v

                                    (1minus sin2 ε

                                    2

                                    )n+12 le veminus

                                    (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                    2

                                    The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                    vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                    22

                                    which implies

                                    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                    22

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                    A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                    Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                    σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                    2

                                    Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                    Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                    18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                    There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                    First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                    ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                    where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                    M

                                    (ω∆ω)ν =

                                    intM

                                    |dω|2ν +

                                    intM

                                    |dlowastω|2ν

                                    where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                    M

                                    f∆fν =

                                    intM

                                    |df |2ν

                                    From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                    L20(M) =

                                    f isin L2(M)

                                    intM

                                    fν = 0

                                    the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                    0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                    0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                    M

                                    |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                    |f |2ν for all f such that

                                    intM

                                    fν = 0

                                    The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                    It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                    One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                    |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                    ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                    (xy)isinE

                                    f(x)

                                    The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                    Now we make the following definition

                                    Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                    Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                    First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                    Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                    19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                    Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                    Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                    micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                    The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                    The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                    Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                    ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                    Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                    Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                    Rn

                                    f dν geintRn

                                    f dmicro

                                    Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                    f dν =

                                    int f(x)

                                    0

                                    intRn

                                    1 dνdy =

                                    int f(x)

                                    0

                                    ν(Cy)dy

                                    where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                    Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                    Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                    f(x) =

                                    inty(xy)isinA

                                    1 dτ

                                    is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                    Now we observe that

                                    ν times τ(A) =

                                    intRn

                                    f(x) dν geintRn

                                    f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                    by Lemma 193

                                    And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                    Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                    ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                    micro(S)

                                    is more peaked than micro

                                    Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                    Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                    Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                    Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                    Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                    radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                    values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                    Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                    2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                    one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                    Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                    ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                    This can be decoded as

                                    vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                    ε

                                    eminusπ|x|2

                                    dx

                                    where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                    asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                    be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                    volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                    vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                    It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                    20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                    A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                    |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                    where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                    Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                    cradic

                                    nlogN

                                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                    Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                    )n2eminusα|x|

                                    2 An easy es-

                                    timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                    micro(Pi) geint 1

                                    minus1

                                    radicα

                                    πeminusαx

                                    2

                                    dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                    eminusα

                                    It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                    radicnα

                                    By Theorem 191

                                    micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                    1minus 1radicπα

                                    eminusα)N

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                    so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                    cradic

                                    nlogN

                                    ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                    absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                    παeminusα)Nge c2

                                    or

                                    (201) N log

                                    (1minus 1radic

                                    παeminusα)ge c3

                                    for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                    Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                    Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                    logN middot logM ge γn

                                    for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                    Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                    radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                    Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                    nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                    half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                    nlogN

                                    and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                    of radius rlowast = cradic

                                    1logM

                                    Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                    cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                    Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                    In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                    However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                    Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                    Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                    cn

                                    logN

                                    )n2vn

                                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                    Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                    Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                    volK

                                    volKge(

                                    cn

                                    logN

                                    )n

                                    Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                    volK

                                    volK=

                                    (volK)2

                                    volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                    v2n

                                    ge(

                                    cn

                                    logN

                                    )n

                                    where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                    The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                    Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                    h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                    (1 + t)n= 1

                                    Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                    21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                    We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                    Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                    The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                    Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                    dist(xX) le δ

                                    In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                    Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                    δkminus1

                                    Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                    Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                    |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                    vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                    δkminus1

                                    here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                    vk = πk2

                                    Γ(k2+1)

                                    Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                    radic2

                                    Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                    2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                    radic2 such that

                                    the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                    has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                    So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                    2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                    Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                    E sube K suberadicnE

                                    Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                    radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                    E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                    Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                    1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                    on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                    Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                    c

                                    radiclog n

                                    n

                                    with some absolute constant c

                                    See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                    n(this is the

                                    DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                    Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                    C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                    σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                    128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                    128

                                    Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                    the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                    128 If in total

                                    2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                    128 |X| lt 1

                                    then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                    k16kminus1

                                    εkminus1eminus

                                    c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                    which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                    M equal 1

                                    x le sumxiisinX

                                    cixi leradic

                                    2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                                    Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                    radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                    (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                    2(1 + ε8)

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                    and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                                    For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                    22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                    It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                    Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                    where x1 xn are the points of X

                                    Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                    Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                    )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                    (4δ

                                    )kwe could rotate X

                                    and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                    This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                    Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                    About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                    Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                    Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                    Q = x21 + x2

                                    2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                    This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                    On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                    with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                    ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                    by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                    d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                    Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                    is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                    (d+kminus1d

                                    ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                    Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                    minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                    (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                    )

                                    A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                    Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                    f(x) = f(minusx)

                                    References

                                    [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                    [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                    [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                    [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                    [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                    [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                    [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                    [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                    [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                    [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                    [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                    [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                    Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                    Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                    Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                    [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                    [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                    [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                    [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                    [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                    [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                    [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                    [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                    [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                    [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                    [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                    [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                    [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                    [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                    18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                    347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                    2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                    ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                    and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                    bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                    Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                    Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                    dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                    [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                    [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                    [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                    [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                    [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                    [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                    [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                    [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                    [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                    [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                    [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                    [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                    [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                    [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                    [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                    Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                    Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                    Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                    E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                    URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                    • 1 Introduction
                                    • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                    • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                    • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                    • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                    • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                    • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                    • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                    • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                    • 10 Monotone maps
                                    • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                    • 12 Log-concavity
                                    • 13 Mixed volumes
                                    • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                    • 15 Needle decomposition
                                    • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                    • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                    • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                    • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                    • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                    • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                    • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                    • References

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 19

                                      where Ai(t) is the surface area of the corresponding facet The map ϕ(t) = d log f(t) istherefore ldquominusrdquo monotone and its image must be convex

                                      Definitely the image of ϕ(t) satisfies (123) (divided by f(t) = volP ) We have to checkthat for every positive vector y satisfying

                                      (125) y1ν1 + y2ν2 + middot middot middot+ ynνn = 0

                                      there exists a proportional vector in the image of ϕ Denote the set of nonnegative ysatisfying (125) by Q The polyhedron Q is a cone centered in 0 and from convexityof the image of ϕ and the linear programming considerations to prove what we need itis sufficient to check that every extremal ray of Q intersects the image of ϕ But suchan extremal ray corresponds to a vector y with at most n + 1 positive coordinates putI = i yi gt 0

                                      It may happen that I contains less than n indexes We avoid such degenerate cases byperturbing slightly the set of normals ν1 νm the general case then can be deduced bygoing to the limit So it is sufficient to consider the case |I| = n + 1 It is easy to checkthat such vectors y correspond to simplices x foralli isin I (x νi) le ti that are obviouslycontained in the image of ϕ Hence all nonnegative vectors y satisfying (125) are in theimage of ϕ up to scaling

                                      The uniqueness of P follows from the fact that the image of ϕ is essentially (m minus n)-dimensional and ϕ is monotone hence the preimage ϕminus1(y) is n dimensional and consistsof a set of polytopes taken to each other by translations

                                      In this section we presented the analytical approach to log-concavity and the readeris invited to read the review of RP Stanley [Stan89] about algebraic point of view onlog-concavity One simple fact left as an exercise for the reader is If a univariate monicpolynomial P (x) has all roots real and negative then its coefficients from a log-concavesequence

                                      In a wonderful way the algebraic approach returns with a proof of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality for mixed volumes of convex bodies which in turn gives another proofof the BrunnndashMinkowski inequality A typical example of an algebraic log-concavity resultis

                                      Theorem 126 Let X be an n-dimensional normal projective algebraic variety and L andM be ample divisor classes on X Then the sequence v0 vn of intersection numbers

                                      vk = (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                      )

                                      is log-concave

                                      Sketch of the proof For corresponding facts from algebraic geometry please consult thetextbook [GH78]

                                      We have to prove the inequality

                                      (126) (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k

                                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk

                                      )2 ge (L L︸ ︷︷ ︸kminus1

                                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminusk+1

                                      ) middot(L L︸ ︷︷ ︸k+1

                                      M M︸ ︷︷ ︸nminuskminus1

                                      )

                                      After multiplying L and M by some positive integers we assume that L and M correspondto projective embeddings of X By an appropriate version of the Bertini theorem wechoose the hyperplane sections (in L) for the first k minus 1 of L in the intersection formulaand the hyperplane sections (in M) for the last n minus k minus 1 of M so that X reduces to anormal surface S and over this surface we have to prove

                                      (LM)2 ge (LL) middot(MM)

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                                      By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                                      The general form of (126) is

                                      (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                                      which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                                      13 Mixed volumes

                                      Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                                      Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                                      vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                                      for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                                      Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                                      ui(k) = log

                                      intK

                                      e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                                      where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                                      f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                                      is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                                      map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                                      We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                                      h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                                      xisinK〈p x〉

                                      Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                                      〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                                      when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                                      h(p K) = h(pK)

                                      Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                                      (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                                      intRn

                                      det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                                      Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                                      Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                                      Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                                      MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                                      It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                                      It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                                      P (x) =sumk

                                      ckxk

                                      where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                                      N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                                      Theorem 133 The system of equations

                                      P1(x) = 0

                                      P2(x) = 0

                                      Pn(x) = 0

                                      for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                                      In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                                      We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                                      14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                                      We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                                      Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                                      f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                      for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                                      intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                                      Rn

                                      f(x) dx middotintRn

                                      g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                      We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                      Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                      there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                      f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                      for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                      f(x) dx middotintRn

                                      g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                      Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                      Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                      f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                      Hence intRn

                                      f(x) dx middotintRn

                                      g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                      Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                      g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                      g(y)e(zy) dy

                                      Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                      Rn

                                      g(y) dy leintRn

                                      g(y)e(zy) dy

                                      which implies the required inequality

                                      In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                      Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                      0

                                      f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                      0

                                      g(y) dy le π

                                      2

                                      Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                      follows that for any s t isin R

                                      w

                                      (s+ t

                                      2

                                      )= eminuse

                                      s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                      radicu(s)v(t)

                                      Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                      0

                                      f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                      0

                                      g(y) dy =

                                      int +infin

                                      minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                      int +infin

                                      minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                      le(int +infin

                                      minusinfinw(r) dr

                                      )2

                                      =

                                      (int +infin

                                      0

                                      eminusz22 dz

                                      )2

                                      2

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                      Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                      1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                      The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                      f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                      implies int +infin

                                      minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                      But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                      minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                      int +infin

                                      0

                                      f(x) dx = 12

                                      we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                      partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                      and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                      also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                      Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                      so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                      F (xprime) =

                                      int +infin

                                      0

                                      f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                      int +infin

                                      0

                                      g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                      From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                      selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                      f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                      = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                      We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                      F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                      2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                      Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                      intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                      H

                                      F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                      G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                      2(2π)nminus1

                                      SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                      BH+

                                      g(y) dy =

                                      intH

                                      G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                      Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                      g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                      and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                      g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                      Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                      Rn

                                      dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                      By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                      xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                      xf(x) dx perp H and

                                      intH+

                                      f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                      f(x) dx = 0

                                      which is exactly what we need

                                      Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                      characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                      i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                      Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                      + Assume that

                                      h(radicx1y1

                                      radicxnyn) ge

                                      radicf(x)g(y)

                                      for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                      Rn+

                                      f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                      g(y) dy le

                                      (intRn+

                                      h(z) dz

                                      )2

                                      Proof Substitute

                                      f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                      g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                      h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                      It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                      (s+ t

                                      2

                                      ))2

                                      ge f(s)g(t)

                                      Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                      f(s) ds middotintRn

                                      g(t) dt le(int

                                      Rn

                                      h(r) dr

                                      )2

                                      that is equivalent to what we need

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                      Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                      minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                      It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                      Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                      K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                      volK middot volK le v2n

                                      where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                      Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                      The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                      (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                      f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                      22

                                      and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                      22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                      Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                      Rn

                                      f(x) dx =

                                      intRn

                                      int f(x)

                                      0

                                      1 dydx =

                                      int 1

                                      0

                                      volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                      for the constant cn =int 1

                                      0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                      Rn

                                      g(y) dy = cn volK

                                      It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                      (2π)n2 =

                                      intRn

                                      eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                      Hence

                                      volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                      c2n

                                      = v2n

                                      It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                      volK middot volK ge 4n

                                      n

                                      which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                      (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                      n

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                      15 Needle decomposition

                                      Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                      The main result is the following theorem

                                      Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                      micro(Pi)

                                      micro(Rn)=

                                      ν(Pi)

                                      ν(Rn)

                                      and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                      A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                      Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                      The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                      Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                      Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                      The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                      appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                      There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                      16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                      Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                      2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                      intRn e

                                      minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                      Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                      Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                      micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                      Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                      So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                      Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                      micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                      = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                      The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                      ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                      It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                      Now everything reduces to the following

                                      Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                      and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                      ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                      The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                      primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                      into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                      (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                      2 where

                                      ν(U) =

                                      int x

                                      minusinfineminusπξ

                                      2

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                      17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                      It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                      Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                      σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                      This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                      Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                      2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                      nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                      the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                      centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                      Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                      radicn in particular the following estimate

                                      holds

                                      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                      2

                                      In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                      Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                      defined as follows

                                      U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                      volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                      Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                      with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                      volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                      2= v

                                      (1minus sin2 ε

                                      2

                                      )n+12 le veminus

                                      (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                      2

                                      The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                      vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                      22

                                      which implies

                                      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                      22

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                      A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                      Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                      σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                      2

                                      Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                      Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                      18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                      There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                      First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                      ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                      where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                      M

                                      (ω∆ω)ν =

                                      intM

                                      |dω|2ν +

                                      intM

                                      |dlowastω|2ν

                                      where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                      M

                                      f∆fν =

                                      intM

                                      |df |2ν

                                      From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                      L20(M) =

                                      f isin L2(M)

                                      intM

                                      fν = 0

                                      the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                      0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                      0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                      M

                                      |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                      |f |2ν for all f such that

                                      intM

                                      fν = 0

                                      The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                      It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                      One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                      |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                      ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                      (xy)isinE

                                      f(x)

                                      The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                      Now we make the following definition

                                      Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                      Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                      First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                      Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                      19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                      Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                      Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                      micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                      The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                      The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                      Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                      ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                      Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                      Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                      Rn

                                      f dν geintRn

                                      f dmicro

                                      Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                      f dν =

                                      int f(x)

                                      0

                                      intRn

                                      1 dνdy =

                                      int f(x)

                                      0

                                      ν(Cy)dy

                                      where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                      Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                      Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                      f(x) =

                                      inty(xy)isinA

                                      1 dτ

                                      is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                      Now we observe that

                                      ν times τ(A) =

                                      intRn

                                      f(x) dν geintRn

                                      f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                      by Lemma 193

                                      And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                      Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                      ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                      micro(S)

                                      is more peaked than micro

                                      Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                      Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                      Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                      Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                      Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                      radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                      values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                      Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                      2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                      one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                      Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                      ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                      This can be decoded as

                                      vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                      ε

                                      eminusπ|x|2

                                      dx

                                      where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                      asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                      be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                      volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                      vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                      It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                      20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                      A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                      |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                      where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                      Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                      cradic

                                      nlogN

                                      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                      Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                      )n2eminusα|x|

                                      2 An easy es-

                                      timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                      micro(Pi) geint 1

                                      minus1

                                      radicα

                                      πeminusαx

                                      2

                                      dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                      eminusα

                                      It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                      radicnα

                                      By Theorem 191

                                      micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                      1minus 1radicπα

                                      eminusα)N

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                      so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                      cradic

                                      nlogN

                                      ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                      absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                      παeminusα)Nge c2

                                      or

                                      (201) N log

                                      (1minus 1radic

                                      παeminusα)ge c3

                                      for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                      Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                      Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                      logN middot logM ge γn

                                      for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                      Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                      radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                      Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                      nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                      half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                      nlogN

                                      and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                      of radius rlowast = cradic

                                      1logM

                                      Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                      cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                      Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                      In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                      However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                      Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                      Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                      cn

                                      logN

                                      )n2vn

                                      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                      Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                      Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                      volK

                                      volKge(

                                      cn

                                      logN

                                      )n

                                      Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                      volK

                                      volK=

                                      (volK)2

                                      volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                      v2n

                                      ge(

                                      cn

                                      logN

                                      )n

                                      where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                      The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                      Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                      h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                      (1 + t)n= 1

                                      Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                      21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                      We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                      Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                      The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                      Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                      dist(xX) le δ

                                      In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                      Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                      δkminus1

                                      Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                      Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                      |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                      vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                      δkminus1

                                      here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                      vk = πk2

                                      Γ(k2+1)

                                      Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                      radic2

                                      Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                      2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                      radic2 such that

                                      the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                      has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                      So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                      2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                      Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                      E sube K suberadicnE

                                      Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                      radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                      E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                      Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                      1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                      on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                      Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                      c

                                      radiclog n

                                      n

                                      with some absolute constant c

                                      See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                      n(this is the

                                      DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                      Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                      C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                      σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                      128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                      128

                                      Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                      the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                      128 If in total

                                      2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                      128 |X| lt 1

                                      then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                      k16kminus1

                                      εkminus1eminus

                                      c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                      which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                      M equal 1

                                      x le sumxiisinX

                                      cixi leradic

                                      2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                                      Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                      radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                      (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                      2(1 + ε8)

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                      and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                                      For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                      22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                      It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                      Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                      where x1 xn are the points of X

                                      Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                      Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                      )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                      (4δ

                                      )kwe could rotate X

                                      and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                      This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                      Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                      About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                      Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                      Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                      Q = x21 + x2

                                      2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                      This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                      On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                      with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                      ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                      by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                      d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                      Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                      is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                      (d+kminus1d

                                      ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                      Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                      minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                      (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                      )

                                      A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                      Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                      f(x) = f(minusx)

                                      References

                                      [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                      [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                      [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                      [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                      [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                      [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                      [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                      [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                      [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                      [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                      [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                      [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                      Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                      Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                      Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                      [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                      [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                      [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                      [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                      [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                      [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                      [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                      [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                      [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                      [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                      [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                      [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                      [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                      [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                      18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                      347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                      2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                      ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                      and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                      bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                      Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                      Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                      dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                      [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                      [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                      [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                      [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                      [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                      [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                      [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                      [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                      [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                      [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                      [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                      [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                      [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                      [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                      [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                      Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                      Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                      Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                      E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                      URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                      • 1 Introduction
                                      • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                      • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                      • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                      • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                      • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                      • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                      • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                      • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                      • 10 Monotone maps
                                      • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                      • 12 Log-concavity
                                      • 13 Mixed volumes
                                      • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                      • 15 Needle decomposition
                                      • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                      • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                      • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                      • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                      • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                      • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                      • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                      • References

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 20

                                        By the Hodge theorem the intersection form of an algebraic surface has positive index 1then this inequality is just the inverse CauchyndashSchwarz inequality

                                        The general form of (126) is

                                        (127) (L1 L2 L3 Ln)2 ge (L1 L1 L3 Ln) middot(L2 L2 L3 Ln)

                                        which is the algebraic form of the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality

                                        13 Mixed volumes

                                        Let us make a brief discussion of mixed volumes following [Grom90] The crucial factis

                                        Theorem 131 Let K1 Kn be convex bodies in Rn the expression

                                        vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn)

                                        for nonnegative ti is a polynomial in tirsquos of degree n and the coefficient at t1 tn dividedby n is called the mixed volume of K1 Kn and is denoted by MV(K1 Kn)

                                        Proof Consider the monotone maps fi from Rn to the respective Ki with potentials

                                        ui(k) = log

                                        intK

                                        e〈kx〉 dmicroi(x)

                                        where microi are some measures with convex hulls of support equal to the respective Ki Themap

                                        f(k) = t1f1(k) + tnfn(k)

                                        is also monotone with potential u(k) = t1u1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnun(k) It is a simple fact aboutconvex functions that for continuously differentiable u(k) that image of the differential

                                        map du(k) = f(k) is convex Therefore the image K of f(k) is convex obviously K subeK = t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn

                                        We claim that (the open convex set) K actually equals K up to boundary To provethis it is sufficient to compare their support functions

                                        h(pK) = supxisinK〈p x〉 h(p K) = sup

                                        xisinK〈p x〉

                                        Take k = αp it is easy to see that for α rarr +infin the measure e〈kx〉microi(x) on Ki getsconcentrated near the points of Ki where the linear form 〈p x〉 attains its maximumHence 〈p fi(αp)〉 rarr h(pKi) for α rarr +infin Since the support functions are obviouslyadditive with respect to the Minkowski sum we obtain

                                        〈p f(αp)〉 rarr h(pK)

                                        when α rarr +infin Since h(p K) ge 〈p f(αp)〉 by definition there must be an equality

                                        h(p K) = h(pK)

                                        Now we can calculate vol K = volK

                                        (131) vol(t1K1 + middot middot middot+ tnKn) =

                                        intRn

                                        det(t1Df1(k) + middot middot middot+ tnDfn(k)) dk

                                        Obviously the determinant under the integral is a polynomial of degree n and the resultfollows

                                        Actually the mixed volume MV(K1 Kn) is positive the reader may deduce it from(131) noting that Dfirsquos are positive definite In fact a stronger fact the AlexandrovndashFenchel inequality holds

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                                        Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                                        MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                                        It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                                        It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                                        P (x) =sumk

                                        ckxk

                                        where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                                        N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                                        Theorem 133 The system of equations

                                        P1(x) = 0

                                        P2(x) = 0

                                        Pn(x) = 0

                                        for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                                        In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                                        We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                                        14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                                        We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                                        Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                                        f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                        for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                                        intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                                        Rn

                                        f(x) dx middotintRn

                                        g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                        We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                        Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                        there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                        f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                        for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                        f(x) dx middotintRn

                                        g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                        Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                        Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                        f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                        Hence intRn

                                        f(x) dx middotintRn

                                        g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                        Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                        g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                        g(y)e(zy) dy

                                        Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                        Rn

                                        g(y) dy leintRn

                                        g(y)e(zy) dy

                                        which implies the required inequality

                                        In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                        Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                        0

                                        f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                        0

                                        g(y) dy le π

                                        2

                                        Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                        follows that for any s t isin R

                                        w

                                        (s+ t

                                        2

                                        )= eminuse

                                        s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                        radicu(s)v(t)

                                        Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                        0

                                        f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                        0

                                        g(y) dy =

                                        int +infin

                                        minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                        int +infin

                                        minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                        le(int +infin

                                        minusinfinw(r) dr

                                        )2

                                        =

                                        (int +infin

                                        0

                                        eminusz22 dz

                                        )2

                                        2

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                        Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                        1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                        The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                        f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                        implies int +infin

                                        minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                        But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                        minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                        int +infin

                                        0

                                        f(x) dx = 12

                                        we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                        partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                        and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                        also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                        Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                        so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                        F (xprime) =

                                        int +infin

                                        0

                                        f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                        int +infin

                                        0

                                        g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                        From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                        selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                        f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                        = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                        We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                        F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                        2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                        Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                        intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                        H

                                        F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                        G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                        2(2π)nminus1

                                        SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                        BH+

                                        g(y) dy =

                                        intH

                                        G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                        Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                        g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                        and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                        g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                        Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                        Rn

                                        dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                        By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                        xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                        xf(x) dx perp H and

                                        intH+

                                        f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                        f(x) dx = 0

                                        which is exactly what we need

                                        Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                        characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                        i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                        Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                        + Assume that

                                        h(radicx1y1

                                        radicxnyn) ge

                                        radicf(x)g(y)

                                        for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                        Rn+

                                        f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                        g(y) dy le

                                        (intRn+

                                        h(z) dz

                                        )2

                                        Proof Substitute

                                        f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                        g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                        h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                        It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                        (s+ t

                                        2

                                        ))2

                                        ge f(s)g(t)

                                        Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                        f(s) ds middotintRn

                                        g(t) dt le(int

                                        Rn

                                        h(r) dr

                                        )2

                                        that is equivalent to what we need

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                        Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                        minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                        It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                        Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                        K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                        volK middot volK le v2n

                                        where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                        Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                        The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                        (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                        f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                        22

                                        and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                        22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                        Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                        Rn

                                        f(x) dx =

                                        intRn

                                        int f(x)

                                        0

                                        1 dydx =

                                        int 1

                                        0

                                        volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                        for the constant cn =int 1

                                        0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                        Rn

                                        g(y) dy = cn volK

                                        It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                        (2π)n2 =

                                        intRn

                                        eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                        Hence

                                        volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                        c2n

                                        = v2n

                                        It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                        volK middot volK ge 4n

                                        n

                                        which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                        (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                        n

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                        15 Needle decomposition

                                        Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                        The main result is the following theorem

                                        Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                        micro(Pi)

                                        micro(Rn)=

                                        ν(Pi)

                                        ν(Rn)

                                        and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                        A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                        Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                        The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                        Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                        Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                        The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                        appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                        There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                        16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                        Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                        2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                        intRn e

                                        minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                        Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                        Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                        micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                        Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                        So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                        Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                        micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                        = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                        The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                        ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                        It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                        Now everything reduces to the following

                                        Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                        and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                        ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                        The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                        primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                        into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                        (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                        2 where

                                        ν(U) =

                                        int x

                                        minusinfineminusπξ

                                        2

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                        17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                        It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                        Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                        σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                        This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                        Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                        2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                        nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                        the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                        centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                        Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                        radicn in particular the following estimate

                                        holds

                                        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                        2

                                        In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                        Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                        defined as follows

                                        U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                        volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                        Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                        with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                        volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                        2= v

                                        (1minus sin2 ε

                                        2

                                        )n+12 le veminus

                                        (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                        2

                                        The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                        vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                        22

                                        which implies

                                        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                        22

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                        A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                        Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                        σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                        2

                                        Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                        Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                        18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                        There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                        First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                        ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                        where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                        M

                                        (ω∆ω)ν =

                                        intM

                                        |dω|2ν +

                                        intM

                                        |dlowastω|2ν

                                        where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                        M

                                        f∆fν =

                                        intM

                                        |df |2ν

                                        From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                        L20(M) =

                                        f isin L2(M)

                                        intM

                                        fν = 0

                                        the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                        0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                        0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                        M

                                        |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                        |f |2ν for all f such that

                                        intM

                                        fν = 0

                                        The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                        It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                        One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                        |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                        ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                        (xy)isinE

                                        f(x)

                                        The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                        Now we make the following definition

                                        Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                        Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                        First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                        Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                        19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                        Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                        Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                        micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                        The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                        The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                        Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                        ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                        Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                        Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                        Rn

                                        f dν geintRn

                                        f dmicro

                                        Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                        f dν =

                                        int f(x)

                                        0

                                        intRn

                                        1 dνdy =

                                        int f(x)

                                        0

                                        ν(Cy)dy

                                        where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                        Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                        Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                        f(x) =

                                        inty(xy)isinA

                                        1 dτ

                                        is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                        Now we observe that

                                        ν times τ(A) =

                                        intRn

                                        f(x) dν geintRn

                                        f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                        by Lemma 193

                                        And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                        Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                        ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                        micro(S)

                                        is more peaked than micro

                                        Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                        Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                        Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                        Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                        Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                        radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                        values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                        Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                        2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                        one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                        Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                        ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                        This can be decoded as

                                        vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                        ε

                                        eminusπ|x|2

                                        dx

                                        where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                        asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                        be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                        volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                        vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                        It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                        20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                        A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                        |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                        where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                        Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                        cradic

                                        nlogN

                                        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                        Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                        )n2eminusα|x|

                                        2 An easy es-

                                        timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                        micro(Pi) geint 1

                                        minus1

                                        radicα

                                        πeminusαx

                                        2

                                        dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                        eminusα

                                        It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                        radicnα

                                        By Theorem 191

                                        micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                        1minus 1radicπα

                                        eminusα)N

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                        so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                        cradic

                                        nlogN

                                        ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                        absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                        παeminusα)Nge c2

                                        or

                                        (201) N log

                                        (1minus 1radic

                                        παeminusα)ge c3

                                        for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                        Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                        Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                        logN middot logM ge γn

                                        for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                        Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                        radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                        Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                        nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                        half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                        nlogN

                                        and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                        of radius rlowast = cradic

                                        1logM

                                        Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                        cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                        Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                        In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                        However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                        Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                        Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                        cn

                                        logN

                                        )n2vn

                                        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                        Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                        Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                        volK

                                        volKge(

                                        cn

                                        logN

                                        )n

                                        Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                        volK

                                        volK=

                                        (volK)2

                                        volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                        v2n

                                        ge(

                                        cn

                                        logN

                                        )n

                                        where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                        The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                        Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                        h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                        (1 + t)n= 1

                                        Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                        21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                        We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                        Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                        The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                        Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                        dist(xX) le δ

                                        In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                        Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                        δkminus1

                                        Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                        Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                        |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                        vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                        δkminus1

                                        here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                        vk = πk2

                                        Γ(k2+1)

                                        Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                        radic2

                                        Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                        2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                        radic2 such that

                                        the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                        has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                        So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                        2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                        Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                        E sube K suberadicnE

                                        Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                        radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                        E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                        Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                        1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                        on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                        Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                        c

                                        radiclog n

                                        n

                                        with some absolute constant c

                                        See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                        n(this is the

                                        DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                        Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                        C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                        σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                        128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                        128

                                        Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                        the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                        128 If in total

                                        2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                        128 |X| lt 1

                                        then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                        k16kminus1

                                        εkminus1eminus

                                        c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                        which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                        M equal 1

                                        x le sumxiisinX

                                        cixi leradic

                                        2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                                        Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                        radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                        (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                        2(1 + ε8)

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                        and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                                        For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                        22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                        It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                        Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                        where x1 xn are the points of X

                                        Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                        Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                        )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                        (4δ

                                        )kwe could rotate X

                                        and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                        This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                        Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                        About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                        Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                        Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                        Q = x21 + x2

                                        2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                        This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                        On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                        with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                        ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                        by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                        d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                        Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                        is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                        (d+kminus1d

                                        ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                        Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                        minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                        (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                        )

                                        A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                        Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                        f(x) = f(minusx)

                                        References

                                        [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                        [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                        [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                        [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                        [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                        [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                        [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                        [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                        [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                        [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                        [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                        [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                        Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                        Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                        Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                        [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                        [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                        [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                        [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                        [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                        [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                        [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                        [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                        [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                        [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                        [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                        [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                        [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                        [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                        18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                        347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                        2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                        ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                        and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                        bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                        Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                        Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                        dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                        [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                        [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                        [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                        [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                        [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                        [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                        [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                        [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                        [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                        [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                        [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                        [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                        [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                        [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                        [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                        Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                        Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                        Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                        E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                        URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                        • 1 Introduction
                                        • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                        • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                        • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                        • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                        • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                        • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                        • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                        • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                        • 10 Monotone maps
                                        • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                        • 12 Log-concavity
                                        • 13 Mixed volumes
                                        • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                        • 15 Needle decomposition
                                        • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                        • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                        • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                        • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                        • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                        • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                        • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                        • References

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 21

                                          Theorem 132 For any convex bodies K1 Kn sub Rn we have

                                          MV(K1 K2 Kn)2 ge MV(K1 K1 K3 Kn) middotMV(K2 K2 K3 Kn)

                                          It seems that there is no easy way to prove this inequality One way is to relate themixed volumes to intersection numbers of ample divisors over a toric variety and thenprove (127) arguing similarly to the proof of Theorem 126 see [Ful93] The other wayis to prove an analogue of this inequality for positive definite matrices and their mixeddiscriminants and then use (131) along with other nontrivial observations see [Grom90]

                                          It makes sense to mention the Bernstein theorem [Bern76] connecting the mixed vol-umes and intersection numbers of divisors First for every Laurent polynomial in nvariables

                                          P (x) =sumk

                                          ckxk

                                          where we use the notation xk = xk11 xknn we define the Newton polytope

                                          N(P ) = convk isin Zn ck 6= 0Now the theorem reads

                                          Theorem 133 The system of equations

                                          P1(x) = 0

                                          P2(x) = 0

                                          Pn(x) = 0

                                          for x isin (Clowast)n has either an infinite number of solutions or a finite number of solutionsnot exceeding n MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) For a generic choice of the coefficients ck of thepolynomials keeping the Newton polytopes the same the number of solutions is preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn))

                                          In [Bern76] besides this fact a certain sufficient condition in terms of faces of theNewton polytopes was given that guarantees that the set of solution consists of preciselyn MV(N(P1) N(Pn)) points without using the term generic

                                          We do not give a proof of this theorem here An elementary but technical reasoningcan be found in the original paper [Bern76] A more conceptual approach using symplec-ticKahler geometry can be found in [Ati83]

                                          14 The BlaschkendashSantalo inequality

                                          We give an application of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality (in form of Theorem 123)to the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality Following the paper of Lehec [Leh09A] we start fromproving the functional version of this inequality

                                          Theorem 141 Assume f and g are nonnegative measure densities such that

                                          f(x)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                          for any x y isin Rn Also assume thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 and

                                          intRn xf(x) dx converges Thenint

                                          Rn

                                          f(x) dx middotintRn

                                          g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                          We are going to make the proof in several steps First we observe that it is sufficientto prove the following

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                          Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                          there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                          f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                          for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                          f(x) dx middotintRn

                                          g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                          Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                          Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                          f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                          Hence intRn

                                          f(x) dx middotintRn

                                          g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                          Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                          g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                          g(y)e(zy) dy

                                          Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                          Rn

                                          g(y) dy leintRn

                                          g(y)e(zy) dy

                                          which implies the required inequality

                                          In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                          Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                          0

                                          f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                          0

                                          g(y) dy le π

                                          2

                                          Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                          follows that for any s t isin R

                                          w

                                          (s+ t

                                          2

                                          )= eminuse

                                          s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                          radicu(s)v(t)

                                          Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                          0

                                          f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                          0

                                          g(y) dy =

                                          int +infin

                                          minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                          int +infin

                                          minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                          le(int +infin

                                          minusinfinw(r) dr

                                          )2

                                          =

                                          (int +infin

                                          0

                                          eminusz22 dz

                                          )2

                                          2

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                          Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                          1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                          The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                          f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                          implies int +infin

                                          minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                          But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                          minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                          int +infin

                                          0

                                          f(x) dx = 12

                                          we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                          partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                          and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                          also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                          Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                          so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                          F (xprime) =

                                          int +infin

                                          0

                                          f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                          int +infin

                                          0

                                          g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                          From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                          selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                          f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                          = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                          We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                          F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                          2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                          Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                          intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                          H

                                          F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                          G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                          2(2π)nminus1

                                          SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                          BH+

                                          g(y) dy =

                                          intH

                                          G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                          Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                          g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                          and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                          g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                          Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                          Rn

                                          dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                          By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                          xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                          xf(x) dx perp H and

                                          intH+

                                          f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                          f(x) dx = 0

                                          which is exactly what we need

                                          Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                          characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                          i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                          Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                          + Assume that

                                          h(radicx1y1

                                          radicxnyn) ge

                                          radicf(x)g(y)

                                          for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                          Rn+

                                          f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                          g(y) dy le

                                          (intRn+

                                          h(z) dz

                                          )2

                                          Proof Substitute

                                          f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                          g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                          h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                          It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                          (s+ t

                                          2

                                          ))2

                                          ge f(s)g(t)

                                          Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                          f(s) ds middotintRn

                                          g(t) dt le(int

                                          Rn

                                          h(r) dr

                                          )2

                                          that is equivalent to what we need

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                          Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                          minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                          It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                          Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                          K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                          volK middot volK le v2n

                                          where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                          Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                          The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                          (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                          f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                          22

                                          and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                          22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                          Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                          Rn

                                          f(x) dx =

                                          intRn

                                          int f(x)

                                          0

                                          1 dydx =

                                          int 1

                                          0

                                          volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                          for the constant cn =int 1

                                          0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                          Rn

                                          g(y) dy = cn volK

                                          It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                          (2π)n2 =

                                          intRn

                                          eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                          Hence

                                          volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                          c2n

                                          = v2n

                                          It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                          volK middot volK ge 4n

                                          n

                                          which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                          (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                          n

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                          15 Needle decomposition

                                          Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                          The main result is the following theorem

                                          Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                          micro(Pi)

                                          micro(Rn)=

                                          ν(Pi)

                                          ν(Rn)

                                          and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                          A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                          Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                          The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                          Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                          Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                          The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                          appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                          There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                          16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                          Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                          2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                          intRn e

                                          minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                          Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                          Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                          micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                          Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                          So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                          Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                          micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                          = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                          The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                          ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                          It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                          Now everything reduces to the following

                                          Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                          and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                          ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                          The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                          primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                          into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                          (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                          2 where

                                          ν(U) =

                                          int x

                                          minusinfineminusπξ

                                          2

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                          17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                          It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                          Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                          σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                          This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                          Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                          2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                          nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                          the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                          centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                          Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                          radicn in particular the following estimate

                                          holds

                                          σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                          2

                                          In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                          Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                          defined as follows

                                          U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                          volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                          Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                          with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                          volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                          2= v

                                          (1minus sin2 ε

                                          2

                                          )n+12 le veminus

                                          (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                          2

                                          The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                          vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                          22

                                          which implies

                                          σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                          22

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                          A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                          Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                          σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                          2

                                          Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                          Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                          18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                          There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                          First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                          ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                          where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                          M

                                          (ω∆ω)ν =

                                          intM

                                          |dω|2ν +

                                          intM

                                          |dlowastω|2ν

                                          where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                          M

                                          f∆fν =

                                          intM

                                          |df |2ν

                                          From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                          L20(M) =

                                          f isin L2(M)

                                          intM

                                          fν = 0

                                          the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                          0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                          0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                          M

                                          |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                          |f |2ν for all f such that

                                          intM

                                          fν = 0

                                          The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                          It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                          One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                          |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                          ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                          (xy)isinE

                                          f(x)

                                          The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                          Now we make the following definition

                                          Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                          Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                          First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                          Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                          19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                          Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                          Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                          micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                          The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                          The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                          Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                          ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                          Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                          Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                          Rn

                                          f dν geintRn

                                          f dmicro

                                          Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                          f dν =

                                          int f(x)

                                          0

                                          intRn

                                          1 dνdy =

                                          int f(x)

                                          0

                                          ν(Cy)dy

                                          where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                          Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                          Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                          f(x) =

                                          inty(xy)isinA

                                          1 dτ

                                          is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                          Now we observe that

                                          ν times τ(A) =

                                          intRn

                                          f(x) dν geintRn

                                          f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                          by Lemma 193

                                          And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                          Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                          ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                          micro(S)

                                          is more peaked than micro

                                          Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                          Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                          Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                          Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                          Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                          radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                          values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                          Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                          2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                          one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                          Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                          ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                          This can be decoded as

                                          vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                          ε

                                          eminusπ|x|2

                                          dx

                                          where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                          asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                          be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                          volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                          vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                          It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                          20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                          A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                          |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                          where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                          Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                          cradic

                                          nlogN

                                          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                          Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                          )n2eminusα|x|

                                          2 An easy es-

                                          timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                          micro(Pi) geint 1

                                          minus1

                                          radicα

                                          πeminusαx

                                          2

                                          dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                          eminusα

                                          It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                          radicnα

                                          By Theorem 191

                                          micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                          1minus 1radicπα

                                          eminusα)N

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                          so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                          cradic

                                          nlogN

                                          ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                          absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                          παeminusα)Nge c2

                                          or

                                          (201) N log

                                          (1minus 1radic

                                          παeminusα)ge c3

                                          for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                          Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                          Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                          logN middot logM ge γn

                                          for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                          Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                          radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                          Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                          nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                          half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                          nlogN

                                          and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                          of radius rlowast = cradic

                                          1logM

                                          Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                          cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                          Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                          In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                          However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                          Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                          Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                          cn

                                          logN

                                          )n2vn

                                          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                          Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                          Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                          volK

                                          volKge(

                                          cn

                                          logN

                                          )n

                                          Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                          volK

                                          volK=

                                          (volK)2

                                          volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                          v2n

                                          ge(

                                          cn

                                          logN

                                          )n

                                          where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                          The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                          Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                          h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                          (1 + t)n= 1

                                          Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                          21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                          We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                          Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                          The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                          Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                          dist(xX) le δ

                                          In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                          Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                          δkminus1

                                          Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                          Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                          |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                          vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                          δkminus1

                                          here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                          vk = πk2

                                          Γ(k2+1)

                                          Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                          radic2

                                          Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                          2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                          radic2 such that

                                          the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                          has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                          So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                          2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                          Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                          E sube K suberadicnE

                                          Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                          radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                          E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                          Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                          1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                          on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                          Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                          c

                                          radiclog n

                                          n

                                          with some absolute constant c

                                          See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                          n(this is the

                                          DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                          Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                          C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                          σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                          128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                          128

                                          Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                          the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                          128 If in total

                                          2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                          128 |X| lt 1

                                          then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                          k16kminus1

                                          εkminus1eminus

                                          c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                          which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                          M equal 1

                                          x le sumxiisinX

                                          cixi leradic

                                          2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                                          Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                          radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                          (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                          2(1 + ε8)

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                          and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                                          For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                          22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                          It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                          Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                          where x1 xn are the points of X

                                          Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                          Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                          )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                          (4δ

                                          )kwe could rotate X

                                          and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                          This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                          Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                          About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                          Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                          Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                          Q = x21 + x2

                                          2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                          This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                          On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                          with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                          ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                          by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                          d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                          Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                          is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                          (d+kminus1d

                                          ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                          Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                          minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                          (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                          )

                                          A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                          Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                          f(x) = f(minusx)

                                          References

                                          [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                          [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                          [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                          [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                          [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                          [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                          [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                          [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                          [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                          [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                          [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                          [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                          Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                          Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                          Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                          [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                          [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                          [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                          [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                          [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                          [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                          [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                          [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                          [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                          [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                          [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                          [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                          [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                          [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                          18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                          347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                          2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                          ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                          and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                          bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                          Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                          Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                          dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                          [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                          [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                          [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                          [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                          [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                          [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                          [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                          [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                          [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                          [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                          [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                          [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                          [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                          [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                          [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                          Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                          Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                          Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                          E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                          URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                          • 1 Introduction
                                          • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                          • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                          • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                          • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                          • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                          • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                          • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                          • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                          • 10 Monotone maps
                                          • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                          • 12 Log-concavity
                                          • 13 Mixed volumes
                                          • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                          • 15 Needle decomposition
                                          • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                          • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                          • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                          • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                          • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                          • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                          • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                          • References

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 22

                                            Lemma 142 For any nonnegative measure density f(x) with convergingintRn xf(x) dx

                                            there exists z isin Rn such that for any other nonegative density g(x) with convergingintRn xg(x) dx the inequality

                                            f(x+ z)g(y) le eminus(xy)

                                            for any x y isin Rn implies intRn

                                            f(x) dx middotintRn

                                            g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                            Informally the lemma replaces the mass centering condition by an arbitrary centeringcondition for one of the functions independent of the other function

                                            Proof of Theorem 141 assuming Lemma 142 Suppose we have an appropriate z fromLemma 142 From the assumption of Theorem 141 it follows that

                                            f(z + x)g(y)e(zy) le eminus(zy)minus(xy)+(yz) = eminus(xy)

                                            Hence intRn

                                            f(x) dx middotintRn

                                            g(y)e(zy) dy le (2π)n

                                            Let us estimate e(yz) ge 1 + (y z) and integrate this inequality after multiplying by g(y)intRn

                                            g(y) + (y z)g(y) dy leintRn

                                            g(y)e(zy) dy

                                            Taking into account thatintRn yg(y) dy = 0 we obtainint

                                            Rn

                                            g(y) dy leintRn

                                            g(y)e(zy) dy

                                            which implies the required inequality

                                            In order to prove Lemma 142 we start with proving the corresponding one-dimensionalfact

                                            Lemma 143 Let f(x) and g(y) be nonnegative densities on the half-line R+ If f(x)g(y) leeminusxy for any x y isin R+ thenint +infin

                                            0

                                            f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                            0

                                            g(y) dy le π

                                            2

                                            Proof Put u(s) = f(es)es v(t) = g(et)et and w(r) = eminuse2r2er From the assumptions it

                                            follows that for any s t isin R

                                            w

                                            (s+ t

                                            2

                                            )= eminuse

                                            s+t2e(s+t)2 geradicf(es)g(et)e(s+t)2 =

                                            radicu(s)v(t)

                                            Now the one-dimensional case of Theorem 123 impliesint +infin

                                            0

                                            f(x) dx middotint +infin

                                            0

                                            g(y) dy =

                                            int +infin

                                            minusinfinu(s) ds middot

                                            int +infin

                                            minusinfinv(t) dt le

                                            le(int +infin

                                            minusinfinw(r) dr

                                            )2

                                            =

                                            (int +infin

                                            0

                                            eminusz22 dz

                                            )2

                                            2

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                            Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                            1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                            The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                            f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                            implies int +infin

                                            minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                            But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                            minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                            int +infin

                                            0

                                            f(x) dx = 12

                                            we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                            partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                            and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                            also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                            Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                            so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                            F (xprime) =

                                            int +infin

                                            0

                                            f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                            int +infin

                                            0

                                            g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                            From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                            selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                            f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                            = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                            We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                            F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                            2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                            Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                            intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                            H

                                            F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                            G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                            2(2π)nminus1

                                            SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                            BH+

                                            g(y) dy =

                                            intH

                                            G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                            Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                            g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                            and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                            g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                            Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                            Rn

                                            dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                            By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                            xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                            xf(x) dx perp H and

                                            intH+

                                            f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                            f(x) dx = 0

                                            which is exactly what we need

                                            Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                            characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                            i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                            Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                            + Assume that

                                            h(radicx1y1

                                            radicxnyn) ge

                                            radicf(x)g(y)

                                            for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                            Rn+

                                            f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                            g(y) dy le

                                            (intRn+

                                            h(z) dz

                                            )2

                                            Proof Substitute

                                            f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                            g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                            h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                            It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                            (s+ t

                                            2

                                            ))2

                                            ge f(s)g(t)

                                            Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                            f(s) ds middotintRn

                                            g(t) dt le(int

                                            Rn

                                            h(r) dr

                                            )2

                                            that is equivalent to what we need

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                            Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                            minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                            It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                            Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                            K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                            volK middot volK le v2n

                                            where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                            Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                            The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                            (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                            f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                            22

                                            and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                            22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                            Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                            Rn

                                            f(x) dx =

                                            intRn

                                            int f(x)

                                            0

                                            1 dydx =

                                            int 1

                                            0

                                            volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                            for the constant cn =int 1

                                            0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                            Rn

                                            g(y) dy = cn volK

                                            It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                            (2π)n2 =

                                            intRn

                                            eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                            Hence

                                            volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                            c2n

                                            = v2n

                                            It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                            volK middot volK ge 4n

                                            n

                                            which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                            (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                            n

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                            15 Needle decomposition

                                            Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                            The main result is the following theorem

                                            Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                            micro(Pi)

                                            micro(Rn)=

                                            ν(Pi)

                                            ν(Rn)

                                            and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                            A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                            Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                            The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                            Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                            Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                            The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                            appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                            There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                            16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                            Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                            2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                            intRn e

                                            minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                            Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                            Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                            micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                            Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                            So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                            Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                            micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                            = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                            The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                            ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                            It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                            Now everything reduces to the following

                                            Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                            and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                            ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                            The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                            primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                            into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                            (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                            2 where

                                            ν(U) =

                                            int x

                                            minusinfineminusπξ

                                            2

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                            17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                            It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                            Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                            σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                            This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                            Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                            2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                            nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                            the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                            centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                            Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                            radicn in particular the following estimate

                                            holds

                                            σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                            2

                                            In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                            Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                            defined as follows

                                            U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                            volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                            Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                            with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                            volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                            2= v

                                            (1minus sin2 ε

                                            2

                                            )n+12 le veminus

                                            (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                            2

                                            The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                            vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                            22

                                            which implies

                                            σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                            22

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                            A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                            Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                            σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                            2

                                            Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                            Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                            18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                            There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                            First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                            ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                            where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                            M

                                            (ω∆ω)ν =

                                            intM

                                            |dω|2ν +

                                            intM

                                            |dlowastω|2ν

                                            where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                            M

                                            f∆fν =

                                            intM

                                            |df |2ν

                                            From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                            L20(M) =

                                            f isin L2(M)

                                            intM

                                            fν = 0

                                            the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                            0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                            0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                            M

                                            |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                            |f |2ν for all f such that

                                            intM

                                            fν = 0

                                            The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                            It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                            One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                            |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                            ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                            (xy)isinE

                                            f(x)

                                            The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                            Now we make the following definition

                                            Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                            Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                            First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                            Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                            19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                            Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                            Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                            micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                            The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                            The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                            Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                            ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                            Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                            Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                            Rn

                                            f dν geintRn

                                            f dmicro

                                            Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                            f dν =

                                            int f(x)

                                            0

                                            intRn

                                            1 dνdy =

                                            int f(x)

                                            0

                                            ν(Cy)dy

                                            where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                            Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                            Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                            f(x) =

                                            inty(xy)isinA

                                            1 dτ

                                            is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                            Now we observe that

                                            ν times τ(A) =

                                            intRn

                                            f(x) dν geintRn

                                            f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                            by Lemma 193

                                            And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                            Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                            ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                            micro(S)

                                            is more peaked than micro

                                            Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                            Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                            Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                            Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                            Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                            radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                            values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                            Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                            2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                            one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                            Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                            ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                            This can be decoded as

                                            vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                            ε

                                            eminusπ|x|2

                                            dx

                                            where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                            asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                            be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                            volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                            vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                            It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                            20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                            A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                            |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                            where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                            Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                            cradic

                                            nlogN

                                            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                            Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                            )n2eminusα|x|

                                            2 An easy es-

                                            timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                            micro(Pi) geint 1

                                            minus1

                                            radicα

                                            πeminusαx

                                            2

                                            dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                            eminusα

                                            It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                            radicnα

                                            By Theorem 191

                                            micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                            1minus 1radicπα

                                            eminusα)N

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                            so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                            cradic

                                            nlogN

                                            ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                            absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                            παeminusα)Nge c2

                                            or

                                            (201) N log

                                            (1minus 1radic

                                            παeminusα)ge c3

                                            for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                            Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                            Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                            logN middot logM ge γn

                                            for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                            Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                            radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                            Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                            nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                            half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                            nlogN

                                            and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                            of radius rlowast = cradic

                                            1logM

                                            Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                            cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                            Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                            In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                            However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                            Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                            Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                            cn

                                            logN

                                            )n2vn

                                            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                            Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                            Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                            volK

                                            volKge(

                                            cn

                                            logN

                                            )n

                                            Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                            volK

                                            volK=

                                            (volK)2

                                            volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                            v2n

                                            ge(

                                            cn

                                            logN

                                            )n

                                            where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                            The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                            Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                            h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                            (1 + t)n= 1

                                            Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                            21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                            We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                            Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                            The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                            Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                            dist(xX) le δ

                                            In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                            Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                            δkminus1

                                            Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                            Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                            |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                            vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                            δkminus1

                                            here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                            vk = πk2

                                            Γ(k2+1)

                                            Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                            radic2

                                            Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                            2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                            radic2 such that

                                            the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                            has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                            So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                            2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                            Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                            E sube K suberadicnE

                                            Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                            radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                            E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                            Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                            1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                            on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                            Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                            c

                                            radiclog n

                                            n

                                            with some absolute constant c

                                            See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                            n(this is the

                                            DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                            Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                            C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                            σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                            128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                            128

                                            Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                            the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                            128 If in total

                                            2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                            128 |X| lt 1

                                            then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                            k16kminus1

                                            εkminus1eminus

                                            c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                            which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                            M equal 1

                                            x le sumxiisinX

                                            cixi leradic

                                            2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                            radic2(1 + ε8)

                                            Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                            radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                            (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                            2(1 + ε8)

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                            and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                            radic2(1 + ε8)

                                            For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                            22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                            It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                            Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                            where x1 xn are the points of X

                                            Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                            Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                            )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                            (4δ

                                            )kwe could rotate X

                                            and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                            This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                            Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                            About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                            Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                            Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                            Q = x21 + x2

                                            2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                            This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                            On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                            with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                            ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                            by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                            d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                            Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                            is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                            (d+kminus1d

                                            ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                            Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                            minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                            (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                            )

                                            A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                            Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                            f(x) = f(minusx)

                                            References

                                            [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                            [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                            [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                            [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                            [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                            [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                            [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                            [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                            [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                            [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                            [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                            [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                            Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                            Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                            Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                            [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                            [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                            [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                            [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                            [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                            [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                            [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                            [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                            [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                            [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                            [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                            [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                            [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                            [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                            18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                            347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                            2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                            ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                            and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                            bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                            Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                            Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                            dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                            [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                            [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                            [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                            [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                            [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                            [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                            [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                            [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                            [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                            [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                            [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                            [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                            [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                            [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                            [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                            Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                            Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                            Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                            E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                            URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                            • 1 Introduction
                                            • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                            • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                            • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                            • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                            • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                            • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                            • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                            • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                            • 10 Monotone maps
                                            • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                            • 12 Log-concavity
                                            • 13 Mixed volumes
                                            • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                            • 15 Needle decomposition
                                            • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                            • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                            • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                            • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                            • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                            • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                            • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                            • References

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 23

                                              Proof of Lemma 142 The proof is by induction Assume the normalizationintRn f(x) dx =

                                              1 which can be achieved by multiplying f(x) by a constant and dividing g(y) by the sameconstant

                                              The one-dimensional case follows from Lemma 143 as follows choose z to be themedian of f After a shift of z to 0 we have to prove that the inequality

                                              f(x)g(y) le eminusxy

                                              implies int +infin

                                              minusinfing(y) dy le 2π

                                              But Lemma 143 is applicable to f(x) and g(y) in the range x y gt 0 and to f(minusx) andg(minusy) in the same range Summing up the results and noting thatint 0

                                              minusinfinf(x) dx =

                                              int +infin

                                              0

                                              f(x) dx = 12

                                              we obtain the required inequalityNow we use induction as follows Let micro be the measure with density f(x) We can

                                              partition micro into equal halves H+ and Hminus with a hyperplane H orthogonal to the lastbasis vector en Since we may translate f without loss of generality we assume that H+

                                              and Hminus are defined by xn ge 0 and xn le 0 respectivelyLet c+ and cminus be mass centers of micro|H+ and micro|Hminus After another translation of f we

                                              also assume that the segment [cminus c+] intersects H at the origin Now let v be the vectorparallel to [cminus c+] and normalized so that (v en) = 1 Then we consider the linearoperators A and B defined by

                                              Ae1 = e1 Aenminus1 = enminus1 Aen = v B = (Aminus1)T

                                              so that (AxBy) = (x y) for any x y isin Rn Note that the determinants of these mapsequal 1 and A maps H to itself while B may not map H to itself Consider the functionsof xprime yprime isin H

                                              F (xprime) =

                                              int +infin

                                              0

                                              f(xprime + sv) ds G(yprime) =

                                              int +infin

                                              0

                                              g(Bxprime + ten) dt

                                              From the normalizationintHF (xprime) dx = 12 Also the mass center of F (xprime) is zero by the

                                              selection of vector v The assumption can be rewritten

                                              f(xprime + sv)g(Byprime + ten) le eminus(xprime+svByprime+ten) = eminus(Axprime+sAenByprime+ten) =

                                              = eminus(xprimeyprime)minus(xprimeten)minus(sAenByprime)minusst(ven) = eminus(xprimeyprime)minusst

                                              We now fix xprime and yprime and consider f(xprime+sv) and g(Byprime+ten)e(xprimeyprime) as functions of positivevariables s and t By Lemma 143 we obtain

                                              F (xprime)G(yprime) le π

                                              2eminus(xprimeyprime)

                                              Now we invoke the inductive assumptions interchanging F (xprime) and G(yprime) taking intoaccount Lemma 142 the fact

                                              intHxprimeF (xprime) dxprime = 0 implies thatint

                                              H

                                              F (xprime) dxprime middotintH

                                              G(yprime) dyprime le π

                                              2(2π)nminus1

                                              SinceintHF (xprime) dx = 12 we obtainint

                                              BH+

                                              g(y) dy =

                                              intH

                                              G(yprime) dyprime le π(2π)nminus1

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                              Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                              g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                              and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                              g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                              Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                              Rn

                                              dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                              By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                              xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                              xf(x) dx perp H and

                                              intH+

                                              f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                              f(x) dx = 0

                                              which is exactly what we need

                                              Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                              characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                              i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                              Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                              + Assume that

                                              h(radicx1y1

                                              radicxnyn) ge

                                              radicf(x)g(y)

                                              for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                              Rn+

                                              f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                              g(y) dy le

                                              (intRn+

                                              h(z) dz

                                              )2

                                              Proof Substitute

                                              f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                              g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                              h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                              It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                              (s+ t

                                              2

                                              ))2

                                              ge f(s)g(t)

                                              Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                              f(s) ds middotintRn

                                              g(t) dt le(int

                                              Rn

                                              h(r) dr

                                              )2

                                              that is equivalent to what we need

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                              Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                              minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                              It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                              Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                              K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                              volK middot volK le v2n

                                              where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                              Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                              The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                              (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                              f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                              22

                                              and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                              22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                              Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                              Rn

                                              f(x) dx =

                                              intRn

                                              int f(x)

                                              0

                                              1 dydx =

                                              int 1

                                              0

                                              volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                              for the constant cn =int 1

                                              0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                              Rn

                                              g(y) dy = cn volK

                                              It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                              (2π)n2 =

                                              intRn

                                              eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                              Hence

                                              volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                              c2n

                                              = v2n

                                              It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                              volK middot volK ge 4n

                                              n

                                              which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                              (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                              n

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                              15 Needle decomposition

                                              Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                              The main result is the following theorem

                                              Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                              micro(Pi)

                                              micro(Rn)=

                                              ν(Pi)

                                              ν(Rn)

                                              and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                              A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                              Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                              The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                              Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                              Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                              The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                              appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                              There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                              16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                              Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                              2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                              intRn e

                                              minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                              Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                              Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                              micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                              Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                              So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                              Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                              micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                              = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                              The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                              ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                              It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                              Now everything reduces to the following

                                              Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                              and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                              ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                              The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                              primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                              into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                              (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                              2 where

                                              ν(U) =

                                              int x

                                              minusinfineminusπξ

                                              2

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                              17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                              It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                              Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                              σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                              This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                              Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                              2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                              nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                              the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                              centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                              Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                              radicn in particular the following estimate

                                              holds

                                              σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                              2

                                              In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                              Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                              defined as follows

                                              U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                              volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                              Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                              with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                              volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                              2= v

                                              (1minus sin2 ε

                                              2

                                              )n+12 le veminus

                                              (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                              2

                                              The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                              vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                              22

                                              which implies

                                              σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                              22

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                              A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                              Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                              σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                              2

                                              Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                              Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                              18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                              There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                              First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                              ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                              where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                              M

                                              (ω∆ω)ν =

                                              intM

                                              |dω|2ν +

                                              intM

                                              |dlowastω|2ν

                                              where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                              M

                                              f∆fν =

                                              intM

                                              |df |2ν

                                              From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                              L20(M) =

                                              f isin L2(M)

                                              intM

                                              fν = 0

                                              the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                              0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                              0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                              M

                                              |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                              |f |2ν for all f such that

                                              intM

                                              fν = 0

                                              The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                              It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                              One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                              |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                              ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                              (xy)isinE

                                              f(x)

                                              The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                              Now we make the following definition

                                              Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                              Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                              First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                              Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                              19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                              Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                              Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                              micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                              The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                              The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                              Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                              ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                              Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                              Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                              Rn

                                              f dν geintRn

                                              f dmicro

                                              Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                              f dν =

                                              int f(x)

                                              0

                                              intRn

                                              1 dνdy =

                                              int f(x)

                                              0

                                              ν(Cy)dy

                                              where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                              Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                              Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                              f(x) =

                                              inty(xy)isinA

                                              1 dτ

                                              is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                              Now we observe that

                                              ν times τ(A) =

                                              intRn

                                              f(x) dν geintRn

                                              f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                              by Lemma 193

                                              And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                              Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                              ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                              micro(S)

                                              is more peaked than micro

                                              Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                              Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                              Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                              Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                              Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                              radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                              values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                              Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                              2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                              one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                              Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                              ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                              This can be decoded as

                                              vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                              ε

                                              eminusπ|x|2

                                              dx

                                              where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                              asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                              be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                              volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                              vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                              It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                              20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                              A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                              |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                              where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                              Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                              cradic

                                              nlogN

                                              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                              Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                              )n2eminusα|x|

                                              2 An easy es-

                                              timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                              micro(Pi) geint 1

                                              minus1

                                              radicα

                                              πeminusαx

                                              2

                                              dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                              eminusα

                                              It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                              radicnα

                                              By Theorem 191

                                              micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                              1minus 1radicπα

                                              eminusα)N

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                              so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                              cradic

                                              nlogN

                                              ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                              absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                              παeminusα)Nge c2

                                              or

                                              (201) N log

                                              (1minus 1radic

                                              παeminusα)ge c3

                                              for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                              Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                              Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                              logN middot logM ge γn

                                              for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                              Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                              radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                              Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                              nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                              half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                              nlogN

                                              and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                              of radius rlowast = cradic

                                              1logM

                                              Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                              cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                              Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                              In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                              However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                              Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                              Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                              cn

                                              logN

                                              )n2vn

                                              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                              Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                              Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                              volK

                                              volKge(

                                              cn

                                              logN

                                              )n

                                              Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                              volK

                                              volK=

                                              (volK)2

                                              volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                              v2n

                                              ge(

                                              cn

                                              logN

                                              )n

                                              where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                              The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                              Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                              h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                              (1 + t)n= 1

                                              Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                              21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                              We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                              Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                              The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                              Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                              dist(xX) le δ

                                              In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                              Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                              δkminus1

                                              Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                              Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                              |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                              vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                              δkminus1

                                              here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                              vk = πk2

                                              Γ(k2+1)

                                              Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                              radic2

                                              Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                              2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                              radic2 such that

                                              the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                              has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                              So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                              2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                              Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                              E sube K suberadicnE

                                              Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                              radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                              E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                              Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                              1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                              on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                              Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                              c

                                              radiclog n

                                              n

                                              with some absolute constant c

                                              See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                              n(this is the

                                              DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                              Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                              C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                              σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                              128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                              128

                                              Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                              the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                              128 If in total

                                              2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                              128 |X| lt 1

                                              then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                              k16kminus1

                                              εkminus1eminus

                                              c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                              which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                              M equal 1

                                              x le sumxiisinX

                                              cixi leradic

                                              2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                              radic2(1 + ε8)

                                              Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                              radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                              (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                              2(1 + ε8)

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                              and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                              radic2(1 + ε8)

                                              For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                              22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                              It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                              Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                              where x1 xn are the points of X

                                              Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                              Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                              )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                              (4δ

                                              )kwe could rotate X

                                              and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                              This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                              Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                              About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                              Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                              Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                              Q = x21 + x2

                                              2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                              This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                              On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                              with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                              ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                              by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                              d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                              Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                              is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                              (d+kminus1d

                                              ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                              Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                              minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                              (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                              )

                                              A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                              Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                              f(x) = f(minusx)

                                              References

                                              [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                              [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                              [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                              [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                              [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                              [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                              [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                              [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                              [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                              [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                              [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                              [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                              Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                              Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                              Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                              [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                              [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                              [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                              [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                              [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                              [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                              [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                              [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                              [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                              [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                              [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                              [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                              [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                              [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                              18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                              347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                              2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                              ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                              and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                              bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                              Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                              Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                              dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                              [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                              [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                              [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                              [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                              [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                              [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                              [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                              [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                              [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                              [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                              [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                              [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                              [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                              [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                              [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                              Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                              Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                              Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                              E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                              URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                              • 1 Introduction
                                              • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                              • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                              • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                              • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                              • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                              • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                              • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                              • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                              • 10 Monotone maps
                                              • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                              • 12 Log-concavity
                                              • 13 Mixed volumes
                                              • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                              • 15 Needle decomposition
                                              • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                              • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                              • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                              • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                              • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                              • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                              • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                              • References

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 24

                                                Similarly inverting en and v we obtainintBHminus

                                                g(y) dy le π(2π)nminus1

                                                and it remains to sum these inequalities to obtainintRn

                                                g(y) dy le (2π)n

                                                Remark 144 A finer argument shows that it is possible to satisfy the assumption [cminus c+] en after a careful choice of the coordinate system In this case v = en the operators A Bequal the identity operator and the formulas get considerably simpler This assumptionis satisfied if we choose the hyperplane H = xn = 0 so that to minimize the integralint

                                                Rn

                                                dist(xH)f(x) dx

                                                By varying the normal of H and its constant term we obtain thatintH+

                                                xf(x) dxminusintHminus

                                                xf(x) dx perp H and

                                                intH+

                                                f(x) dxminusintHminus

                                                f(x) dx = 0

                                                which is exactly what we need

                                                Another approach (see [Leh09B]) to Lemma 142 invokes the YaondashYao theorem (The-orem 42) to partition Rn into 2n convex cones A1 A2n with center at z so thatintAif(x) dx = 2minusn for every i After translating z to the origin one observes that the

                                                characterizing property of the YaondashYao partition means that the space Rn is covered bythe family Ai 2n

                                                i=1 of polar conesThen one invokes the logarithmic form of the PrekopandashLeindler inequality

                                                Lemma 145 Let f g h be nonnegative absolute integrable function on the positive coneRn

                                                + Assume that

                                                h(radicx1y1

                                                radicxnyn) ge

                                                radicf(x)g(y)

                                                for any x y isin Rn+ Thenint

                                                Rn+

                                                f(x) dx middotintRn+

                                                g(y) dy le

                                                (intRn+

                                                h(z) dz

                                                )2

                                                Proof Substitute

                                                f(s1 sn) = f(es1 esn)es1+middotmiddotmiddot+sn

                                                g(t1 tn) = g(et1 etn)et1+middotmiddotmiddot+tn

                                                h(r1 rn) = h(er1 ern)er1+middotmiddotmiddot+rn

                                                It is easy to check that for any s t isin Rn(h

                                                (s+ t

                                                2

                                                ))2

                                                ge f(s)g(t)

                                                Then Theorem 123 implies thatintRn

                                                f(s) ds middotintRn

                                                g(t) dt le(int

                                                Rn

                                                h(r) dr

                                                )2

                                                that is equivalent to what we need

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                                Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                                minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                                It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                                Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                                K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                                volK middot volK le v2n

                                                where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                                Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                                The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                                (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                                f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                                22

                                                and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                                22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                                Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                                Rn

                                                f(x) dx =

                                                intRn

                                                int f(x)

                                                0

                                                1 dydx =

                                                int 1

                                                0

                                                volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                                for the constant cn =int 1

                                                0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                                Rn

                                                g(y) dy = cn volK

                                                It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                                (2π)n2 =

                                                intRn

                                                eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                                Hence

                                                volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                                c2n

                                                = v2n

                                                It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                                volK middot volK ge 4n

                                                n

                                                which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                                (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                                n

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                                15 Needle decomposition

                                                Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                                The main result is the following theorem

                                                Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                                micro(Pi)

                                                micro(Rn)=

                                                ν(Pi)

                                                ν(Rn)

                                                and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                                A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                                Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                                The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                                Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                                Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                                The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                                appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                                There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                                16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                                Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                                2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                                intRn e

                                                minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                                Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                                Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                                So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                                Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                                micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                                = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                                The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                                ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                                It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                                Now everything reduces to the following

                                                Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                                and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                                primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                                into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                                (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                                2 where

                                                ν(U) =

                                                int x

                                                minusinfineminusπξ

                                                2

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                                17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                                It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                                Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                                σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                                This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                                Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                                2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                                nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                                the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                                centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                                Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                                radicn in particular the following estimate

                                                holds

                                                σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                2

                                                In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                                Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                                defined as follows

                                                U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                                volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                                Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                                with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                                volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                                2= v

                                                (1minus sin2 ε

                                                2

                                                )n+12 le veminus

                                                (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                                2

                                                The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                                vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                22

                                                which implies

                                                σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                22

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                                A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                                Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                                σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                2

                                                Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                                Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                                18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                                There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                                First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                                ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                                where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                                M

                                                (ω∆ω)ν =

                                                intM

                                                |dω|2ν +

                                                intM

                                                |dlowastω|2ν

                                                where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                                M

                                                f∆fν =

                                                intM

                                                |df |2ν

                                                From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                                L20(M) =

                                                f isin L2(M)

                                                intM

                                                fν = 0

                                                the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                                0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                                0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                                M

                                                |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                                |f |2ν for all f such that

                                                intM

                                                fν = 0

                                                The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                                It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                (xy)isinE

                                                f(x)

                                                The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                Now we make the following definition

                                                Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                Rn

                                                f dν geintRn

                                                f dmicro

                                                Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                f dν =

                                                int f(x)

                                                0

                                                intRn

                                                1 dνdy =

                                                int f(x)

                                                0

                                                ν(Cy)dy

                                                where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                f(x) =

                                                inty(xy)isinA

                                                1 dτ

                                                is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                Now we observe that

                                                ν times τ(A) =

                                                intRn

                                                f(x) dν geintRn

                                                f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                by Lemma 193

                                                And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                micro(S)

                                                is more peaked than micro

                                                Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                This can be decoded as

                                                vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                ε

                                                eminusπ|x|2

                                                dx

                                                where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                cradic

                                                nlogN

                                                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                )n2eminusα|x|

                                                2 An easy es-

                                                timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                minus1

                                                radicα

                                                πeminusαx

                                                2

                                                dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                eminusα

                                                It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                radicnα

                                                By Theorem 191

                                                micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                1minus 1radicπα

                                                eminusα)N

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                cradic

                                                nlogN

                                                ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                or

                                                (201) N log

                                                (1minus 1radic

                                                παeminusα)ge c3

                                                for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                logN middot logM ge γn

                                                for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                nlogN

                                                and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                1logM

                                                Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                cn

                                                logN

                                                )n2vn

                                                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                volK

                                                volKge(

                                                cn

                                                logN

                                                )n

                                                Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                volK

                                                volK=

                                                (volK)2

                                                volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                v2n

                                                ge(

                                                cn

                                                logN

                                                )n

                                                where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                (1 + t)n= 1

                                                Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                dist(xX) le δ

                                                In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                δkminus1

                                                Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                δkminus1

                                                here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                vk = πk2

                                                Γ(k2+1)

                                                Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                radic2

                                                Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                radic2 such that

                                                the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                E sube K suberadicnE

                                                Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                c

                                                radiclog n

                                                n

                                                with some absolute constant c

                                                See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                n(this is the

                                                DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                128

                                                Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                128 If in total

                                                2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                128 |X| lt 1

                                                then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                k16kminus1

                                                εkminus1eminus

                                                c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                M equal 1

                                                x le sumxiisinX

                                                cixi leradic

                                                2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                2(1 + ε8)

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                (4δ

                                                )kwe could rotate X

                                                and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                Q = x21 + x2

                                                2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                (d+kminus1d

                                                ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                )

                                                A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                References

                                                [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                • 1 Introduction
                                                • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                • 10 Monotone maps
                                                • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                • 12 Log-concavity
                                                • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                • References

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 25

                                                  Now Lemma 145 applied to h(z) = eminus|z|22 gives for any YaondashYao cone Ai the inequalityint

                                                  minusAig(y) dy le πn

                                                  It remains to sum over i = 1 2n to prove Lemma 142Now we deduce the classical form of the BlaschkendashSantalo inequality for convex bodies

                                                  Corollary 146 Let K be a convex body in Rn with mass center at the origin at let

                                                  K = y isin Rn forallx isin K (x y) le 1be its polar body Then

                                                  volK middot volK le v2n

                                                  where vn is the volume of the unit ball in Rn

                                                  Proof Consider the corresponding ldquonormsrdquo (note that x may not coincide with minusx)x = minr ge 0 x isin rK x = minr ge 0 x isin rK

                                                  The definition of the polar body means that for any x y isin Rn

                                                  (x y) le x middot yNow we introduce two functions

                                                  f(x) = eminusx22 g(y) = eminusy

                                                  22

                                                  and check thatf(x)g(y) = eminusx

                                                  22minusy22 le eminus(xy)

                                                  Also f(x) has mass center at the origin Hence by Theorem 141 the product of theirintegrals is at most (2π)n Now we calculate by changing the integration orderint

                                                  Rn

                                                  f(x) dx =

                                                  intRn

                                                  int f(x)

                                                  0

                                                  1 dydx =

                                                  int 1

                                                  0

                                                  volK(minus2 log y)n2 dy = cn volK

                                                  for the constant cn =int 1

                                                  0(minus2 log y)n2 dy The same holds for g(y)int

                                                  Rn

                                                  g(y) dy = cn volK

                                                  It remains to calculate cn this is simple if we take the unit ball in place of K and theEuclidean norm |x| in place of x

                                                  (2π)n2 =

                                                  intRn

                                                  eminus|x|22 dx = cnvn

                                                  Hence

                                                  volK middot volK le (2π)n

                                                  c2n

                                                  = v2n

                                                  It is a famous problem (the Mahler conjecture) to establish the lower bound for centrallysymmetric convex bodies

                                                  volK middot volK ge 4n

                                                  n

                                                  which is an equality for the cube and the crosspolytope Some known partial results onthis conjecture are summarized in the blog post by Tao [Tao07] The best known resultis established by Greg Kuperberg [Ku08]

                                                  (141) volK middot volK ge πn

                                                  n

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                                  15 Needle decomposition

                                                  Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                                  The main result is the following theorem

                                                  Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                                  micro(Pi)

                                                  micro(Rn)=

                                                  ν(Pi)

                                                  ν(Rn)

                                                  and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                                  A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                                  Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                                  The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                                  Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                                  Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                                  The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                                  appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                                  There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                                  16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                                  Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                                  2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                                  intRn e

                                                  minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                                  Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                                  Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                  micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                  Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                                  So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                                  Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                                  micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                                  = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                                  The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                                  ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                                  It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                                  Now everything reduces to the following

                                                  Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                                  and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                  ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                  The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                                  primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                                  into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                                  (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                                  2 where

                                                  ν(U) =

                                                  int x

                                                  minusinfineminusπξ

                                                  2

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                                  17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                                  It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                                  Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                                  σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                                  This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                                  Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                                  2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                                  nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                                  the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                                  centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                                  Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                                  radicn in particular the following estimate

                                                  holds

                                                  σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                  2

                                                  In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                                  Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                                  defined as follows

                                                  U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                                  volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                                  Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                                  with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                                  volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                                  2= v

                                                  (1minus sin2 ε

                                                  2

                                                  )n+12 le veminus

                                                  (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                                  2

                                                  The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                                  vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                  22

                                                  which implies

                                                  σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                  22

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                                  A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                                  Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                                  σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                  2

                                                  Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                                  Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                                  18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                                  There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                                  First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                                  ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                                  where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                                  M

                                                  (ω∆ω)ν =

                                                  intM

                                                  |dω|2ν +

                                                  intM

                                                  |dlowastω|2ν

                                                  where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                                  M

                                                  f∆fν =

                                                  intM

                                                  |df |2ν

                                                  From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                                  L20(M) =

                                                  f isin L2(M)

                                                  intM

                                                  fν = 0

                                                  the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                                  0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                                  0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                                  M

                                                  |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                                  |f |2ν for all f such that

                                                  intM

                                                  fν = 0

                                                  The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                                  It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                  One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                  |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                  ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                  (xy)isinE

                                                  f(x)

                                                  The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                  Now we make the following definition

                                                  Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                  Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                  First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                  Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                  19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                  Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                  Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                  micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                  The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                  The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                  Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                  ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                  Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                  Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                  Rn

                                                  f dν geintRn

                                                  f dmicro

                                                  Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                  f dν =

                                                  int f(x)

                                                  0

                                                  intRn

                                                  1 dνdy =

                                                  int f(x)

                                                  0

                                                  ν(Cy)dy

                                                  where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                  Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                  Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                  f(x) =

                                                  inty(xy)isinA

                                                  1 dτ

                                                  is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                  Now we observe that

                                                  ν times τ(A) =

                                                  intRn

                                                  f(x) dν geintRn

                                                  f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                  by Lemma 193

                                                  And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                  Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                  ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                  micro(S)

                                                  is more peaked than micro

                                                  Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                  Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                  Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                  Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                  Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                  radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                  values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                  Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                  2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                  one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                  Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                  ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                  This can be decoded as

                                                  vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                  ε

                                                  eminusπ|x|2

                                                  dx

                                                  where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                  asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                  be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                  volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                  vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                  It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                  20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                  A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                  |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                  where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                  Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                  cradic

                                                  nlogN

                                                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                  Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                  )n2eminusα|x|

                                                  2 An easy es-

                                                  timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                  micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                  minus1

                                                  radicα

                                                  πeminusαx

                                                  2

                                                  dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                  eminusα

                                                  It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                  radicnα

                                                  By Theorem 191

                                                  micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                  1minus 1radicπα

                                                  eminusα)N

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                  so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                  cradic

                                                  nlogN

                                                  ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                  absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                  παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                  or

                                                  (201) N log

                                                  (1minus 1radic

                                                  παeminusα)ge c3

                                                  for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                  Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                  Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                  logN middot logM ge γn

                                                  for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                  Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                  radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                  Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                  nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                  half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                  nlogN

                                                  and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                  of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                  1logM

                                                  Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                  cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                  Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                  In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                  However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                  Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                  Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                  cn

                                                  logN

                                                  )n2vn

                                                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                  Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                  Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                  volK

                                                  volKge(

                                                  cn

                                                  logN

                                                  )n

                                                  Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                  volK

                                                  volK=

                                                  (volK)2

                                                  volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                  v2n

                                                  ge(

                                                  cn

                                                  logN

                                                  )n

                                                  where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                  The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                  Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                  h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                  (1 + t)n= 1

                                                  Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                  21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                  We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                  Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                  The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                  Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                  dist(xX) le δ

                                                  In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                  Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                  δkminus1

                                                  Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                  Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                  |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                  vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                  δkminus1

                                                  here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                  vk = πk2

                                                  Γ(k2+1)

                                                  Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                  radic2

                                                  Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                  2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                  radic2 such that

                                                  the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                  has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                  So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                  2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                  Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                  E sube K suberadicnE

                                                  Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                  radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                  E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                  Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                  1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                  on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                  Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                  c

                                                  radiclog n

                                                  n

                                                  with some absolute constant c

                                                  See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                  n(this is the

                                                  DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                  Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                  C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                  σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                  128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                  128

                                                  Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                  the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                  128 If in total

                                                  2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                  128 |X| lt 1

                                                  then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                  k16kminus1

                                                  εkminus1eminus

                                                  c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                  which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                  M equal 1

                                                  x le sumxiisinX

                                                  cixi leradic

                                                  2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                  Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                  radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                  (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                  2(1 + ε8)

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                  and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                  For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                  22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                  It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                  Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                  where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                  Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                  Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                  )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                  (4δ

                                                  )kwe could rotate X

                                                  and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                  This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                  Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                  About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                  Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                  Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                  Q = x21 + x2

                                                  2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                  This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                  On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                  with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                  ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                  by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                  d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                  Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                  is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                  (d+kminus1d

                                                  ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                  Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                  minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                  (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                  )

                                                  A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                  Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                  f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                  References

                                                  [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                  [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                  [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                  [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                  [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                  [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                  [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                  [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                  [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                  [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                  [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                  [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                  Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                  Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                  Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                  [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                  [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                  [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                  [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                  [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                  [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                  [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                  [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                  [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                  [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                  [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                  [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                  [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                  [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                  18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                  347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                  2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                  ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                  and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                  bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                  Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                  Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                  dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                  [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                  [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                  [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                  [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                  [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                  [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                  [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                  [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                  [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                  [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                  [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                  [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                  [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                  [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                  [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                  Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                  Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                  Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                  E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                  URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                  • 1 Introduction
                                                  • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                  • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                  • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                  • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                  • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                  • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                  • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                  • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                  • 10 Monotone maps
                                                  • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                  • 12 Log-concavity
                                                  • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                  • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                  • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                  • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                  • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                  • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                  • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                  • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                  • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                  • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                  • References

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 26

                                                    15 Needle decomposition

                                                    Now we are going to consider an interesting tool in studying inequalities for measuresthe needle decomposition The reader is referred to [NSV02] for a deeper review of thissubject

                                                    The main result is the following theorem

                                                    Theorem 151 For any two absolutely continuous finite measures micro and ν on Rn sup-ported in a bounded convex set S and a prescribed ε gt 0 it is possible to partition S intosome number of convex pieces P1 PN so that for every Pi

                                                    micro(Pi)

                                                    micro(Rn)=

                                                    ν(Pi)

                                                    ν(Rn)

                                                    and one of the alternatives hold Either Pi can be included into a ε-neighborhood of a lineor not But the total measure micro + ν of the parts satisfying the latter alternative is lessthan ε

                                                    A piece Pi in this theorem has small deviation from a line so it looks like an almost1-dimensional ldquoneedlerdquo This justifies the name ldquoneedle decompositionrdquo

                                                    Sketch of the proof We start from the case n = 2 We can partition the two measureswith a line into equal halves Then we can partition every part with another line so thatboth measures are partitioned into equal fourths Then we proceed this way many timesIs we impose an additional technical assumption say that the sum of densities of micro andν is separated from zero on S then it is easy to check that after an appropriate numberof steps all the parts Pi become ε-needles (ε-close to lines)

                                                    The technical assumption on positive density can be avoided as follows Take somepositive δ and break the parts Pi into two categories Those for which micro(Pi) + ν(Pi) gtδ volPi the ldquoessentialrdquo parts and all the other ldquoinessentialrdquo parts For the essential partsafter a definite number of steps depending on ε and δ we conclude that they are ε-needles For the inessential parts we observe that their total measure micro + ν is at mostδ volS which can be chosen to be less than ε

                                                    Now consider the case n gt 2 For an (n minus 2)-dimensional linear subspace L sub Rn wemake the 2-dimensional partition of the 2-plane RnL into parts so that the essential partsare εn-needles and the total measure of the inessential parts is small The correspondingpartition in Rn is a partition with hyperplanes parallel to L

                                                    Then the trick is to repeat this construction for different Lrsquos passing sufficiently closeto any given (n minus 2)-dimensional direction also requiring that the total measure of theinessential parts on the jrsquoth step is at most ε2j The measures micro and ν get partitionedinto many equal pieces and it is possible to check that most of the parts cannot beessentially two-dimensional (contain a two-dimensional disk of a prescribed size) whilethe inessential parts together have total measure micro+ν less than ε Indeed if some essentialpart Pi has a 2-dimensional disk D of radius εn inside then we take the orthogonal tothe disk linear subspace LD sub Rn and observe the following Since we made hyperplanecuts almost parallel to LD on some stage this disk could not survive for the essentialparts

                                                    The useful observation is as follows For every ε-needle part Pi we choose the line`i to which it is ε-close If the measures micro were log-concave then their restrictions microiand νi to the convex body Pi remain log-concave Since Pi is almost one-dimensionalthen it makes sense to consider the projections of microi and νi to `i which become log-concave measures in the line by Theorem 121 And if the densities of micro and ν werecontinuous then this measure on the line approximates the original measures on Pi with an

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                                    appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                                    There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                                    16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                                    Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                                    2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                                    intRn e

                                                    minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                                    Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                                    Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                    micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                    Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                                    So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                                    Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                                    micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                                    = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                                    The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                                    ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                                    It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                                    Now everything reduces to the following

                                                    Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                                    and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                    ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                    The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                                    primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                                    into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                                    (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                                    2 where

                                                    ν(U) =

                                                    int x

                                                    minusinfineminusπξ

                                                    2

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                                    17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                                    It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                                    Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                                    σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                                    This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                                    Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                                    2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                                    nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                                    the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                                    centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                                    Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                                    radicn in particular the following estimate

                                                    holds

                                                    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                    2

                                                    In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                                    Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                                    defined as follows

                                                    U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                                    volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                                    Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                                    with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                                    volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                                    2= v

                                                    (1minus sin2 ε

                                                    2

                                                    )n+12 le veminus

                                                    (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                                    2

                                                    The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                                    vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                    22

                                                    which implies

                                                    σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                    22

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                                    A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                                    Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                                    σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                    2

                                                    Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                                    Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                                    18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                                    There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                                    First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                                    ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                                    where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                                    M

                                                    (ω∆ω)ν =

                                                    intM

                                                    |dω|2ν +

                                                    intM

                                                    |dlowastω|2ν

                                                    where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                                    M

                                                    f∆fν =

                                                    intM

                                                    |df |2ν

                                                    From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                                    L20(M) =

                                                    f isin L2(M)

                                                    intM

                                                    fν = 0

                                                    the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                                    0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                                    0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                                    M

                                                    |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                                    |f |2ν for all f such that

                                                    intM

                                                    fν = 0

                                                    The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                                    It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                    One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                    |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                    ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                    (xy)isinE

                                                    f(x)

                                                    The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                    Now we make the following definition

                                                    Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                    Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                    First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                    Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                    19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                    Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                    Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                    micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                    The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                    The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                    Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                    ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                    Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                    Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                    Rn

                                                    f dν geintRn

                                                    f dmicro

                                                    Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                    f dν =

                                                    int f(x)

                                                    0

                                                    intRn

                                                    1 dνdy =

                                                    int f(x)

                                                    0

                                                    ν(Cy)dy

                                                    where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                    Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                    Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                    f(x) =

                                                    inty(xy)isinA

                                                    1 dτ

                                                    is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                    Now we observe that

                                                    ν times τ(A) =

                                                    intRn

                                                    f(x) dν geintRn

                                                    f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                    by Lemma 193

                                                    And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                    Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                    ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                    micro(S)

                                                    is more peaked than micro

                                                    Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                    Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                    Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                    Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                    Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                    radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                    values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                    Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                    2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                    one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                    Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                    ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                    This can be decoded as

                                                    vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                    ε

                                                    eminusπ|x|2

                                                    dx

                                                    where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                    asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                    be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                    volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                    vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                    It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                    20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                    A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                    |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                    where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                    Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                    cradic

                                                    nlogN

                                                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                    Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                    )n2eminusα|x|

                                                    2 An easy es-

                                                    timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                    micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                    minus1

                                                    radicα

                                                    πeminusαx

                                                    2

                                                    dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                    eminusα

                                                    It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                    radicnα

                                                    By Theorem 191

                                                    micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                    1minus 1radicπα

                                                    eminusα)N

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                    so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                    cradic

                                                    nlogN

                                                    ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                    absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                    παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                    or

                                                    (201) N log

                                                    (1minus 1radic

                                                    παeminusα)ge c3

                                                    for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                    Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                    Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                    logN middot logM ge γn

                                                    for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                    Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                    radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                    Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                    nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                    half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                    nlogN

                                                    and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                    of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                    1logM

                                                    Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                    cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                    Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                    In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                    However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                    Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                    Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                    cn

                                                    logN

                                                    )n2vn

                                                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                    Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                    Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                    volK

                                                    volKge(

                                                    cn

                                                    logN

                                                    )n

                                                    Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                    volK

                                                    volK=

                                                    (volK)2

                                                    volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                    v2n

                                                    ge(

                                                    cn

                                                    logN

                                                    )n

                                                    where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                    The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                    Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                    h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                    (1 + t)n= 1

                                                    Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                    21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                    We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                    Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                    The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                    Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                    dist(xX) le δ

                                                    In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                    Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                    δkminus1

                                                    Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                    Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                    |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                    vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                    δkminus1

                                                    here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                    vk = πk2

                                                    Γ(k2+1)

                                                    Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                    radic2

                                                    Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                    2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                    radic2 such that

                                                    the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                    has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                    So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                    2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                    Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                    E sube K suberadicnE

                                                    Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                    radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                    E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                    Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                    1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                    on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                    Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                    c

                                                    radiclog n

                                                    n

                                                    with some absolute constant c

                                                    See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                    n(this is the

                                                    DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                    Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                    C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                    σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                    128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                    128

                                                    Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                    the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                    128 If in total

                                                    2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                    128 |X| lt 1

                                                    then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                    k16kminus1

                                                    εkminus1eminus

                                                    c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                    which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                    M equal 1

                                                    x le sumxiisinX

                                                    cixi leradic

                                                    2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                    Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                    radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                    (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                    2(1 + ε8)

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                    and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                    For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                    22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                    It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                    Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                    where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                    Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                    Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                    )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                    (4δ

                                                    )kwe could rotate X

                                                    and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                    This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                    Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                    About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                    Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                    Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                    Q = x21 + x2

                                                    2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                    This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                    On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                    with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                    ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                    by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                    d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                    Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                    is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                    (d+kminus1d

                                                    ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                    Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                    minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                    (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                    )

                                                    A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                    Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                    f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                    References

                                                    [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                    [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                    [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                    [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                    [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                    [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                    [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                    [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                    [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                    [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                    [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                    [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                    Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                    Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                    Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                    [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                    [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                    [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                    [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                    [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                    [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                    [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                    [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                    [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                    [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                    [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                    [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                    [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                    [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                    18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                    347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                    2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                    ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                    and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                    bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                    Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                    Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                    dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                    [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                    [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                    [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                    [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                    [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                    [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                    [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                    [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                    [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                    [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                    [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                    [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                    [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                    [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                    [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                    Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                    Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                    Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                    E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                    URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                    • 1 Introduction
                                                    • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                    • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                    • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                    • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                    • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                    • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                    • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                    • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                    • 10 Monotone maps
                                                    • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                    • 12 Log-concavity
                                                    • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                    • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                    • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                    • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                    • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                    • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                    • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                    • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                    • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                    • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                    • References

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 27

                                                      appropriate precision Of course by approximating measures the assumption of continuityfor the density can be dropped in most practical applications To put it short the needledecomposition can sometimes reduce questions about pairs of log-concave measures onRn to pairs of log-concave measures in the line

                                                      There is a more sophisticated version of the needle decompositions called pancakedecomposition used for example in [Grom03] Informally when the number of measuresto partition increases then the ldquoessential dimensionrdquo of the parts increases accordingly

                                                      16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure

                                                      Let us apply the needle decomposition to establish the isoperimetric inequality for aGaussian measure on Rn After some rescaling any such measure obtains the densityeminusπ|x|

                                                      2 which we like for its simplicity and normalization

                                                      intRn e

                                                      minusπ|x|2 dx = 1 The cru-cial property of the Gaussian measure is that the density of its orthogonal projection isproportional to restriction of its density to any line

                                                      Since the notion of the surface area does not make much sense for Gaussian measureswe formulate the ldquointegratedrdquo form of the isoperimetric inequality

                                                      Theorem 161 For a Gaussian measure micro on Rn consider an open subset U and ahalfspace H of the same measure micro(H) = micro(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                      micro(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                      Remark 162 Note that the value micro(Hε) depends on micro(H) and ε and does not depend onthe dimension n

                                                      So we see that for the standard measure in Rn the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the ball andfor the Gaussian measure the ldquomost roundrdquo body is the halfspace

                                                      Sketch of the proof Let U = Rn U be the complement of U After making the needledecomposition for two restrictions micro|U and micro|U we reduce the problem to a one-dimensionalproblem preserving the equality

                                                      micro(U cap Pi)micro(Pi)

                                                      = micro(U) = micro(H)

                                                      The measure micro on Pi after projection to `i becomes a log-concave measure with densityρ Moreover it is strongly log-concave in the following sense

                                                      ρ((1minus t)x1 + tx2) ge ρ(x1)1minustρ(x2)teπt(1minust)|x1minusx2|2

                                                      It is easy to check that the proof of Theorem 121 can be modified to prove that the stronglog-concavity is preserved under projections

                                                      Now everything reduces to the following

                                                      Lemma 163 Let micro be the probability measure on the line with density eminusπx2

                                                      and ν bea strongly log-concave probability measure on the line Consider an open subset U and ahalfline H such that micro(H) = ν(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods we have

                                                      ν(Uε) ge micro(Hε)

                                                      The proof of this lemma is left as a technical exercise for the reader It makes sense toapproximate U with a union of intervals and then show that these intervals can be movedto the left or to the right decreasing (ν(Uε))

                                                      primeε Finally all the intervals can be merged

                                                      into a single one either (minusinfin t) or (t+infin) In this case it is easy to verify that the value

                                                      (ν(Uε))primeε = ρ(t) is at least eminusπx

                                                      2 where

                                                      ν(U) =

                                                      int x

                                                      minusinfineminusπξ

                                                      2

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                                      17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                                      It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                                      Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                                      σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                                      This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                                      Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                                      2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                                      nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                                      the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                                      centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                                      Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                                      radicn in particular the following estimate

                                                      holds

                                                      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                      2

                                                      In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                                      Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                                      defined as follows

                                                      U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                                      volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                                      Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                                      with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                                      volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                                      2= v

                                                      (1minus sin2 ε

                                                      2

                                                      )n+12 le veminus

                                                      (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                                      2

                                                      The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                                      vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                      22

                                                      which implies

                                                      σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                      22

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                                      A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                                      Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                                      σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                      2

                                                      Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                                      Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                                      18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                                      There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                                      First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                                      ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                                      where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                                      M

                                                      (ω∆ω)ν =

                                                      intM

                                                      |dω|2ν +

                                                      intM

                                                      |dlowastω|2ν

                                                      where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                                      M

                                                      f∆fν =

                                                      intM

                                                      |df |2ν

                                                      From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                                      L20(M) =

                                                      f isin L2(M)

                                                      intM

                                                      fν = 0

                                                      the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                                      0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                                      0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                                      M

                                                      |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                                      |f |2ν for all f such that

                                                      intM

                                                      fν = 0

                                                      The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                                      It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                      One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                      |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                      ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                      (xy)isinE

                                                      f(x)

                                                      The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                      Now we make the following definition

                                                      Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                      Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                      First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                      Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                      19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                      Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                      Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                      micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                      The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                      The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                      Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                      ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                      Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                      Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                      Rn

                                                      f dν geintRn

                                                      f dmicro

                                                      Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                      f dν =

                                                      int f(x)

                                                      0

                                                      intRn

                                                      1 dνdy =

                                                      int f(x)

                                                      0

                                                      ν(Cy)dy

                                                      where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                      Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                      Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                      f(x) =

                                                      inty(xy)isinA

                                                      1 dτ

                                                      is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                      Now we observe that

                                                      ν times τ(A) =

                                                      intRn

                                                      f(x) dν geintRn

                                                      f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                      by Lemma 193

                                                      And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                      Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                      ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                      micro(S)

                                                      is more peaked than micro

                                                      Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                      Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                      Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                      Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                      Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                      radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                      values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                      Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                      2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                      one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                      Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                      ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                      This can be decoded as

                                                      vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                      ε

                                                      eminusπ|x|2

                                                      dx

                                                      where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                      asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                      be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                      volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                      vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                      It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                      20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                      A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                      |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                      where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                      Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                      cradic

                                                      nlogN

                                                      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                      Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                      )n2eminusα|x|

                                                      2 An easy es-

                                                      timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                      micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                      minus1

                                                      radicα

                                                      πeminusαx

                                                      2

                                                      dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                      eminusα

                                                      It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                      radicnα

                                                      By Theorem 191

                                                      micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                      1minus 1radicπα

                                                      eminusα)N

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                      so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                      cradic

                                                      nlogN

                                                      ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                      absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                      παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                      or

                                                      (201) N log

                                                      (1minus 1radic

                                                      παeminusα)ge c3

                                                      for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                      Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                      Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                      logN middot logM ge γn

                                                      for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                      Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                      radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                      Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                      nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                      half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                      nlogN

                                                      and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                      of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                      1logM

                                                      Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                      cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                      Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                      In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                      However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                      Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                      Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                      cn

                                                      logN

                                                      )n2vn

                                                      (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                      Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                      Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                      volK

                                                      volKge(

                                                      cn

                                                      logN

                                                      )n

                                                      Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                      volK

                                                      volK=

                                                      (volK)2

                                                      volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                      v2n

                                                      ge(

                                                      cn

                                                      logN

                                                      )n

                                                      where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                      The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                      Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                      h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                      (1 + t)n= 1

                                                      Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                      21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                      We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                      Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                      The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                      Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                      dist(xX) le δ

                                                      In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                      Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                      δkminus1

                                                      Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                      Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                      |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                      vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                      δkminus1

                                                      here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                      vk = πk2

                                                      Γ(k2+1)

                                                      Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                      radic2

                                                      Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                      2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                      radic2 such that

                                                      the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                      has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                      So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                      2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                      Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                      E sube K suberadicnE

                                                      Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                      radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                      E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                      Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                      1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                      on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                      Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                      c

                                                      radiclog n

                                                      n

                                                      with some absolute constant c

                                                      See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                      n(this is the

                                                      DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                      Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                      C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                      σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                      128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                      128

                                                      Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                      the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                      128 If in total

                                                      2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                      128 |X| lt 1

                                                      then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                      k16kminus1

                                                      εkminus1eminus

                                                      c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                      which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                      M equal 1

                                                      x le sumxiisinX

                                                      cixi leradic

                                                      2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                      Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                      radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                      (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                      2(1 + ε8)

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                      and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                      For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                      22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                      It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                      Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                      where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                      Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                      Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                      )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                      (4δ

                                                      )kwe could rotate X

                                                      and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                      This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                      Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                      About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                      Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                      Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                      Q = x21 + x2

                                                      2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                      This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                      On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                      with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                      ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                      by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                      d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                      Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                      is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                      (d+kminus1d

                                                      ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                      Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                      minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                      (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                      )

                                                      A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                      Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                      f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                      References

                                                      [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                      [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                      [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                      [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                      [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                      [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                      [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                      [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                      [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                      [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                      [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                      [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                      Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                      Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                      Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                      [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                      [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                      [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                      [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                      [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                      [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                      [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                      [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                      [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                      [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                      [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                      [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                      [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                      [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                      18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                      347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                      2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                      ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                      and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                      bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                      Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                      Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                      dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                      [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                      [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                      [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                      [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                      [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                      [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                      [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                      [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                      [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                      [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                      [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                      [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                      [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                      [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                      [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                      Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                      Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                      Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                      E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                      URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                      • 1 Introduction
                                                      • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                      • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                      • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                      • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                      • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                      • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                      • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                      • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                      • 10 Monotone maps
                                                      • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                      • 12 Log-concavity
                                                      • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                      • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                      • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                      • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                      • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                      • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                      • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                      • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                      • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                      • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                      • References

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 28

                                                        17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere

                                                        It is interesting and important that on the round sphere Sn sube Rn+1 the correspondingversion of Theorem 161 also holds

                                                        Theorem 171 For a the uniform probability measure σ on Sn consider an open subsetU and a halfspace H sub Rn+1 such that σ(HcapSn) = σ(U) Then for their ε-neighborhoods(in the geodesic path metric of Sn) we have

                                                        σ(Uε) ge σ((H cap Sn)ε)

                                                        This means in particular that the minimal (nminus1)-dimensional volume of partU for givenσ(U) is attained at spherical caps like H cap Sn We do not give a proof here because itdepends on some deep results in Riemannian geometry see the appendix to [MS86] byM Gromov for example The crucial notion here is the Ricci curvature of the Riemannianmetric which equals nminus 1 for the unit n-dimensional round sphere

                                                        Another heuristic evidence for Theorem 171 is that for large dimensions n the Gauss-ian measure with density eminusπ|x|

                                                        2on Rn gets concentrated near the round sphere of radiusradic

                                                        nπ After rescaling byradicπn we see that it ldquoapproachesrdquo the measure σ and therefore

                                                        the isoperimetric inequality for the sphere is ldquoasymptoticallyrdquo correctThe isoperimetric inequality has the following famous consequence known as the con-

                                                        centration of measure phenomenon on the sphere

                                                        Theorem 172 Let U sub Sn have measure σ(U) ge 12 Then the measure of the neigh-borhood σ(Uε) becomes almost 1 for ε of order

                                                        radicn in particular the following estimate

                                                        holds

                                                        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                        2

                                                        In [Led01] it is shown that this theorem can be deduced from the isoperimetry of theGaussian measure using some analytical technicalities Following [GM2001] we give asimple proof of a weaker fact

                                                        Proof of a weaker assertion Consider the complement V = Sn Uε note that the spher-ical distance between U and V is at least ε Now we pass to subsets of the unit ball Bn+1

                                                        defined as follows

                                                        U0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin U V0 = x isin Bn+1 x|x| isin V for their volumes we have (v = vn+1 is the volume of the unit ball here)

                                                        volU0 = vσ(U) volV0 = vσ(V )

                                                        Consider the set X = 12(U0 + V0) simple trigonometry shows that X consists of vectors

                                                        with lengths at most cos ε2 and therefore

                                                        volX le v cosn+1 ε

                                                        2= v

                                                        (1minus sin2 ε

                                                        2

                                                        )n+12 le veminus

                                                        (n+1) sin2 ε2

                                                        2

                                                        The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality in particular gives volV0 le volX and therefore

                                                        vσ(V ) le veminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                        22

                                                        which implies

                                                        σ(Uε) ge 1minus eminus(n+1) sin2 ε

                                                        22

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                                        A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                                        Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                                        σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                        2

                                                        Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                                        Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                                        18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                                        There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                                        First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                                        ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                                        where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                                        M

                                                        (ω∆ω)ν =

                                                        intM

                                                        |dω|2ν +

                                                        intM

                                                        |dlowastω|2ν

                                                        where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                                        M

                                                        f∆fν =

                                                        intM

                                                        |df |2ν

                                                        From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                                        L20(M) =

                                                        f isin L2(M)

                                                        intM

                                                        fν = 0

                                                        the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                                        0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                                        0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                                        M

                                                        |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                                        |f |2ν for all f such that

                                                        intM

                                                        fν = 0

                                                        The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                                        It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                        One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                        |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                        ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                        (xy)isinE

                                                        f(x)

                                                        The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                        Now we make the following definition

                                                        Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                        Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                        First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                        Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                        19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                        Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                        Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                        micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                        The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                        The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                        Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                        ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                        Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                        Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                        Rn

                                                        f dν geintRn

                                                        f dmicro

                                                        Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                        f dν =

                                                        int f(x)

                                                        0

                                                        intRn

                                                        1 dνdy =

                                                        int f(x)

                                                        0

                                                        ν(Cy)dy

                                                        where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                        Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                        Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                        f(x) =

                                                        inty(xy)isinA

                                                        1 dτ

                                                        is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                        Now we observe that

                                                        ν times τ(A) =

                                                        intRn

                                                        f(x) dν geintRn

                                                        f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                        by Lemma 193

                                                        And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                        Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                        ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                        micro(S)

                                                        is more peaked than micro

                                                        Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                        Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                        Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                        Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                        Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                        radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                        values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                        Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                        2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                        one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                        Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                        ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                        This can be decoded as

                                                        vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                        ε

                                                        eminusπ|x|2

                                                        dx

                                                        where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                        asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                        be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                        volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                        vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                        It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                        20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                        A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                        |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                        where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                        Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                        cradic

                                                        nlogN

                                                        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                        Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                        )n2eminusα|x|

                                                        2 An easy es-

                                                        timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                        micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                        minus1

                                                        radicα

                                                        πeminusαx

                                                        2

                                                        dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                        eminusα

                                                        It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                        radicnα

                                                        By Theorem 191

                                                        micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                        1minus 1radicπα

                                                        eminusα)N

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                        so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                        cradic

                                                        nlogN

                                                        ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                        absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                        παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                        or

                                                        (201) N log

                                                        (1minus 1radic

                                                        παeminusα)ge c3

                                                        for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                        Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                        Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                        logN middot logM ge γn

                                                        for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                        Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                        radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                        Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                        nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                        half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                        nlogN

                                                        and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                        of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                        1logM

                                                        Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                        cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                        Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                        In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                        However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                        Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                        Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                        cn

                                                        logN

                                                        )n2vn

                                                        (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                        Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                        Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                        volK

                                                        volKge(

                                                        cn

                                                        logN

                                                        )n

                                                        Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                        volK

                                                        volK=

                                                        (volK)2

                                                        volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                        v2n

                                                        ge(

                                                        cn

                                                        logN

                                                        )n

                                                        where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                        The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                        Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                        h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                        (1 + t)n= 1

                                                        Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                        21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                        We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                        Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                        The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                        Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                        dist(xX) le δ

                                                        In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                        Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                        δkminus1

                                                        Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                        Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                        |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                        vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                        δkminus1

                                                        here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                        vk = πk2

                                                        Γ(k2+1)

                                                        Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                        radic2

                                                        Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                        2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                        radic2 such that

                                                        the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                        has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                        So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                        2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                        Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                        E sube K suberadicnE

                                                        Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                        radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                        E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                        Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                        1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                        on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                        Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                        c

                                                        radiclog n

                                                        n

                                                        with some absolute constant c

                                                        See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                        n(this is the

                                                        DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                        Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                        C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                        σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                        128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                        128

                                                        Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                        the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                        128 If in total

                                                        2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                        128 |X| lt 1

                                                        then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                        k16kminus1

                                                        εkminus1eminus

                                                        c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                        which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                        M equal 1

                                                        x le sumxiisinX

                                                        cixi leradic

                                                        2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                        Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                        radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                        (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                        2(1 + ε8)

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                        and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                        For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                        22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                        It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                        Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                        where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                        Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                        Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                        )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                        (4δ

                                                        )kwe could rotate X

                                                        and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                        This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                        Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                        About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                        Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                        Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                        Q = x21 + x2

                                                        2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                        This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                        On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                        with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                        ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                        by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                        d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                        Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                        is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                        (d+kminus1d

                                                        ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                        Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                        minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                        (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                        )

                                                        A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                        Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                        f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                        References

                                                        [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                        [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                        [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                        [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                        [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                        [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                        [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                        [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                        [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                        [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                        [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                        [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                        Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                        Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                        Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                        [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                        [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                        [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                        [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                        [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                        [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                        [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                        [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                        [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                        [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                        [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                        [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                        [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                        [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                        18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                        347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                        2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                        ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                        and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                        bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                        Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                        Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                        dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                        [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                        [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                        [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                        [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                        [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                        [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                        [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                        [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                        [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                        [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                        [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                        [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                        [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                        [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                        [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                        Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                        Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                        Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                        E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                        URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                        • 1 Introduction
                                                        • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                        • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                        • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                        • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                        • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                        • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                        • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                        • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                        • 10 Monotone maps
                                                        • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                        • 12 Log-concavity
                                                        • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                        • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                        • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                        • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                        • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                        • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                        • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                        • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                        • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                        • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                        • References

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 29

                                                          A usual way to use the concentration on the sphere is the following (Levyrsquos lemma)

                                                          Corollary 173 Let f be a 1-Lipschitz (|f(x)minus f(y)| le dist(x y)) function on Sn thenthe measure of the set where f(x) differs from its median value Mf is estimated by

                                                          σx |f(x)minusMf | ge ε le 2eminus(nminus1)ε2

                                                          2

                                                          Informally on most of the sphere the function f differs from Mf by at most O( 1radicn)

                                                          Much more information about the concentration phenomenon on the sphere and manyother metric-measure spaces can be found in the book [Led01]

                                                          18 More remarks on isoperimetry

                                                          There are many other instances of the isoperimetric inequality Here we just give abrief sketch of them for more details see the book [Lub94]

                                                          First the isoperimetric inequality on Riemannian manifolds is connected through theCheegerndashBuser inequalities to the smallest positive eigenvalue of the Laplace operator(the Laplacian) Let us give some explanations without proofs The Laplace operator fordifferential forms on a smooth closed manifold M is defined as

                                                          ∆ = ddlowast + dlowastd

                                                          where dlowast is the formal adjoint to the d operator on differential forms It is easy to checkthe characteristic property of the Laplace operatorint

                                                          M

                                                          (ω∆ω)ν =

                                                          intM

                                                          |dω|2ν +

                                                          intM

                                                          |dlowastω|2ν

                                                          where ν is the volume form associated with the Riemannian structure For functions thisreduces to ∆f = dlowastdf and int

                                                          M

                                                          f∆fν =

                                                          intM

                                                          |df |2ν

                                                          From this formula (more precisely for its version with f∆g) it is clear that ∆ is self-adjoint and non-negative Moreover since we assume M to be compact and connectedthe only harmonic functions (ie satisfying ∆f = 0) are constant functions Thereforeon the subspace

                                                          L20(M) =

                                                          f isin L2(M)

                                                          intM

                                                          fν = 0

                                                          the Laplace operator is strictly positive By some standard tools of functional analysis itcan be shown that ∆minus1 is a compact operator on L2

                                                          0(M) and the smallest eigenvalue of∆|L2

                                                          0(M) makes sense and is denoted by λ1(M) Therefore λ1(M) is the largest positivenumber satisfying the followingint

                                                          M

                                                          |df |2ν ge λ1(M) middotintM

                                                          |f |2ν for all f such that

                                                          intM

                                                          fν = 0

                                                          The connection to the isoperimetric inequalities now becomes more clear since for apartition M = AcupB into two subsets we can consider a functions almost constant on Aalmost constant on B and changing in a reasonable way near the boundary partA = partBAfter normalizing it to have a zero mean we may apply the definition of λ1(M) anddeduce some kind of isoperimetric inequality showing that partA = partB is sufficiently large

                                                          It is also possible to show the converse By considering the sublevel sets Mc = x isinM f(x) le c and applying a certain kind of isoperimetric inequality to them a lowerbound for λ1(M) follows by careful integration over c

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                          One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                          |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                          ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                          (xy)isinE

                                                          f(x)

                                                          The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                          Now we make the following definition

                                                          Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                          Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                          First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                          Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                          19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                          Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                          Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                          micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                          The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                          The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                          Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                          ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                          Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                          Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                          Rn

                                                          f dν geintRn

                                                          f dmicro

                                                          Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                          f dν =

                                                          int f(x)

                                                          0

                                                          intRn

                                                          1 dνdy =

                                                          int f(x)

                                                          0

                                                          ν(Cy)dy

                                                          where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                          Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                          Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                          f(x) =

                                                          inty(xy)isinA

                                                          1 dτ

                                                          is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                          Now we observe that

                                                          ν times τ(A) =

                                                          intRn

                                                          f(x) dν geintRn

                                                          f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                          by Lemma 193

                                                          And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                          Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                          ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                          micro(S)

                                                          is more peaked than micro

                                                          Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                          Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                          Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                          Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                          Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                          radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                          values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                          Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                          2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                          one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                          Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                          ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                          This can be decoded as

                                                          vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                          ε

                                                          eminusπ|x|2

                                                          dx

                                                          where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                          asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                          be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                          volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                          vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                          It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                          20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                          A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                          |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                          where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                          Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                          cradic

                                                          nlogN

                                                          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                          Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                          )n2eminusα|x|

                                                          2 An easy es-

                                                          timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                          micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                          minus1

                                                          radicα

                                                          πeminusαx

                                                          2

                                                          dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                          eminusα

                                                          It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                          radicnα

                                                          By Theorem 191

                                                          micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                          1minus 1radicπα

                                                          eminusα)N

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                          so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                          cradic

                                                          nlogN

                                                          ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                          absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                          παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                          or

                                                          (201) N log

                                                          (1minus 1radic

                                                          παeminusα)ge c3

                                                          for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                          Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                          Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                          logN middot logM ge γn

                                                          for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                          Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                          radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                          Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                          nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                          half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                          nlogN

                                                          and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                          of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                          1logM

                                                          Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                          cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                          Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                          In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                          However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                          Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                          Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                          cn

                                                          logN

                                                          )n2vn

                                                          (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                          Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                          Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                          volK

                                                          volKge(

                                                          cn

                                                          logN

                                                          )n

                                                          Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                          volK

                                                          volK=

                                                          (volK)2

                                                          volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                          v2n

                                                          ge(

                                                          cn

                                                          logN

                                                          )n

                                                          where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                          The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                          Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                          h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                          (1 + t)n= 1

                                                          Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                          21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                          We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                          Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                          The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                          Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                          dist(xX) le δ

                                                          In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                          Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                          δkminus1

                                                          Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                          Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                          |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                          vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                          δkminus1

                                                          here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                          vk = πk2

                                                          Γ(k2+1)

                                                          Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                          radic2

                                                          Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                          2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                          radic2 such that

                                                          the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                          has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                          So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                          2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                          Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                          E sube K suberadicnE

                                                          Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                          radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                          E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                          Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                          1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                          on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                          Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                          c

                                                          radiclog n

                                                          n

                                                          with some absolute constant c

                                                          See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                          n(this is the

                                                          DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                          Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                          C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                          σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                          128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                          128

                                                          Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                          the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                          128 If in total

                                                          2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                          128 |X| lt 1

                                                          then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                          k16kminus1

                                                          εkminus1eminus

                                                          c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                          which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                          M equal 1

                                                          x le sumxiisinX

                                                          cixi leradic

                                                          2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                          Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                          radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                          (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                          2(1 + ε8)

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                          and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                          For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                          22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                          It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                          Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                          where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                          Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                          Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                          )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                          (4δ

                                                          )kwe could rotate X

                                                          and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                          This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                          Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                          About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                          Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                          Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                          Q = x21 + x2

                                                          2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                          This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                          On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                          with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                          ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                          by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                          d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                          Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                          is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                          (d+kminus1d

                                                          ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                          Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                          minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                          (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                          )

                                                          A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                          Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                          f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                          References

                                                          [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                          [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                          [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                          [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                          [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                          [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                          [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                          [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                          [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                          [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                          [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                          [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                          Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                          Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                          Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                          [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                          [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                          [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                          [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                          [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                          [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                          [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                          [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                          [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                          [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                          [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                          [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                          [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                          [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                          18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                          347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                          2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                          ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                          and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                          bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                          Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                          Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                          dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                          [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                          [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                          [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                          [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                          [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                          [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                          [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                          [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                          [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                          [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                          [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                          [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                          [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                          [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                          [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                          Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                          Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                          Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                          E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                          URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                          • 1 Introduction
                                                          • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                          • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                          • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                          • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                          • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                          • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                          • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                          • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                          • 10 Monotone maps
                                                          • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                          • 12 Log-concavity
                                                          • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                          • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                          • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                          • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                          • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                          • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                          • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                          • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                          • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                          • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                          • References

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 30

                                                            One particular case when the above construction simplifies greatly is the case of theisoperimetry on graphs which is the main topic of the book [Lub94] First the isoperi-metric constant of a graph G = G(E V ) is the number c such that

                                                            |E(AB)| ge cmin|A| |B|for every partition of the set of vertices V = A cup B where E(AB) denotes the set ofedges between A and B It can be easily proved that c(G) can be related to the smallestpositive eigenvalue of the graph Laplacian this is left as an exercise for the reader Thegraph Laplacian is defined as follows For a function f on vertices we put

                                                            ∆f(y) = deg yf(y)minussum

                                                            (xy)isinE

                                                            f(x)

                                                            The only functions corresponding to the zero eigenvalue are constants and it is easy toshow that ∆ is self-adjoint and positive on the functions with zero mean The correspond-ing minimal positive eigenvalue is denoted by λ1(G)

                                                            Now we make the following definition

                                                            Definition 181 A family of graphs Gn is called a family of expanders is |V (Gn)| rarr infin asnrarrinfin the degrees of their vertices are uniformly bounded deg v le k for any v isin V (Gn)and their isoperimetric constants c(G) (or the numbers λ1(G)) are uniformly bounded bya positive number c

                                                            Informally the expander graphs are quantitatively more than connected while havingthe bounded degree of any vertex The theory of expander graphs is large and interestingso here we only mention the main facts without proofs

                                                            First if we try to construct a bipartite graph on two sets of size n and connect anyvertex on the left hand side to some k vertices on the right hand side randomly thenas n tends to infinity the probability to have of the inequality c(G) ge c gt 0 tends to 1if c lt k2 This means that appropriately constructed ldquorandom graphsrdquo are expandersand this fact has serious practical applications

                                                            Second an explicit construction of expanders is rather difficult The most usual wayis to consider an infinite discrete group Γ with a set of generators S and build its Cayleygraph G(Γ S) Then take the set of quotients ΓNn by a family of normal subgroupssuch that |ΓNn| rarr infin and consider the induced graph on ΓNn It turns out that someproperties of the group Γ and its representations on the Hilbert space (the ldquoKazhdanproperty Trdquo or other similar properties) allow to prove that the constructed family ofgraphs is a family of expanders For the details (and many other interesting stuff like theBanachndashTarski paradox) the reader is referred to the already mentioned book [Lub94] orother sources

                                                            19 Sidakrsquos lemma

                                                            Here we are going to prove a useful fact about Gaussian measures known as Sidakrsquoslemma We define a centrally symmetric strip in Rn as the set S = x |λ(x)| le w forsome λ isin Rnlowast and w isin R+

                                                            Theorem 191 Let A be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn and S be a centrallysymmetric strip in Rn Then for a Gaussian probability measure micro we have

                                                            micro(A) middot micro(S) le micro(A cap S)

                                                            The key idea of the proof is to introduce a new probability measure ν(X) = micro(XcapS)micro(S)

                                                            The inequality that we want to obtain is formalized in the following

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                            Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                            ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                            Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                            Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                            Rn

                                                            f dν geintRn

                                                            f dmicro

                                                            Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                            f dν =

                                                            int f(x)

                                                            0

                                                            intRn

                                                            1 dνdy =

                                                            int f(x)

                                                            0

                                                            ν(Cy)dy

                                                            where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                            Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                            Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                            f(x) =

                                                            inty(xy)isinA

                                                            1 dτ

                                                            is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                            Now we observe that

                                                            ν times τ(A) =

                                                            intRn

                                                            f(x) dν geintRn

                                                            f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                            by Lemma 193

                                                            And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                            Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                            ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                            micro(S)

                                                            is more peaked than micro

                                                            Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                            Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                            Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                            Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                            Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                            radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                            values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                            Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                            2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                            one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                            Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                            ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                            This can be decoded as

                                                            vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                            ε

                                                            eminusπ|x|2

                                                            dx

                                                            where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                            asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                            be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                            volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                            vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                            It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                            20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                            A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                            |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                            where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                            Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                            cradic

                                                            nlogN

                                                            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                            Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                            )n2eminusα|x|

                                                            2 An easy es-

                                                            timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                            micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                            minus1

                                                            radicα

                                                            πeminusαx

                                                            2

                                                            dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                            eminusα

                                                            It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                            radicnα

                                                            By Theorem 191

                                                            micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                            1minus 1radicπα

                                                            eminusα)N

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                            so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                            cradic

                                                            nlogN

                                                            ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                            absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                            παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                            or

                                                            (201) N log

                                                            (1minus 1radic

                                                            παeminusα)ge c3

                                                            for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                            Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                            Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                            logN middot logM ge γn

                                                            for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                            Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                            radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                            Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                            nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                            half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                            nlogN

                                                            and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                            of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                            1logM

                                                            Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                            cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                            Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                            In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                            However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                            Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                            Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                            cn

                                                            logN

                                                            )n2vn

                                                            (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                            Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                            Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                            volK

                                                            volKge(

                                                            cn

                                                            logN

                                                            )n

                                                            Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                            volK

                                                            volK=

                                                            (volK)2

                                                            volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                            v2n

                                                            ge(

                                                            cn

                                                            logN

                                                            )n

                                                            where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                            The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                            Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                            h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                            (1 + t)n= 1

                                                            Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                            21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                            We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                            Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                            The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                            Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                            dist(xX) le δ

                                                            In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                            Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                            δkminus1

                                                            Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                            Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                            |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                            vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                            δkminus1

                                                            here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                            vk = πk2

                                                            Γ(k2+1)

                                                            Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                            radic2

                                                            Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                            2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                            radic2 such that

                                                            the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                            has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                            So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                            2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                            Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                            E sube K suberadicnE

                                                            Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                            radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                            E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                            Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                            1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                            on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                            Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                            c

                                                            radiclog n

                                                            n

                                                            with some absolute constant c

                                                            See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                            n(this is the

                                                            DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                            Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                            C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                            σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                            128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                            128

                                                            Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                            the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                            128 If in total

                                                            2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                            128 |X| lt 1

                                                            then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                            k16kminus1

                                                            εkminus1eminus

                                                            c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                            which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                            M equal 1

                                                            x le sumxiisinX

                                                            cixi leradic

                                                            2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                            radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                            Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                            radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                            (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                            2(1 + ε8)

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                            and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                            radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                            For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                            |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                            22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                            It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                            Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                            where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                            Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                            Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                            )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                            (4δ

                                                            )kwe could rotate X

                                                            and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                            This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                            Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                            f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                            About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                            Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                            Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                            Q = x21 + x2

                                                            2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                            This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                            On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                            with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                            ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                            by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                            d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                            Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                            is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                            (d+kminus1d

                                                            ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                            Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                            minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                            (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                            )

                                                            A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                            Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                            f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                            References

                                                            [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                            [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                            [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                            [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                            [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                            [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                            [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                            [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                            [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                            [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                            [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                            [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                            Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                            Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                            Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                            [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                            [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                            [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                            [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                            [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                            [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                            [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                            [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                            [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                            [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                            [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                            [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                            [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                            [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                            18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                            347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                            2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                            ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                            and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                            bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                            Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                            Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                            dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                            [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                            [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                            [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                            [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                            [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                            [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                            [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                            [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                            [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                            [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                            [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                            [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                            [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                            [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                            [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                            Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                            Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                            Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                            E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                            URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                            • 1 Introduction
                                                            • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                            • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                            • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                            • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                            • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                            • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                            • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                            • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                            • 10 Monotone maps
                                                            • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                            • 12 Log-concavity
                                                            • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                            • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                            • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                            • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                            • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                            • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                            • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                            • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                            • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                            • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                            • References

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 31

                                                              Definition 192 Suppose micro and ν are two probability measures on Rn We say that νis more peaked than micro if for any centrally symmetric convex body A

                                                              ν(A) ge micro(A)

                                                              Now the proof of Theorem 191 consist of two lemmas

                                                              Lemma 193 If ν is more peaked than micro then for any centrally symmetric log-concavedensity f we have int

                                                              Rn

                                                              f dν geintRn

                                                              f dmicro

                                                              Proof Rewrite the integralintRn

                                                              f dν =

                                                              int f(x)

                                                              0

                                                              intRn

                                                              1 dνdy =

                                                              int f(x)

                                                              0

                                                              ν(Cy)dy

                                                              where Cy = x f(x) le y For log-concave and centrally symmetric f the sets Cy areconvex and centrally symmetric so the inequality follows by integration in y

                                                              Lemma 194 If the measure ν is more peaked than micro as measures on Rn and τ is afinite centrally symmetric log-concave measure on Rm then ν times τ is more peaked thanmicrotimes τ on Rn+m

                                                              Proof Denote by x and y the points in Rn and Rm respectively Consider a centrallysymmetric convex body A sub Rn+m The measure 1times τ is log-concave and its restrictionτ prime to A is also log-concave and centrally symmetric Hence by Theorem 121 the density

                                                              f(x) =

                                                              inty(xy)isinA

                                                              1 dτ

                                                              is log-concave and centrally symmetric since it is the density of the projection of τ prime toRn

                                                              Now we observe that

                                                              ν times τ(A) =

                                                              intRn

                                                              f(x) dν geintRn

                                                              f(x) dmicro = microtimes τ(A)

                                                              by Lemma 193

                                                              And the proof of Theorem 191 is complete by the following obvious

                                                              Lemma 195 If micro is the Gaussian measure on the line and S is a centrally symmetricsegment then the measure defined by

                                                              ν(X) =micro(X cap S)

                                                              micro(S)

                                                              is more peaked than micro

                                                              Then it suffices to take the Cartesian product of the result of this last lemma with theGaussian measure on Rnminus1 to obtain Theorem 191

                                                              Remark 196 Note that it is conjectured (the Gaussian correlation conjecture) that The-orem 191 can be generalized to the case of two arbitrary centrally symmetric convexbodies A and B with the same inequality micro(A) middot micro(B) le micro(A capB)

                                                              Another result related to the notion of ldquomore peakedrdquo is the lower bound for the sectionvolume of the unit cube Qn = [minus12 12]n

                                                              Theorem 197 Let L be a k-dimensional linear subspace of Rn Then the k-dimensionalvolume of the section L capQn is at least 1

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                              Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                              radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                              values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                              Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                              2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                              one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                              Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                              ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                              This can be decoded as

                                                              vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                              ε

                                                              eminusπ|x|2

                                                              dx

                                                              where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                              asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                              be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                              volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                              vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                              It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                              20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                              A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                              |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                              where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                              Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                              cradic

                                                              nlogN

                                                              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                              Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                              )n2eminusα|x|

                                                              2 An easy es-

                                                              timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                              micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                              minus1

                                                              radicα

                                                              πeminusαx

                                                              2

                                                              dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                              eminusα

                                                              It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                              radicnα

                                                              By Theorem 191

                                                              micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                              1minus 1radicπα

                                                              eminusα)N

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                              so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                              cradic

                                                              nlogN

                                                              ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                              absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                              παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                              or

                                                              (201) N log

                                                              (1minus 1radic

                                                              παeminusα)ge c3

                                                              for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                              Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                              Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                              logN middot logM ge γn

                                                              for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                              Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                              radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                              Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                              nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                              half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                              nlogN

                                                              and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                              of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                              1logM

                                                              Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                              cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                              Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                              In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                              However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                              Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                              Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                              cn

                                                              logN

                                                              )n2vn

                                                              (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                              Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                              Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                              volK

                                                              volKge(

                                                              cn

                                                              logN

                                                              )n

                                                              Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                              volK

                                                              volK=

                                                              (volK)2

                                                              volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                              v2n

                                                              ge(

                                                              cn

                                                              logN

                                                              )n

                                                              where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                              The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                              Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                              h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                              (1 + t)n= 1

                                                              Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                              21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                              We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                              Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                              The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                              Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                              dist(xX) le δ

                                                              In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                              Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                              δkminus1

                                                              Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                              Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                              |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                              vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                              δkminus1

                                                              here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                              vk = πk2

                                                              Γ(k2+1)

                                                              Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                              radic2

                                                              Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                              2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                              radic2 such that

                                                              the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                              has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                              So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                              2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                              Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                              E sube K suberadicnE

                                                              Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                              radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                              E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                              Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                              1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                              on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                              Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                              c

                                                              radiclog n

                                                              n

                                                              with some absolute constant c

                                                              See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                              n(this is the

                                                              DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                              Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                              C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                              σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                              128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                              128

                                                              Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                              the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                              128 If in total

                                                              2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                              128 |X| lt 1

                                                              then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                              k16kminus1

                                                              εkminus1eminus

                                                              c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                              which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                              M equal 1

                                                              x le sumxiisinX

                                                              cixi leradic

                                                              2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                              radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                              Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                              radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                              (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                              2(1 + ε8)

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                              and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                              radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                              For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                              |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                              22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                              It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                              Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                              where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                              Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                              Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                              )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                              (4δ

                                                              )kwe could rotate X

                                                              and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                              This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                              Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                              f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                              About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                              Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                              Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                              Q = x21 + x2

                                                              2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                              This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                              On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                              with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                              ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                              by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                              d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                              Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                              is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                              (d+kminus1d

                                                              ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                              Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                              minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                              (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                              )

                                                              A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                              Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                              f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                              References

                                                              [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                              [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                              [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                              [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                              [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                              [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                              [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                              [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                              [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                              [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                              [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                              [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                              Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                              Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                              Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                              [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                              [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                              [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                              [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                              [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                              [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                              [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                              [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                              [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                              [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                              [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                              [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                              [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                              [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                              18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                              347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                              2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                              ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                              and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                              bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                              Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                              Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                              dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                              [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                              [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                              [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                              [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                              [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                              [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                              [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                              [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                              [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                              [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                              [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                              [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                              [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                              [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                              [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                              Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                              Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                              Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                              E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                              URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                              • 1 Introduction
                                                              • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                              • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                              • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                              • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                              • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                              • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                              • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                              • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                              • 10 Monotone maps
                                                              • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                              • 12 Log-concavity
                                                              • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                              • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                              • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                              • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                              • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                              • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                              • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                              • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                              • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                              • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                              • References

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 32

                                                                Remark 198 The upper bounds on the section volume are harder to prove It is knownthat any hyperplane section of Qn has area at most

                                                                radic2 This result was extended to lower

                                                                values of k but for some pairs (k n) the precise upper bound is still not known See thereview of K Ball [Ball01] for the details of this and many other interesting facts

                                                                Proof Consider the uniform measure ν on Qn and compare it with the Gaussian measuremicro with density eminusπ|x|

                                                                2 Actually ν is more peaked than micro the proof is reduced to the

                                                                one-dimensional case by applying Lemma 194 and noting that any product of two suchmeasures (in possibly different dimensions) is log-concave

                                                                Now take an ε-neighborhood Lε of L By the definition of ldquomore peakedrdquo we obtain

                                                                ν(Lε) ge micro(Lε)

                                                                This can be decoded as

                                                                vol(Lε capQn) geintBnminusk

                                                                ε

                                                                eminusπ|x|2

                                                                dx

                                                                where Bnminuskε is the (nminus k)-dimensional ball of radius ε The right hand side for εrarr +0 is

                                                                asymptotically vnminuskεnminusk And the trick is that the k-dimensional volume of L capQn may

                                                                be defined (following Minkowski) to be

                                                                volk L capQn = limεrarr+0

                                                                vol(L capQn)εvnminuskεnminusk

                                                                It remains to note that the difference between vol(L cap Qn)ε and volLε cap Qn is o(εnminusk)(the proof is left to the reader) and the result then follows

                                                                20 Centrally symmetric polytopes

                                                                A usual way to apply the Sidak lemma (Theorem 191) is to analyze the behavior ofa centrally symmetric convex polytope in terms of its facets Any such polytope K isdefined by a system of inequalities

                                                                |(ni x)| le wi i = 1 N

                                                                where ni are unit normal vectors to facets of K and wi are positive reals Each suchinequality defines a strip and therefore Theorem 191 is applicable For example thefollowing lemma holds

                                                                Lemma 201 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then it intersects more than a half of the sphere S of radius

                                                                cradic

                                                                nlogN

                                                                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                                Sketch of the proof Choose a Gaussian measure with density(απ

                                                                )n2eminusα|x|

                                                                2 An easy es-

                                                                timate using integration by parts shows that any strip Pi defined by |(ni x)| le wi hasmeasure (here we use wi ge 1)

                                                                micro(Pi) geint 1

                                                                minus1

                                                                radicα

                                                                πeminusαx

                                                                2

                                                                dx ge 1minus 1radicπα

                                                                eminusα

                                                                It is known (for example from the direct calculation of moments with gamma functionand the Chebyshev inequality) that this Gaussian measure is mostly concentrated aroundthe radius |x| =

                                                                radicnα

                                                                By Theorem 191

                                                                micro(K) = micro(P1 cap middot middot middot cap PN) ge micro(P1) middot middot middot middot middot micro(PN) ge(

                                                                1minus 1radicπα

                                                                eminusα)N

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                                so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                                cradic

                                                                nlogN

                                                                ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                                absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                                παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                                or

                                                                (201) N log

                                                                (1minus 1radic

                                                                παeminusα)ge c3

                                                                for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                                Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                                Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                                logN middot logM ge γn

                                                                for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                                Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                                radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                                Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                                nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                                half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                                nlogN

                                                                and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                                of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                                1logM

                                                                Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                                cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                                Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                                In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                                However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                                Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                                Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                                cn

                                                                logN

                                                                )n2vn

                                                                (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                                Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                                Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                                volK

                                                                volKge(

                                                                cn

                                                                logN

                                                                )n

                                                                Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                                volK

                                                                volK=

                                                                (volK)2

                                                                volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                                v2n

                                                                ge(

                                                                cn

                                                                logN

                                                                )n

                                                                where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                                The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                                Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                                h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                                (1 + t)n= 1

                                                                Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                                21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                                We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                                Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                                The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                                Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                                dist(xX) le δ

                                                                In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                                Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                                δkminus1

                                                                Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                                Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                                |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                                vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                                δkminus1

                                                                here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                                vk = πk2

                                                                Γ(k2+1)

                                                                Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                                radic2

                                                                Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                                2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                                radic2 such that

                                                                the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                                has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                                So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                                2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                                Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                                E sube K suberadicnE

                                                                Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                                radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                                E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                                Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                                1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                                on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                                Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                                c

                                                                radiclog n

                                                                n

                                                                with some absolute constant c

                                                                See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                                n(this is the

                                                                DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                                Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                                C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                                σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                                128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                128

                                                                Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                                the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                128 If in total

                                                                2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                128 |X| lt 1

                                                                then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                                k16kminus1

                                                                εkminus1eminus

                                                                c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                                which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                                M equal 1

                                                                x le sumxiisinX

                                                                cixi leradic

                                                                2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                                radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                                radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                                (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                                2(1 + ε8)

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                                and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                                radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                                |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                                22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                                It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                                Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                                where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                                Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                                Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                                )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                                (4δ

                                                                )kwe could rotate X

                                                                and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                                This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                                Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                                About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                                Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                                Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                                Q = x21 + x2

                                                                2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                                This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                                On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                (d+kminus1d

                                                                ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                )

                                                                A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                References

                                                                [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                • 1 Introduction
                                                                • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                • References

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 33

                                                                  so in order to prove the lemma (that K intersects more than a half of a sphere of radius

                                                                  cradic

                                                                  nlogN

                                                                  ) we have to take α of order logN and check that micro(K) is greater than some

                                                                  absolute positive constant that is(1minus 1radic

                                                                  παeminusα)Nge c2

                                                                  or

                                                                  (201) N log

                                                                  (1minus 1radic

                                                                  παeminusα)ge c3

                                                                  for a negative constant c3 Then we observe the value α = c logN with some c lt 1satisfies this inequality for sufficiently large N

                                                                  Using Lemma 215 from the next section we conclude (the FigielndashLindenstraussndashMilmantheorem)

                                                                  Theorem 202 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex polytope with 2N facets and 2Mvertices then

                                                                  logN middot logM ge γn

                                                                  for some absolute constant γ gt 0

                                                                  Proof By Lemma 215 we assume that K contains the unit ball B and is contained inthe ball

                                                                  radicnB The dual body Klowast defined by

                                                                  Klowast = x isin Rn forally isin K (x y) le 1is therefore contained in B and contains 1radic

                                                                  nB By Lemma 201 K intersects more than a

                                                                  half of the sphere of radius r = cradic

                                                                  nlogN

                                                                  and Klowast intersects more than a half of the sphere

                                                                  of radius rlowast = cradic

                                                                  1logM

                                                                  Note that the inequality rlowastr le 1 is what we need to prove Assume the contraryrlowastr gt 1 Then for any x with |x| = r consider its renormalized xlowast = rlowast x|x| Note that it

                                                                  cannot happen that x isin K and xlowast isin K simultaneously because (x xlowast) gt 1 Hence eitherK intersects at most half of the sphere Sr or Klowast intersects at most half of the sphere Srlowast which is a contradiction

                                                                  Small values of N and M not suitable for Lemma 201 may be considered separatelyin a similar fashion

                                                                  In fact the above lemma and theorem can be proved without the Sidak lemma byestimating the surface areas of spherical caps The idea is that a spherical cap may bevery close to a halfsphere in terms of distance and still have very small surface area Thenwe observe that the complement to a strip on a sphere is a pair of caps of small areaand if the sum of all areas is at most half of the area of the sphere then Lemma 201is established This cap area estimate corresponds to the value α = c logN while thestronger estimate (201) was not fully used in the above proof

                                                                  However the approach with caps requires writing down and estimating some integralsof trigonometric functions while the Sidak lemma allows us to work with simple expo-nential expressions Which is more important a careful use of the Sidak lemma allowedA Barvinok [Barv11] to prove the following strengthening of Theorem 202 Under theassumption of the above theorem the inequality N le αn implies M ge eβn for somepositive β = β(α)

                                                                  Another result estimates from below the volume of a centrally symmetric polytopecontaining the unit ball

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                                  Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                                  cn

                                                                  logN

                                                                  )n2vn

                                                                  (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                                  Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                                  Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                                  volK

                                                                  volKge(

                                                                  cn

                                                                  logN

                                                                  )n

                                                                  Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                                  volK

                                                                  volK=

                                                                  (volK)2

                                                                  volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                                  v2n

                                                                  ge(

                                                                  cn

                                                                  logN

                                                                  )n

                                                                  where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                                  The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                                  Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                                  h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                                  (1 + t)n= 1

                                                                  Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                                  21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                                  We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                                  Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                                  The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                                  Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                                  dist(xX) le δ

                                                                  In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                                  Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                                  δkminus1

                                                                  Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                                  Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                                  |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                                  vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                                  δkminus1

                                                                  here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                                  vk = πk2

                                                                  Γ(k2+1)

                                                                  Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                                  radic2

                                                                  Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                                  2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                                  radic2 such that

                                                                  the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                                  has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                                  So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                                  2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                                  Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                                  E sube K suberadicnE

                                                                  Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                                  radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                                  E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                                  Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                                  1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                                  on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                                  Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                                  c

                                                                  radiclog n

                                                                  n

                                                                  with some absolute constant c

                                                                  See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                                  n(this is the

                                                                  DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                                  Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                                  C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                                  σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                                  128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                  128

                                                                  Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                                  the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                  128 If in total

                                                                  2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                  128 |X| lt 1

                                                                  then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                                  k16kminus1

                                                                  εkminus1eminus

                                                                  c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                                  which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                                  M equal 1

                                                                  x le sumxiisinX

                                                                  cixi leradic

                                                                  2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                  Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                                  radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                                  (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                                  2(1 + ε8)

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                                  and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                                  radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                  For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                                  |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                                  22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                                  It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                                  Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                                  where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                                  Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                                  Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                                  )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                                  (4δ

                                                                  )kwe could rotate X

                                                                  and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                                  This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                                  Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                  f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                                  About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                                  Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                                  Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                                  Q = x21 + x2

                                                                  2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                                  This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                                  On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                  with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                  ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                  by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                  d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                  Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                  is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                  (d+kminus1d

                                                                  ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                  Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                  minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                  (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                  )

                                                                  A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                  Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                  f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                  References

                                                                  [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                  [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                  [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                  [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                  [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                  [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                  [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                  [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                  [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                  [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                  [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                  [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                  Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                  Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                  Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                  [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                  [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                  [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                  [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                  [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                  [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                  [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                  [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                  [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                  [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                  [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                  [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                  [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                  [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                  18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                  347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                  2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                  ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                  and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                  bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                  Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                  Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                  dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                  [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                  [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                  [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                  [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                  [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                  GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                  [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                  [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                  [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                  [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                  [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                  [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                  [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                  [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                  [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                  [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                  Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                  Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                  Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                  E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                  URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                  • 1 Introduction
                                                                  • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                  • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                  • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                  • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                  • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                  • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                  • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                  • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                  • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                  • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                  • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                  • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                  • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                  • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                  • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                  • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                  • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                  • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                  • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                  • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                  • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                  • References

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 34

                                                                    Lemma 203 Assume a centrally symmetric convex polytope K sub Rn contains the unitball B and has 2N facets Then its volume is at least(

                                                                    cn

                                                                    logN

                                                                    )n2vn

                                                                    (for sufficiently large N) where c gt 0 is some absolute constant

                                                                    Proof The intersection of K with the ball bounded by the sphere from 201 is at leasthalf of this ball by volume

                                                                    Corollary 204 Let K sub Rn be a polytope with N vertices on the unit ball B Then

                                                                    volK

                                                                    volKge(

                                                                    cn

                                                                    logN

                                                                    )n

                                                                    Proof We can replace K with convK cup minusK to make it centrally symmetric At thisstep the volume of K increases and the volume of K decreases So assume K centrallysymmetric with 2N vertices Note that the polar K has 2N facets and then

                                                                    volK

                                                                    volK=

                                                                    (volK)2

                                                                    volK middot volKge (volK)2

                                                                    v2n

                                                                    ge(

                                                                    cn

                                                                    logN

                                                                    )n

                                                                    where we used Corollary 146 and Lemma 203

                                                                    The same approach with more care allows to prove that logN can be replaced withlog(Nn)+1 as was shown by Gluskin in [Glu1988] Barany and Furedi in [BF87] proveda similar result using different technique and deduced the following Suppose we have ablack box that for any point x isin Rn either asserts that x is inside the unknown convexbody K or provides a separating hyperlane for K and x From the above results weconclude that an algorithm estimating the volume of K with such a black box needs ahuge number of queries to the black box But it turns out that practically the volumecan be efficiently estimated with a randomized algorithm

                                                                    Another famous problem about centrally symmetric polytopes is to prove that the totalnumber of faces of all dimensions (including the polytope itself) is at least 3n The readermay easily check that this bound is attained for the cube or its dual the crosspolytopeIn the case of simple or simplicial polytopes Stanley proved [Stan87] this conjecture usingthe correspondence between the linear space spanned by the faces of a polytope up to acertain equivalence relation and the cohomology ring of the corresponding algebraic (toric)variety Let us give a sketch for those knowing or willing to learn some toric geometryThe symmetry of a polytope makes an action of the involution ι on the polytope Pand its corresponding toric variety XP Let T = (Clowast)n be the torus acting on XP Then it remains to compare the two descriptions of the T -equivariant cohomology of XP HlowastT (XP ) = Hlowast(XP ) otimes Hlowast(BT ) from the collapsing spectral sequence on the one handand HlowastT (XP ) is the StanleyndashReisner ring of P that is something defined combinatoriallyby P From this it follows that the Hilbert series of the trace of ι on those spaces satisfies

                                                                    h(ιHlowastT (XP )) = h(ιHlowastT (XP )) middot h(ιHlowast(BT )) =h(ιHlowastT (XP ))

                                                                    (1 + t)n= 1

                                                                    Hence h(ιHlowast(XP )) = (1 + t)n and from this it is possible to deduce the lower bounds onthe numbers of faces calculated from hP (t) = h(ιHlowast(XP )) see the details in [Stan87]and [Cox11]

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                                    21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                                    We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                                    Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                                    The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                                    Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                                    dist(xX) le δ

                                                                    In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                                    Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                                    δkminus1

                                                                    Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                                    Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                                    |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                                    vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                                    δkminus1

                                                                    here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                                    vk = πk2

                                                                    Γ(k2+1)

                                                                    Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                                    radic2

                                                                    Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                                    2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                                    radic2 such that

                                                                    the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                                    has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                                    So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                                    2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                                    Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                                    E sube K suberadicnE

                                                                    Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                                    radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                                    E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                                    Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                                    1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                                    on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                                    Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                                    c

                                                                    radiclog n

                                                                    n

                                                                    with some absolute constant c

                                                                    See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                                    n(this is the

                                                                    DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                                    Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                                    C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                                    σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                                    128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                    128

                                                                    Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                                    the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                    128 If in total

                                                                    2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                    128 |X| lt 1

                                                                    then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                                    k16kminus1

                                                                    εkminus1eminus

                                                                    c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                                    which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                                    M equal 1

                                                                    x le sumxiisinX

                                                                    cixi leradic

                                                                    2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                    Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                                    radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                                    (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                                    2(1 + ε8)

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                                    and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                                    radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                    For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                                    |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                                    22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                                    It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                                    Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                                    where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                                    Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                                    Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                                    )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                                    (4δ

                                                                    )kwe could rotate X

                                                                    and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                                    This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                                    Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                    f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                                    About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                                    Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                                    Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                                    Q = x21 + x2

                                                                    2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                                    This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                                    On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                    with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                    ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                    by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                    d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                    Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                    is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                    (d+kminus1d

                                                                    ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                    Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                    minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                    (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                    )

                                                                    A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                    Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                    f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                    References

                                                                    [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                    [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                    [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                    [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                    [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                    [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                    [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                    [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                    [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                    [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                    [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                    [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                    Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                    Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                    Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                    [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                    [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                    [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                    [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                    [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                    [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                    [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                    [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                    [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                    [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                    [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                    [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                    [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                    [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                    18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                    347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                    2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                    ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                    and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                    bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                    Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                    Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                    dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                    [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                    [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                    [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                    [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                    [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                    GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                    [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                    [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                    [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                    [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                    [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                    [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                    [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                    [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                    [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                    [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                    Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                    Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                    Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                    E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                    URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                    • 1 Introduction
                                                                    • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                    • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                    • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                    • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                    • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                    • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                    • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                    • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                    • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                    • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                    • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                    • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                    • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                    • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                    • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                    • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                    • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                    • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                    • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                    • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                    • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                    • References

                                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 35

                                                                      21 Dvoretzkyrsquos theorem

                                                                      We are going to discuss one of the most famous applications of the concentration phe-nomenon on the sphere the Dvoretzky theorem

                                                                      Theorem 211 For a positive real ε and a positive integer k there exists another positiveinteger n(k ε) with the following property If middot is any norm on Rn then there exists aEuclidean norm | middot | on Rn and a k-dimensional linear subspace L sube Rn such that

                                                                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|

                                                                      The proof needs several lemmas of which we prove all but one First we will needδ-nets on the sphere Skminus1

                                                                      Definition 212 A finite set X sub Skminus1 is a δ-net if for every x isin Skminus1

                                                                      dist(xX) le δ

                                                                      In what follows we assume for simplicity that δ le π4 and assume k to be sufficientlylarge

                                                                      Lemma 213 There exists a δ-net in Skminus1 of size at most k4kminus1

                                                                      δkminus1

                                                                      Proof Find an inclusion maximal set of disjoint spherical caps of radius δ2 (balls ingeodesic metric) in Skminus1 Let X be the set of their centers Since we cannot add anyother spherical cap of radius δ2 to the set every point of Skminus1 is at distance at most δfrom some x isin X and therefore X is a δ-net

                                                                      Now we estimate |X| comparing the total surface area of the caps which is at least|X|vkminus1(δ4)kminus1 (here we use that δ is not too big) to the surface area of the spheresk = kvk Hence

                                                                      |X| le kvk4kminus1

                                                                      vkminus1δkminus1le k4kminus1

                                                                      δkminus1

                                                                      here we use that vk le vkminus1 for k ge 6 which can be seen from the explicit formula

                                                                      vk = πk2

                                                                      Γ(k2+1)

                                                                      Lemma 214 If X is a δ-net in Skminus1 and δ lt π4 then every xprime isin Skminus1 can be expressedas a positive linear combination of vectors from X with sum of coefficients at most

                                                                      radic2

                                                                      Proof Let us prove that the ball Bprime of radius 1radic

                                                                      2 is contained in convX Assuming thecontrary by the HahnndashBanach theorem we obtain a vector y with |y| = 1

                                                                      radic2 such that

                                                                      the setHy = x (x y) ge (y y)

                                                                      has no common interior point with convX Then it is easy to see that the normalizedy|y| is at geodesic distance at least π4 gt δ from X

                                                                      So we conclude that Skminus1 is insideradic

                                                                      2 convX which is equivalent to what we need

                                                                      Lemma 215 Let K be a centrally symmetric convex body in Rn Then there exists acentrally symmetric ellipsoid E such that

                                                                      E sube K suberadicnE

                                                                      Proof Take as E the ellipsoid of maximal volume contained in K the John ellipsoidAfter a linear transformation assume that E is a unit ball If there exist a point x isin Kwith |x| gt

                                                                      radicn than it can be shown by a straightforward calculation that after stretching

                                                                      E in the direction of x and shrinking it in the orthogonal to x directions E can increaseits volume while remaining inside the set conv(E cup x cup minusx) sube B

                                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                                      Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                                      1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                                      on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                                      Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                                      c

                                                                      radiclog n

                                                                      n

                                                                      with some absolute constant c

                                                                      See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                                      n(this is the

                                                                      DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                                      Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                                      C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                                      σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                                      128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                      128

                                                                      Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                                      the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                      128 If in total

                                                                      2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                      128 |X| lt 1

                                                                      then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                                      k16kminus1

                                                                      εkminus1eminus

                                                                      c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                                      which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                                      M equal 1

                                                                      x le sumxiisinX

                                                                      cixi leradic

                                                                      2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                      Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                                      radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                                      (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                                      2(1 + ε8)

                                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                                      and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                                      radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                      For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                                      |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                                      22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                                      It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                                      Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                                      where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                                      Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                                      Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                                      )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                                      (4δ

                                                                      )kwe could rotate X

                                                                      and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                                      This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                                      Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                      f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                                      About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                                      Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                                      Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                                      Q = x21 + x2

                                                                      2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                                      This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                                      On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                      with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                      ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                      by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                      d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                      Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                      is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                      (d+kminus1d

                                                                      ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                      Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                      minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                      (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                      )

                                                                      A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                      Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                      f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                      References

                                                                      [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                      [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                      [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                      [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                      [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                      [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                      [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                      [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                      [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                      [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                      [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                      [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                      Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                      Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                      Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                      [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                      [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                      [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                      [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                      [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                      [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                      [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                      [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                      [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                      [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                      [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                      [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                      [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                      [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                      18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                      347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                      2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                      ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                      and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                      bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                      Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                      Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                      dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                      [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                      [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                      [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                      [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                      [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                      GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                      [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                      [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                      [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                      [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                      [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                      [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                      [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                      [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                      [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                      [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                      Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                      Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                      Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                      E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                      URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                      • 1 Introduction
                                                                      • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                      • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                      • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                      • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                      • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                      • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                      • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                      • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                      • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                      • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                      • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                      • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                      • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                      • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                      • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                      • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                      • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                      • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                      • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                      • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                      • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                      • References

                                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 36

                                                                        Now in Theorem 211 we consider some norm on Rn By Lemma 215 we choose theellipsoid E and define | middot | to be the Euclidean norm with E as the unit ball Then weconsider f(x) = x as a function of the sphere Snminus1 the conclusion of Lemma 215 readsas

                                                                        1radicnle f(x) le 1

                                                                        on the sphere The condition f(x) le 1 (using the triangle inequality for the norm) meansthat f is 1-Lipschitz on Snminus1 Let M be the median of f For the following lemma weonly give a sketch of a proof

                                                                        Lemma 216 Under the above assumptions on middot and | middot | generated by the Johnellipsoid the median M of middot has the lower bound

                                                                        c

                                                                        radiclog n

                                                                        n

                                                                        with some absolute constant c

                                                                        See the discussion of this lemma in [Ball97] A different approach to this difficultyis to select an orthonormal (relative to | middot |) base ei such that ei ge nminusi

                                                                        n(this is the

                                                                        DvoretzkyndashRogers lemma) then choose the linear span of the first n2 of these vectorsas the new space to work in and establish an analogue of Lemma 216 for this subspaceThis is established using averaging of the expression x1e1 + middot middot middot+ xnen over all possiblechanges of signs of the coordinates xi along with the triangle inequality for the normThe details are given for example in [Led01 Section 35]

                                                                        Proof of Theorem 211 assuming Lemma 216 By Corollary 173 (here σ is the probabil-ity measure on Snminus1) for the set

                                                                        C = x isin Snminus1 |x minusM | geMε8we have

                                                                        σ(C) le 2eminus(nminus2)M2ε2

                                                                        128 le 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                        128

                                                                        Now we take δ = ε4 and choose a δ-net X on Skminus1 the latter is considered as the unitsphere of the coordinate subspace Rk sub Rn Applying a random rotation ρ to X we see

                                                                        the following For any xi isin X the probability of the event xi isin C is at most 2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                        128 If in total

                                                                        2eminusc2ε2 logn

                                                                        128 |X| lt 1

                                                                        then for some random rotation the whole X gets inside Snminus1 C Then we choose L tobe the image ρ(Rk) and denote by S(L) the unit sphere of L From the bound on |X| ofLemma 213 the inequality condition is satisfied when

                                                                        k16kminus1

                                                                        εkminus1eminus

                                                                        c2ε2 logn128 lt 12

                                                                        which is indeed true for sufficiently large nBy Lemma 214 we conclude that for any x isin S(L) after a rescaling making the median

                                                                        M equal 1

                                                                        x le sumxiisinX

                                                                        cixi leradic

                                                                        2 maxxiisinXxi le

                                                                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                        Hence again using the triangle inequality for the norm middot on S(L) has Lipschitz constantat most

                                                                        radic2(1 + ε8) It follows that the values of middot on S(L) are between

                                                                        (1minus ε8)minus ε4 middotradic

                                                                        2(1 + ε8)

                                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                                        and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                                        radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                        For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                                        |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                                        22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                                        It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                                        Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                                        where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                                        Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                                        Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                                        )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                                        (4δ

                                                                        )kwe could rotate X

                                                                        and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                                        This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                                        Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                        f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                                        About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                                        Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                                        Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                                        Q = x21 + x2

                                                                        2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                                        This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                                        On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                        with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                        ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                        by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                        d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                        Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                        is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                        (d+kminus1d

                                                                        ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                        Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                        minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                        (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                        )

                                                                        A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                        Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                        f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                        References

                                                                        [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                        [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                        [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                        [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                        [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                        [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                        [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                        [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                        [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                        [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                        [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                        [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                        Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                        Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                        Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                        [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                        [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                        [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                        [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                        [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                        [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                        [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                        [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                        [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                        [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                        [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                        [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                        [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                        [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                        18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                        347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                        2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                        ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                        and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                        bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                        Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                        Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                        dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                        [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                        [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                        [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                        [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                        [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                        GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                        [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                        [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                        [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                        [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                        [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                        [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                        [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                        [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                        [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                        [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                        Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                        Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                        Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                        E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                        URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                        • 1 Introduction
                                                                        • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                        • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                        • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                        • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                        • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                        • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                        • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                        • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                        • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                        • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                        • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                        • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                        • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                        • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                        • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                        • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                        • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                        • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                        • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                        • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                        • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                        • References

                                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 37

                                                                          and(1 + ε8) + ε4 middot

                                                                          radic2(1 + ε8)

                                                                          For sufficiently small ε after a slight rescaling of middot we obtain the inequality

                                                                          |x| le x le (1 + ε)|x|for any x isin L

                                                                          22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results

                                                                          It was noted in [Mil88] that a simple proof for the Dvoretzky theorem would followfrom the following topological conjecture of Knaster [Kna47]

                                                                          Conjecture 221 For any finite set X sub Snminus1 with |X| = n and any continuous functionf Snminus1 rarr R it is possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxn)

                                                                          where x1 xn are the points of X

                                                                          Some cases of this conjecture were confirmed when X is an orthonormal basis whenn = 3 when |X| is prime and the points of X form a two-dimensional regular polygonsee the discussion in [DK11] for more details and references But unexpectedly in thepaper of Kashin and Szarek [KS03] a counterexample was constructed using some knowl-edge about sections of a cube and similar things A greatly simplified exposition of thiscounterexample is given in [Mat10 Miniature 32]

                                                                          Of course if the conjecture were true we could take a δ-net on Skminus1 as X of size at most(4δ

                                                                          )kby Lemma 213 Then assuming Conjecture 221 for n ge

                                                                          (4δ

                                                                          )kwe could rotate X

                                                                          and rescale the Euclidean norm to have the equality x = |x| for any x isin X The restwould follow from Lemma 214

                                                                          This approach could still pass if we establish the weak Knaster conjecture with a rea-sonable estimate for the function n(m)

                                                                          Conjecture 222 There exists a function n = n(m) with the following property Forany finite set x1 xm sub Snminus1 of size k and any continuous function f Snminus1 rarr R itis possible to find a rotation ρ such that

                                                                          f(ρx1) = middot middot middot = f(ρxm)

                                                                          About this generalized conjecture almost as little is known as about the original oneIn fact already for m = 4 the existence of n(m) is only known for some very particulartypes of sets x1 xm

                                                                          Another direction of Dvoretzky-type results is the ldquoalgebraic Dvoretzky theoremrdquo from [DK11]

                                                                          Theorem 223 For an even positive integer d and a positive integer k there exists n(d k)such that for any homogeneous polynomial f of degree d on Rn where n ge n(d k) thereexists a linear k-subspace L sube Rn such that f |L is proportional to the d2-th power of thestandard quadratic form

                                                                          Q = x21 + x2

                                                                          2 + middot middot middot+ x2n

                                                                          This theorem is very similar to the Dvoretzky theorem but unlike the latter it givesa precisely ldquoroundrdquo section for a polynomial Unfortunately the topological tools usedin its proof do not give any explicit bound on n(d k) Moreover it is not clear how todeduce the Dvoretzky theorem from this result even if the bound were reasonable

                                                                          On the other hand for odd degree d it is proved with elementary topology [DK11] thatany homogeneous polynomial of degree d in n variables vanishes on some linear k-subspace

                                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                          with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                          ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                          by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                          d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                          Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                          is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                          (d+kminus1d

                                                                          ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                          Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                          minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                          (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                          )

                                                                          A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                          Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                          f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                          References

                                                                          [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                          [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                          [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                          [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                          [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                          [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                          [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                          [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                          [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                          [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                          [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                          [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                          Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                          Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                          Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                          [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                          [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                          [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                          [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                          [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                          [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                          [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                          [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                          [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                          [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                          [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                          [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                          [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                          [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                          18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                          347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                          2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                          ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                          and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                          bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                          Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                          Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                          dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                          [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                          [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                          [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                          [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                          [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                          GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                          [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                          [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                          [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                          [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                          [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                          [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                          [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                          [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                          [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                          [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                          Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                          Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                          Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                          E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                          URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                          • 1 Introduction
                                                                          • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                          • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                          • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                          • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                          • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                          • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                          • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                          • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                          • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                          • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                          • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                          • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                          • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                          • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                          • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                          • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                          • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                          • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                          • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                          • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                          • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                          • References

                                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 38

                                                                            with n = k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                            ) This fact is originally due to BJ Birch [Bir57] who established it

                                                                            by algebraic tools with a worse estimate for n(d k)Let us sketch the proof of the Birch theorem for a homogeneous polynomial P of degree

                                                                            d in n variables The space of all orthonormal k-frames in Rn is parameterized by theStiefel manifold Vnk For any frame (e1 ek) the polynomial

                                                                            Pe(t1 tk) = P (t1e1 + t2e2 + middot middot middot+ tkek)

                                                                            is a degree d homogeneous polynomial in k variables The space W of all such polynomialshas dimension

                                                                            (d+kminus1d

                                                                            ) The correspondence e 7rarr Pe makes an odd map from Vnk to W

                                                                            Here odd is understood for Vnk so that along with a frame (e1 ek) we can considerthe frame

                                                                            minus(e1 ek) = (minuse1 minusek)Then one form of the generalized BorsukndashUlam theorem (see [Mat03]) asserts that someframe is mapped to zero (that is exactly what we need) provided the space Vnk is

                                                                            (dimW minus 1)-connected This is indeed the case when n ge k +(d+kminus1d

                                                                            )

                                                                            A similar proof works for the following result about ldquomaking a convex function sym-metricrdquo

                                                                            Theorem 224 Let X sub Skminus1 be a centrally symmetric subset with |X| = 2m Ifn ge m + k and f Snminus1 rarr R is a continuous function then it is possible to find anisometric copy ρ(X) sub Snminus1 such that for any x isin ρ(X)

                                                                            f(x) = f(minusx)

                                                                            References

                                                                            [Alon86] N Alon The number of polytopes configurations and real matroids Mathematika 3362ndash711986

                                                                            [ABMR11] JL Arocha J Bracho L Montejano JL Ramırez Alfonsın Transversals to the convex hullsof all k-sets of discrete subsets of Rn Journal of Combinatorial Theory Series A 118(1)197ndash2072011

                                                                            [Ati83] MF Atiyah Angular momentum convex polyhedra and algebraic geometry Proceedings of theEdinburgh Mathematical Society (2) 26(2)121ndash133 1983

                                                                            [Ball97] K Ball An elementary introduction to modern convex geometry Flavors of Geometry MSRIPublications 31 1997

                                                                            [Ball01] K Ball Convex geometry and functional analysis Handbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces161ndash194 2001

                                                                            [Ball04] K Ball An elementary introduction to monotone transportation Geometric Aspects of Func-tional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1850 99ndash106 2004

                                                                            [BF87] I Barany Z Furedi Computing the volume is difficult Discrete and Computational Geometry2(1)319ndash326 1987

                                                                            [Barv11] A Barvinok A bound for the number of vertices of a polytope with applications Arxiv preprintarXiv11082871 2011

                                                                            [Bern76] DN Bernstein The number of roots of a system of equations Functional Anal Appl 9(3)183ndash185 1976

                                                                            [Bir57] BJ Birch Homogeneous forms of odd degree in a large number of variables Mathematika 4102ndash105 1957

                                                                            [Bor33] K Borsuk Drei Satze uber die n-dimensionale euklidische Sphare Fundam Math 20(1)177ndash1901933

                                                                            [BH11] B Bukh A Hubard Space crossing numbers Arxiv preprint arXiv11021275 2011[Cha89] B Chazelle E Welzl Quasi-optimal range searching in spaces of finite VC-dimension Discrete

                                                                            Comput Geom 4467ndash489 1989[Cox11] D Cox J Little H Schenck Toric Varieties Graduate Studies in Mathematics 124 American

                                                                            Mathematical Society 2011[Dol94] VL Dolrsquonikov Transversals of families of sets in Rn and a connection between the Helly and

                                                                            Borsuk theorems Sb Math 79(1)93ndash107 1994

                                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                            [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                            [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                            [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                            [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                            [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                            [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                            [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                            [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                            [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                            [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                            [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                            [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                            [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                            [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                            18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                            347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                            2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                            ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                            and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                            bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                            Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                            Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                            dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                            [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                            [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                            [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                            [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                            [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                            GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                            [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                            [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                            [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                            [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                            [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                            [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                            [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                            [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                            [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                            [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                            Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                            Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                            Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                            E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                            URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                            • 1 Introduction
                                                                            • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                            • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                            • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                            • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                            • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                            • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                            • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                            • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                            • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                            • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                            • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                            • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                            • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                            • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                            • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                            • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                            • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                            • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                            • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                            • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                            • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                            • References

                                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 39

                                                                              [DK11] VL Dolrsquonikov RN Karasev Dvoretzky type theorems for multivariate polynomials and sectionsof convex bodies Geometric And Functional Analysis 21(2)301ndash318 2011

                                                                              [Ful93] W Fulton Introduction to toric varieties Annals of Mathematics Studies 131 Princeton Uni-versity Press Princeton NJ 1993

                                                                              [GM2001] A A Giannopoulos V D Milman Euclidean structure in finite dimensional normed spacesHandbook of the Geometry of Banach Spaces 1707ndash779 2001

                                                                              [Glu1988] ED Gluskin Extremal properties of orthogonal parallelepipeds and their applications to thegeometry of Banach spaces (in Russian) Mat Sbornik 136(178)85ndash96 1988

                                                                              [GH78] P Griffiths J Harris Principles of algebraic geometry Wiley-Interscience New YorkndashChichesterndashBrisbanendashToronto 1978

                                                                              [GP86] J E Goodman R Pollack Upper bounds for configurations and polytopes in Rd DiscreteComput Geom 1219ndash227 1986

                                                                              [Grom90] M Gromov Convex sets and Kahler manifolds IHES wwwihesfr gromovPDF[68]pdf1990

                                                                              [Grom03] M Gromov Isoperimetry of waists and concentration of maps Geometric and FunctionalAnalysis 13178ndash215 2003

                                                                              [Guth13] L Guth Unexpected applications of polynomials in combinatoricsmathmitedu lguthExpositionerdossurveypdf 2013

                                                                              [Har76] C G A Harnack Uber Vieltheiligkeit der ebenen algebraischen Curven Math Ann 10189ndash1991876

                                                                              [Hopf44] H Hopf Eine Verallgemeinerung bekannter Abbildungs und Uberdeckungssatze PortugaliaeMath 4129ndash139 1944

                                                                              [KMS12] H Kaplan J Matousek M Sharir Simple proofs of classical theorems in discrete geometry viathe GuthndashKatz polynomial partitioning technique Discrete Comput Geom 48(3)499ndash517 2012

                                                                              [KS03] B S Kashin S J Szarek The Knaster problem and the geometry of high-dimensional cubesComptes Rendus Mathematique 336(11)931ndash936 2003

                                                                              [Kna47] B Knaster Problem 4 Colloq Math 3030ndash31 1947[Ku08] G Kuperberg From the Mahler conjecture to Gauss linking integrals Geom Funct Anal

                                                                              18(3)870ndash892 2008[Led01] M Ledoux The concentration of measure phenomenon Amer Math Soc 2001[Leh09A] J Lehec A direct proof of the functional Santalo inequality Comptes Rendus Mathematique

                                                                              347(1)55ndash58 2009[Leh09B] J Lehec Partitions and functional Santalo inequalities Archiv der Mathematik 92(1)89ndash94

                                                                              2009[Lov78] L Lovasz Kneserrsquos conjecture chromatic number and homotopy Journal of Combinatorial The-

                                                                              ory Series A 25319ndash324 1978[Lub94] A Lubotzky Discrete groups expanding graphs and invariant measures Birkhauser 1994[Mat03] J Matousek Using the Borsuk-Ulam theorem Lectures on topological methods in combinatorics

                                                                              and geometry Springer Verlag 2003[Mat10] J Matousek Thirty-three miniatures Mathematical and algorithmic applications of linear alge-

                                                                              bra Student Mathematical Library 53 American Mathematical Society Providence RI 2010[MS86] V D Milman G Schechtman Asymptotic theory of finite dimensional normed spaces Lecture

                                                                              Notes in Mathematics 1200 Springer Verlag 1986[Mil88] V D Milman A few observations on the connections between local theory and some other fields

                                                                              Geometric Aspects of Functional Analysis Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1317 283ndash289 1988[NSV02] F Nazarov M Sodin A Volrsquoberg The geometric Kannan-Lovasz-Simonovits lemma

                                                                              dimension-free estimates for the distribution of the values of polynomials and the distribution ofthe zeros of random analytic functions St Petersbg Math J 14(2)351ndash366 2002

                                                                              [NW13] E Nevo S Wilson How many n-vertex triangulations does the 3-sphere have Arxiv preprintarXiv13111641 (2013)

                                                                              [Sid67] Z Sidak Rectangular confidence regions for the means of multivariate normal distributionsJournal of the American Statistical Association 62(318)626ndash633 1967

                                                                              [ST12] J Solymosi and T Tao An incidence theorem in higher dimensions Discrete Comput Geom48(2)255ndash280 2012

                                                                              [Stan87] RP Stanley On the number of faces of centrally-symmetric simplicial polytopes Graphs andCombinatorics 3(1)55-66 1987

                                                                              [Stan89] RP Stanley Log-concave and unimodal sequences in algebra combinatorics and geometryAnnals of the New York Academy of Sciences 576500ndash535 1989

                                                                              GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                              [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                              [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                              [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                              [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                              [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                              [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                              [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                              [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                              [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                              [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                              Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                              Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                              Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                              E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                              URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                              • 1 Introduction
                                                                              • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                              • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                              • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                              • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                              • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                              • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                              • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                              • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                              • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                              • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                              • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                              • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                              • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                              • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                              • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                              • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                              • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                              • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                              • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                              • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                              • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                              • References

                                                                                GEOMETRY OF MEASURES PARTITIONS AND CONVEX BODIES 40

                                                                                [Ste45] H Steinhaus Sur la division des ensembles de espace par les plans et des ensembles plans par lescercles Fundam Math 33245ndash263 1945

                                                                                [ST42] A H Stone and J W Tukey Generalized ldquosandwichrdquo theorems Duke Mathematical Journal9(2)356ndash359 1942

                                                                                [SW85] W Stromquist and D Woodall Sets on which several measures agree J Math Anal Appl108241ndash248 1985

                                                                                [ST83] E Szemeredi and W T Trotter Extremal problems in discrete geometry Combinatorica 3381ndash392 1983

                                                                                [Tao07] T Tao Open question the Mahler conjecture on convex bodiesterrytaowordpresscom20070308open-problem-the-mahler-conjecture-on-convex-bodies2007

                                                                                [TaoVu10] T Tao V H Vu Additive combinatorics Cambridge studies in advanced mathematics 1052010

                                                                                [Tao11] T Tao The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality for nilpotent groupsterrytaowordpresscom20110916the-brunn-minkowski-inequality-for-nilpotent-groups 2011

                                                                                [Wel88] E Welzl Partition trees for triangle counting and other range searching problems Proc 4thAnnu ACM Sympos Comput Geom 23ndash33 1988

                                                                                [Wel92] E Welzl On spanning trees with low crossing numbers Data structures and efficient algorithmsLecture Notes in Computer Science vol 594 Springer Verlag 1992 233ndash249

                                                                                [YY85] A C Yao F F Yao A general approach to d-dimensional geometric queries Proceedings ofthe seventeenth annual ACM symposium on Theory of computing STOC 85 New York NY USAACM 1985 163ndash168

                                                                                Roman Karasev Dept of Mathematics Moscow Institute of Physics and TechnologyInstitutskiy per 9 Dolgoprudny Russia 141700

                                                                                Roman Karasev Institute for Information Transmission Problems RAS Bolshoy Karetnyper 19 Moscow Russia 127994

                                                                                Roman Karasev Laboratory of Discrete and Computational Geometry YaroslavlrsquoState University Sovetskaya st 14 Yaroslavlrsquo Russia 150000

                                                                                E-mail address r n karasevmailru

                                                                                URL httpwwwrkarasevruen

                                                                                • 1 Introduction
                                                                                • 2 The BorsukndashUlam theorem
                                                                                • 3 The ham sandwich theorem and its polynomial version
                                                                                • 4 Partitioning a single point set with successive polynomials cuts
                                                                                • 5 The SzemereacutedindashTrotter theorem
                                                                                • 6 Spanning trees with low crossing number
                                                                                • 7 Counting point arrangements and polytopes in Rd
                                                                                • 8 Chromatic number of graphs from hyperplane transversals
                                                                                • 9 Partition into prescribed parts
                                                                                • 10 Monotone maps
                                                                                • 11 The BrunnndashMinkowski inequality and isoperimetry
                                                                                • 12 Log-concavity
                                                                                • 13 Mixed volumes
                                                                                • 14 The BlaschkendashSantaloacute inequality
                                                                                • 15 Needle decomposition
                                                                                • 16 Isoperimetry for the Gaussian measure
                                                                                • 17 Isoperimetry and concentration on the sphere
                                                                                • 18 More remarks on isoperimetry
                                                                                • 19 Šidaacuteks lemma
                                                                                • 20 Centrally symmetric polytopes
                                                                                • 21 Dvoretzkys theorem
                                                                                • 22 Topological and algebraic Dvoretzky type results
                                                                                • References

                                                                                  top related